678361

Skoda Superb - 2008 Handleiding

229
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/272
Pagina verder
SIMPLY CLEVER
ŠkodaSuperb
OWNER'S MANUAL
How you can contribute to a cleaner environment
The fuel consumption of your Škoda - and thus the level of pollutants contained
in the exhaust - is also determined by how you drive.
The noise level and wear and tear are also influenced by how you personally
handle your vehicle. This Owner ´s Manual tells you how to drive your Škoda to
achieve the minimum impact on the environment, and how to save money at
the same time. Look up „Environment“ in the Index to find out more.
Please also refer to all the texts identified with a C
in this Owner ´s Manual.
Make your contribution - for the sake of the environment.
www.skoda-auto.com
Návod k obsluze
Superb anglicky 03.08
3T0 012 003 C
Superb anglicky 03.08
NKO B6.indd 1NKO B6.indd 1 21.4.2008 9:02:3821.4.2008 9:02:38
Introduction
You have opted for a Škoda - our sincere thanks for your confidence in us.
Your new Škoda offers you a vehicle featuring the most modern engineering and a wide range of equipment which
you will undoubtedly wish to use to the full during your daily motoring. That is why, we recommend that you read
this Owner's Manual attentively to enable you to become familiar with your car and all that it offers as quickly as
possible.
Please do not hesitate to contact your specialist garage or importer should you have any further questions or any
problems regarding your vehicle which may arise. He will be ready at any time to receive your questions, sugges-
tions and criticisms.
National legal provisions, which deviate from the information contained in these operating instructions, take prec-
edence over the information contained in the operating instructions.
We wish you much pleasure with your Škoda and pleasant motoring at all times.
Your Škoda Auto
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
1
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Introduction2
On-board literature
The on-board literature for your vehicle consists of this “Owner's
Manual” as well as the brochures “Quick Reference Guide”, “Service
Schedule” and “Help on the road”. There can also be a variety of other
additional operating manuals and instructions on-board (e.g. an oper-
ating manual for the radio) depending on the vehicle model and equip-
ment.
If one of the publications listed above is missing, please contact a Škoda
Service Partner immediately, where one will be glad to assist you in such
matters.
One should note that the details given in the vehicle's papers always
take precedence over those in the Owner's Manual.
Owner's Manual
This Owner's Manual describes the current scope of equipment.
Certain items of equipment listed are only installed later on and only
envisaged for particular markets. The illustrations can differ in minor
details from your vehicle; they are only intended for general information.
In addition to information regarding all the controls and equipment, the
Owner's Manual also contains important information regarding care and
operation for your safety and also to retain the value of your vehicle. To
provide you with valuable tips and aids. You can learn how how you can
operate your vehicle safely, economically and in an environmentally
conscious way.
For safety reasons, please also pay attention to the information on
accessories, modifications and replacement of parts ⇒ page 228.
The other chapters of the Owner's Manual are also important, however,
for proper treatment of your car - in addition to regular care and mainte-
nance - helps to retain its value and in many cases is also one of the
conditions for possible warranty claims.
The Brief instruction
includes an overview of the most important controls of your vehicle.
The Service schedule
contains:
• Vehicle data,
• Service intervals,
• Overview of the service work,
• Service proof,
• Confirmation of mobility warranty,
• important information on the warranty.
The confirmations of the carried out service work are one of the condi-
tions for possible warranty claims.
Please always present the Service schedule when you take your car to a
Škoda Service Partner.
If the Service schedule is missing or worn, please contact your Škoda
Service Partner, where your car is serviced regularly. You will receive a
duplicate, in which the previously carried out service work are confirmed.
Help on the road
contains the addresses and telephone numbers of Škoda Importers.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
2
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Contents 3
Contents
Layout of this Owner's Manual
(explanations)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights . . .
General view of the instrument cluster . . . . . . . . .
Engine revolutions counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Counter for distance driven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Interval Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-functional indicator (onboard computer)*
Information display* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Check Control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the battery of the radio remote control
Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child safety lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlocking and locking car . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchonisation of the remote control . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric sliding/tilting roof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights and Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper and wash system . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic dimming exterior mirror* . . . . . . . . . . .
Seats and Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting front seats electrically* . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Middle rear head restraint* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The roof rack* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette lighter*, power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climatic* (semi-automatic air conditioning
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climatronic* (automatic air conditioning) . . . . . .
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and
ventilation)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting-off and Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting steering wheel position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear parking aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front and rear parking aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic gearbox DSG* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic gearbox DSG* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multifunction steering wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal telephone preinstallation GSM II* . . . .
Universal telephone preinstallation GSM III* . . . .
Phone voice phonebook* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile phones and two-way radio systems . . . . .
Input AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CD changer* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passive Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Correct seated position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The physical principle of a frontal collision . . . . .
Important safety information regarding the use of
seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How are seat belts correctly fastened? . . . . . . . . .
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver's knee airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
7
8
8
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
14
14
19
21
21
22
26
36
36
36
37
37
38
43
43
44
45
45
47
50
53
53
61
63
65
68
69
70
71
71
72
75
75
76
78
83
84
85
86
87
96
96
100
106
110
110
111
112
115
116
117
120
123
123
130
130
133
137
143
145
146
146
149
149
149
150
154
154
155
155
156
160
160
161
164
165
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
3
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Contents4
Head airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deactivating an airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What you should know about transporting children!
Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching a child seat using the “ISOFIX” system .
Attaching child seat using the “Top Tether” system
Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intelligent Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic stability programme (ESP)* . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antilock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uphill-Start off-Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electromechanical power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre inflation pressure-control system* . . . . . . . . .
Diesel particle filter* (diesel engine) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving and the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving in an economical and environmentally
conscious manner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motoring abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Avoiding damage to your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the
vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of the exterior of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of the interior of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspecting and Replenishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels and Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories, changes and replacement of parts
Accessories and replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Breakdown assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Breakdown assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First-aid box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fire extinguisher* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre repair kit* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tow-starting and towing vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses and light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Used abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identification details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel consumption according to the regulations
(99/100/EU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8 ltr./118 kW TSI - EU 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9 ltr./77 kW TDI PD - EU 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.0 ltr./103 kW TDI PD - EU 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
167
168
171
171
174
177
178
179
179
179
182
183
183
183
184
184
185
186
187
187
187
187
188
188
192
192
193
194
194
197
197
197
197
202
205
205
205
206
208
208
210
213
215
216
220
222
222
228
228
228
229
229
229
229
229
230
230
231
231
236
237
241
241
246
255
255
255
255
255
255
255
256
257
258
260
262
265
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
4
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Contents 5
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
5
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Layout of this Owner's Manual (explanations)6
Layout of this Owner's Manual (explanations)
The Owner's Manual has been systematically designed, in order to make it easy for
you to find and absorb the information you require.
Chapters, table of contents and subject index
The text of the manual are divided into relatively short sections which are combined
into easy-to-read chapters. The chapter you are reading at any particular moment
is highlighted at the bottom right of the page.
The Table of contents is arranged according to the chapters and the detailed
Subject index at the end of the Owner's Manual helps you to rapidly find the infor-
mation you are looking for.
Sections
The majority of Sections apply to all models.
Since there is a wide range of different equipment and options available it is clearly
unavoidable, despite dividing the contents into sections, that mention may be
made of equipment which is not fitted to your vehicle.
Equipment which is marked * is only standard on certain vehicle model versions or
only suppliable as optional equipment for certain models.
Brief information and instructions
Each section has a Heading.
This is followed by Brief information (in large italic lettering), which tells you the
subject which is dealt with in this section.
Most of the illustrations are accompanied by an Instruction (in relatively large
letters) which explains to you in a straightforward way the action you have to take.
Work steps which have to be carried out are illustrated with a hyphen.
Notes
All four kinds of notes, which are used in the text, are always stated at the end of the
respective section.
WARNING
The most important notes are marked with the heading WARNING. These
WARNING notes draw your attention to a serious risk of accident or injury.
While reading the text you will frequently encounter a double arrow
followed by a small warning symbol. This symbol is intended to draw your
attention to a WARNING note at the end of the section to which you must pay
careful attention.
Caution
A Caution note draws your attention to the possibility of damage to your vehicle
(e.g. damage to gearbox), or points out general risks of an accident.
For the sake of the environment
An Environmental note draws your attention to environmental protection aspects.
This is where you will, for example, find tips aimed at reducing your fuel consump-
tion.
Note
A normal Note draws your attention in a general way to important information.
Direction indications
All direction indications such as “left”, “right”, “front”, “rear” relate to the direction
of travel of the vehicle.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
6
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Cockpit 7
Using the system
Fig. 1 Certain items of equipment shown in the illustration are only fitted to particular model versions or are optional items of equipment.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
7
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Cockpit8
Cockpit
Overview
This general view is designed to help you to quickly become familiar
with the instruments, gauges and controls.
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air outlet vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lever for the multi-functional switch:
− Turn signal light, headlight and parking light, headlight flasher
− Speed regulating system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel:
− with horn
− with driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− with pushbuttons for radio, navigation system and mobile
phone* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument cluster: Instruments and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . .
Lever for the multi-functional switch:
− Multi-functional indicator* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Windshield wiper and wash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air outlet vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control dial for heating on the driver's seat* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch for hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control dial for heating on the front passenger seat* . . . . . . . . . .
Depending on equipment fitted:
− Radio*
− Navigation*
Storage compartment on the front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch for the front passenger airbag* (in front passenger stowage
compartment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric exterior mirror adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bonnet release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control dial for the instrument lighting and control dial for the head-
light beam range regulation* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartment on the driver's side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lever for adjusting the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver's knee airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depending on equipment fitted:
− Switch for the ESP* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Switch for the TCS* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre inflation pressure-control system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depending on equipment fitted:
− Operating controls for Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Operating controls for Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depending on equipment fitted:
− Gearshift lever (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Selector lever (automatic DSG)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicator light for a switched off front seat passenger airbag* . .
Park Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front and rear parking aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depending on equipment fitted:
− Front ashtray* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
− Storage compartment* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Note
• Equipment which is marked * is only standard on certain vehicle model
versions or only suppliable as optional equipment for certain models.
A
1
47
A
2
39
A
3
99
A
4
60
120
A
5
161
130
A
6
10
A
7
14
65
A
8
99
A
9
77
A
10
59
A
11
77
A
12
A
13
88
A
14
161
A
15
169
A
16
69
A
17
53
A
18
208
A
19
58, 59
A
20
89
A
21
110
A
22
164
A
23
111
A
24
179
181
A
25
185
A
26
96
100
A
27
113
123
A
28
169
A
29
117
A
30
116
A
31
85
89
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
8
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Cockpit 9
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• Vehicles with factory-fitted radio, mobile phone, navigation system, CD player
etc. are supplied with separate instructions for operating such equipment.
• The arrangement of the controls and switches and the location of some items
on right-hand drive models may differ from that shown in ⇒ page 7, fig. 1. The
symbols on the controls and switches are the same as for left-hand drive models.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
9
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights10
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights
General view of the instrument cluster
Engine revolutions counter ⇒ page 11
Speedometer ⇒ page 11
Button for display mode:
− Set hours / minutes
− Activating / deactivating the second speed in mph or km/h*
− Service interval - Display of the remaining number of days or miles to the
next Inspection Service / Reset*
1)
Coolant temperature gauge ⇒ page 11
Display:
− with counter for distance driven ⇒ page 12
− with Service Interval Display ⇒ page 12
− with digital clock ⇒ page 14
− with Multi-functional indicator* ⇒ page 14
− with Information display* ⇒ page 19
Fuel gauge ⇒ page 11
Button for:
− Reset trip counter for distance driven
− Resetting Service Interval Display
− Set hours / minutes
− Activate / deactivate display mode
Fig. 2 Instrument cluster
1)
Valid for countries where the values are indicated in British measuring units.
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
A
7
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
10
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 11
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Engine revolutions counter
The red zone of the rev counter scale ⇒ page 10, fig. 2 indicates the range in
which the engine control unit begins to limit the engine speed. The engine control
unit restricts the engine speed to the steady limit value.
Shift into the next higher gear or select the selector lever position D of the auto-
matic gearbox before reaching the red zone of the rev counter scale.
Avoid high engine speeds during the driving time and before the engine has been
warmed up to operating temperature ⇒ page 187.
For the sake of the environment
Shifting up early helps you save fuel and reduce the operating noise of your
vehicle.
Speedometer
Warning against excessive speeds*
An acoustic warning signal will sound when the vehicle speed exceeds 120 kilome-
tres per hour. The acoustic warning signal will switch off again when the vehicle
speed goes below this speed limit.
Note
This function is only valid for some countries.
Coolant temperature gauge
The coolant temperature gauge ⇒ page 10, fig. 2 operates only when the igni-
tion is switched on.
In order to avoid any damage to the engine, please pay attention to the following
notes regarding the temperature ranges:
Cold range
If the pointer is in the left-hand area of the scale it means that the engine has not
yet reached its operating temperature. Avoid running at high engine speeds, at full
throttle and at severe engine loads.
The operating range
The engine has reached its operating temperature as soon as the pointer moves
into the mid-range of the scale. The pointer may also move further to the right at
high engine loads and high outside temperatures. This is not critical provided the
warning symbol in the instrument cluster does not flash.
If the symbol in the instrument cluster flashes it means that either the coolant
temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low. Observe the guidelines
⇒ page 31, “Coolant temperature/ Coolant quantity ”.
WARNING
Pay attention to the warning notes ⇒ page 209, “Working in the engine
compartment” before opening the bonnet and inspecting the coolant level.
Caution
Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the fresh air inlet
impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant. There is then a risk of the engine over-
heating at high outside temperatures and high engine loads!
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge ⇒ page 10, fig. 2 only operates when the ignition is switched on.
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 60 litres. The warning symbol in the instru-
ment cluster lights up when the pointer reaches the reserve marking. There are now
about 9 litres of fuel remaining in the tank. This symbol is a reminder for you, that
you must refuel.
The following will be displayed in the information display*:
Please refuel! (Please refuel!)
A
1
A
4
A
6
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
11
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights12
An audible signal sounds as an additional warning signal.
Caution
Never run the fuel tank completely empty! An irregular fuel supply can result in
poor ignition or misfiring. Unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system and
damage the catalytic converter.
Note
After refuelling, the fuel gauge may drop by approx. a fraction during dynamic
driving (e.g. numerous curves, braking, uphill and downhill). When stopping the
vehicle or during less dynamic driving, the fuel gauge indicates again the correct
fuel quantity. This occurrence is not a fault.
Counter for distance driven
The distance which you have driven with your vehicle is shown in kilometres (km).
In some countries the measuring unit “mile” is used.
Reset button
If you hold the reset button ⇒ page 10 pressed for about 1 second, the trip
counter is set back to zero.
Trip counter for distance driven
The trip counter indicates the distance which you have driven ⇒ fig. 3 since this
counter was last reset - in steps of 100 metres or 1/10 of a mile.
Counter for distance driven
The counter for distance driven ⇒ fig. 3 indicates the total distance in kilometers or
miles which the vehicle has driven.
Fault display
If there is a fault in the instrument cluster Error will appear as a constant text in the
display. Have the fault rectified as soon as possible by a specialist workshop.
WARNING
Never seek to adjust the trip counter for distance driven while driving for
safety reasons!
Note
If vehicles which are fitted with the information display* the display of the second
speed is activated in mph or km/h, this driving speed is indicated instead of the
counter for the total distance driven.
Service Interval Display
Fig. 3 Display: Counter for
distance driven
A
7
Fig. 4 Service Interval
Display: Note
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
12
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 13
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, the text can differ on the
display.
Service Interval Display
Before the next service interval a key symbol and the remaining kilometers are
indicated after switching on the ignition ⇒ page 12, fig. 4. At the same time, a
display appears regarding the remaining days until the next service interval.
The following will be displayed in the information display*:
Service in ... km or... days
The kilometre indicator or the days indicator reduces in steps of 100 km. or days
until the service due date is reached.
A flashing key symbol and the text Service appears in the display for 20 seconds
as soon as the due date for the service is reached.
The following will be displayed in the information display*:
Service now!
Display regarding the distance and days until the following service interval
You can use the button to display the remaining distance driven and the days
until the next service interval ⇒ page 10.
A key symbol and a display regarding the remaining kilometers appear for 10
second in the display. At the same time, a display appears regarding the remaining
days until the next service interval.
On vehicles which are equipped with information display*, you can call up this
information in the following menu on ⇒ page 19:
SETUP (Settings)
Service Interval (Service)
Info
The following will be displayed in the information display* for 10 seconds:
Service in ... km or... days
Resetting Service Interval Display
It is only possible to reset the Service Interval Display, if a service message or at least
a pre-warning is shown on the display of the instrument cluster.
We recommend having this resetting performed by a specialist garage.
The specialist garage:
• resets the memory of the display after the appropriate inspection,
• makes an entry in the Service schedule,
• affix the sticker with the entry of the following service interval to the side of the
dash panel on the driver's side.
Reset the service interval displays by using the reset button ⇒ page 10 on the
trip counter.
On vehicles which are equipped with information display*, you can call up this
information in the following menu on ⇒ page 19:
SETTINGS
Service Interval (Service)
Reset
Caution
We recommend that you do not reset the Service Interval Display yourself other-
wise this can result in the service interval display being incorrectly set, which may
also result in problems with operation of your vehicle.
Note
• Never reset the display between service intervals otherwise this may result in
incorrect readouts.
• information is retained in the Service Interval Display also after the battery of
the vehicle is disconnected.
• If the instrument cluster is exchanged after a repair, the correct values must be
entered in the counter for the Service Interval Display. This work is carried out by a
specialist garage.
A
3
A
7
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
13
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights14
• The data displayed is the same after resetting the display with flexible service
intervals (QG1) using the reset button as that for a vehicle with fixed service inter-
vals (QG2). We therefore recommend having the Service Interval Display reset only
by a Škoda Service Partner who is familiar with the procedure for resetting the
display with a vehicle system tester.
• Please refer to the brochure Service schedule for extensive information about
the service intervals.
Digital clock
The time is set with the buttons and ⇒ page 10, fig. 2.
Select the display which you wish to change with the button and carry out the
change with the button .
On vehicles which are fitted with information display*, the setting of the time in the
menu Time (Clock) can be carried out ⇒ page 23.
WARNING
The clock should not be adjusted while driving for safety reasons but only
when the vehicle is stationary!
Multi-functional indicator (onboard computer)*
Introduction
The multi-functional indicator appears in the display ⇒ page 15, fig. 5 or in the
information display ⇒ page 19 depending on the equipment fitted to your vehicle.
The multi-functional indicator offers you a range of useful information.
On vehicles which are fitted out with information display*, it is possible to switch
off the display of some information.
Caution
Pull out the ignition key while having contact with the display (for example when
cleaning) in order to prevent any damage.
Note
• In certain national versions the displays appear in the Imperial system of meas-
ures.
• If the display of the second speed is activated in mph, the current speed* is not
indicated in km/h on the display.
The outside temperature ⇒ page 17
Driving time ⇒ page 17
Current fuel consumption ⇒ page 17
A
3
A
7
A
3
A
7
Average fuel consumption ⇒ page 17
Range ⇒ page 17
Distance driven ⇒ page 18
Average speed ⇒ page 18
Current speed* ⇒ page 18
Warning against excessive speeds* ⇒ page 18
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
14
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 15
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Memory
The multi-functional indicator is equipped with two automatic memories. The
selected memory is displayed in the middle of the display field ⇒ fig. 5.
The data of the single-trip memory (memory 1) is shown if a 1 appears in the
display. A 2 shown in the display means that data relates to the total distance
memory (memory 2).
Switching over the memory with the help of the button ⇒ fig. 6 on the wind-
screen wiper lever or with the help of the button on the multifunction steering
wheel* ⇒ page 16.
Single-trip memory (memory 1)
The single-trip memory collates the driving information from the moment the igni-
tion is switched on until it is switched off. New data will also flow into the calcula-
tion of the current driving information if the trip is continued within 2 hours after
switching off the ignition. The memory will be is automatically erased, on the other
hand, if the trip is interrupted for more than 2 hours.
Total-trip memory (memory 2)
The total distance driven memory gathers data from any number of individual jour-
neys up to a total of 99 hours and 59 minutes driving or 9.999 kilometres driven.
The memory is deleted when either of these limits is reached and the calculation
starts from anew.
The total-trip memory will not, contrary to the single-trip memory, be deleted after
a period of interruption of driving of 2 hours.
Note
All information in the memory 1 and 2 is erased if the battery of the vehicle is
disconnected.
Operating with the buttons on the windshield wiper lever
The rocker switch and the button are located in the grip of the
window wiper lever ⇒ fig. 6.
Selecting the memory
– Short-term pressing of the button allows to select the desired
memory.
Selecting the functions
– Press the top or bottom rocker switch for longer than 0.5 seconds.
In this way, call up in sequence the individual functions of the multi-
functional indicator.
Fig. 5 Multi-functional indi-
cator
A
B
A
D
Fig. 6 Multi-functional indi-
cator: Control elements
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
A
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
15
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights16
Setting function to zero
– Select the memory you want.
– Press button for more than 1 second.
The following readouts of the selected memory will be set to zero by button :
• average fuel consumption,
• distance driven,
• average speed,
• driving time.
You can only operate the multi-functional indicator when the ignition is switched
on. After the ignition is switched on, the function displayed is the one which you last
selected before switching off the ignition.
On vehicles fitted with the multifunction steering wheel*, the buttons and
have been replaced with the rotary control on the multifunction steering wheel
⇒ fig. 7.
Operating with the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel*
Switching over and resetting is performed with the handwheel
⇒ fig. 7.
Selecting the memory
– Short-term pressing of the button allows to select the desired
memory.
Selecting the functions
– By pressing the button , you can call up the menu of the multi-func-
tional indicator.
– Turn the handwheel upwards or downwards. In this way, call up in
sequence the individual functions of the multi-functional indicator.
– Short-term pressing of the button allows to select the highlighted
function.
Setting function to zero
– Select the memory you want.
– Press the button for more than 1 second.
The following readouts of the selected memory will be set to zero with the button
:
• average fuel consumption,
• distance driven,
• average speed,
• driving time.
You can only operate the multi-functional indicator when the ignition is switched
on. After the ignition is switched on, the function displayed is the one which you last
selected before switching off the ignition.
A
B
A
B
A
A
A
B
Fig. 7 Multi-functional indi-
cator: Operating with the
buttons on the multifunction
steering wheel
A
D
A
D
A
C
A
D
A
D
A
D
A
D
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
16
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 17
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Outside temperature
The outside temperature appears in the display when the ignition is switched on.
If the outside temperature drops below +4 °C, a snow flake symbol (warning signal
for ice on the road) appears before the temperature indicator ⇒ fig. 8 and a
warning signal sounds. After pressing the rocker switch at the windshield wiper
lever ⇒ page 15, fig. 6 or the button at the multifunction steering wheel
⇒ page 16, fig. 7, the function shown last is indicated.
WARNING
Do not only rely upon the information given on the outside temperature
display that there is no ice on the road. Please note that black ice may also be
present on the road surface even at temperatures around +4 °C - warning,
drive with care!
Driving time
The driving time which has elapsed since the memory was last erased, appears in
the display. If you wish to measure the driving time as of a particular time, you must
set the memory to zero at this moment in time by pressing the button on the
windshield wiper lever ⇒ page 15, fig. 6 or the handwheel on the multifunction
steering wheel* ⇒ page 16, fig. 7 for longer than 1 second.
The maximum distance indicated in both memories is 99 hours and 59 minutes.
The indicator is set back to null if this period is exceeded.
Current consumption
The current fuel consumption level is shown in the display in litres/100 km. This
information can help you to adapt your style of driving to the fuel consumption you
wish to achieve.
The display appears in litres/hour if the vehicle is stationary or driving at a low
speed.
The indicated value will be updated every 0,5 seconds while you are driving.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption since the memory was last erased is shown in the
display in litres/100 km ⇒ page 15. This information can help you to adapt your
style of driving to the fuel consumption you wish to achieve.
If you wish to determine the average fuel consumption over a certain period of time
you must set the memory to zero at the start of the measurement using the button
on the windshield wiper lever ⇒ page 15, fig. 6 or with the handwheel on
the multifunction steering wheel* ⇒ page 16, fig. 7. A zero appears in the display
for the first 100 m you drive after erasing the memory.
The indicated value will be updated every 5 seconds while you are driving.
Note
The amount of fuel consumed will not be indicated.
Range
The estimated range in kilometres is shown on the display. It indicates the distance
you can still drive with your vehicle based on the present level of fuel in the tank for
the same style of driving.
Fig. 8 The outside tempera-
ture
A
A
A
C
A
B
A
D
A
B
A
D
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
17
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights18
The readout is shown in steps of 10 km. After lighting up of the indicator light for the
fuel reserve the display is shown in steps of 5 km.
The fuel consumption for the last 50 km is taken as a basis for calculating the range.
If you drive in a more economical manner from this moment on, the range will be
increased accordingly.
If the memory is set to zero (after disconnecting the battery), the fuel consumption
of 10 l/100 km is calculated for the range; afterwards the value is adapted accord-
ingly to the style of driving.
Distance driven
The distance driven since the memory was last erased appears in the display
⇒ page 15. If you wish to measure the distance driven of a particular time, you
must set the memory to zero at this moment in time by pressing the button on
the windshield wiper lever ⇒ page 15, fig. 6 or the handwheel on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel* ⇒ page 16, fig. 7.
The maximum distance indicated in both switch positions is 9999 km. The indicator
is set back to null if this period is exceeded.
Average speed
The average speed since the memory was last erased is shown in the display in
km/hour ⇒ page 15. If you wish to determine the average vehicle speed over a
certain period of time you must set the memory to zero at the start of the measure-
ment using the button on the windshield wiper lever ⇒ page 15, fig. 6 or with
the handwheel on the multifunction steering wheel* ⇒ page 16, fig. 7.
A zero appears in the display for the first 100 m you drive after erasing the memory.
The indicated value will be updated every 5 seconds while you are driving.
Current speed*
The current speed which is identical to the display of the speedometer, is indicated
on the display ⇒ page 10, fig. 2.
Warning against excessive speeds
Warning against excessive speeds
This function enables you to set a speed limit, e.g. if you drive in town. A text in the
display is intended to draw your attention to the fact that you have exceeded the set
speed limit.
You can set the desired speed limit as follows:
• Select the menu Speed warning --- km/h (warning at --- km/h).
• You can drive at the desired speed, e.g. 50 km/h
• Press the button on the windshield wiper lever ⇒ fig. 10 or the handwheel
on the multifunction steering wheel* ⇒ page 16, fig. 7. Speed warning
50 km/h (warning at 50 km/h) is displayed on the information display* ⇒ fig. 9.
A
B
A
D
A
B
A
D
A
2
Fig. 9 Speed setting
Fig. 10 Multi-functional
indicator: Control elements
A
B
A
D
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
18
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 19
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
If you now exceed the set speed limit, Speed 50 km/h exceeded (speed 50 km/h
exceeded) will be shown on the display. This message is indicated for as long as the
speed is reduced below the set limit or switch off the message by pressing the
button on the windshield wiper lever ⇒ page 18, fig. 10 or the handwheel
on the multifunction steering wheel* ⇒ page 16, fig. 7.
An audible signal sounds as an additional warning signal.
The set speed limit remains stored even after switching off the ignition.
Information display*
Introduction
The information display provides you with information in a convenient way
concerning the current operating state of your vehicle. The information system
also provides you with data (depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle)
relating to the radio, mobile phone, multi-functional indicator, navigation system
and automatic gearbox.
Certain functions and operating conditions are always being checked on the
vehicle when the ignition is switched on and also while driving.
Functional faults, if required repair work and other information are indicated by red
symbols ⇒ page 22 and yellow symbols ⇒ page 23.
Lighting up of certain symbols is combined with an acoustic warning signal.
Information and texts giving warnings are also shown in the display ⇒ page 26.
The display of text is possible in the following languages:
Czech, English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese and Chinese.
You can select the desired language in the setting menu.
The following information can be shown in the display (depending on the equip-
ment installed on the vehicle):
Caution
Pull out the ignition key while having contact with the display (for example when
cleaning) in order to prevent any damage.
Main menu
A
B
A
D
Fig. 11 Instrument cluster:
Information display
Main menu ⇒ page 19
Door, luggage compartment door and bonnet ajar
warning
⇒ page 21
Service Interval Display ⇒ page 12
Selector lever positions of the automatic DSG ⇒ page 123
Fig. 12 Information display:
Controls on the windshield
wiper lever
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
19
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights20
Operating with the buttons on the windshield wiper lever
– You can activate the MAIN MENU by pressing the rocker switch
⇒ page 19, fig. 12 for more than 1 second.
– You can select the menu through the rocker switch . When the
pushbutton is briefly pressed, the information you have selected is
displayed.
Operating with the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel
– You can activate the MAIN MENU by pressing the rocker switch
⇒ fig. 13 for more than 1 second.
– You can select the individual menus by pressing the handwheel .
After briefly pressing the handwheel , the desired menu is indi-
cated.
– After briefly pressing the button you can achieve a higher level, by
pressing the button for longer than 1 second, you can call up the
MAIN MENU.
You can select the following information (depending on the equipment installed on
the vehicle):
MFD (Onboard computer) ⇒ page 14
Driving time
Current consumption
Average fuel consumption
Range
Distance driven
Average speed
Current speed
Warning against excessive speeds
Audio ⇒ page 21
Navigation ⇒ page 21
Phone ⇒ page 138
Aux. Heating ⇒ page 106
Vehicle status ⇒ page 22
Setup ⇒ page 23
The menu Audio is only displayed when the Radio* is switched on.
The menu Navigation is only displayed when the Navigation* is switched on.
Aux. Heating is only then displayed, if the vehicle is fitted with auxiliary heating*.
Note
• If warning messages are indicated in the information display, ⇒ page 21
⇒ page 22, you must confirm them with the button on the windshield wiper
lever or with the button on the multi-function steering wheel in order to call up
the main menu.
• If you do not activate the information display at that moment, the menu shifts
to one level higher every 10 seconds.
Fig. 13 Information display:
Controls on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel
A
A
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
A
D
A
C
A
C
A
B
A
D
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
20
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 21
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Door, luggage compartment door and bonnet ajar warning
The door, luggage compartment door and bonnet ajar warning lights up when at
least one of the three items door, luggage compartment or bonnet are not closed
when the ignition is turned on. The symbol indicates which door is still open or
whether the luggage compartment door or bonnet is not closed ⇒ fig. 14.
The symbol goes out as soon as the doors, luggage compartment door and bonnet
are completely closed.
A warning signal sounds if the car is driven at a speed of more than 6km/hour and
if the door or the luggage compartment door is open.
Audio
These displays indicate the normal information from the display of the radio*.
Operation of the radio* is described in separate operating instructions to be found
in the on-board literature.
Navigation system*
The controls for the navigation system, radio, CD player are located in the centre
console on both sides of the monitor screen. Navigation data is also shown in the
information display of the instrument cluster.
Information and warning texts are displayed preferentially when the navigation
system is switched on.
Operation of the navigation system is described in separate operating instructions
to be found in the on-board literature.
Fig. 14 Information display:
Door warning
Fig. 15 Information display:
Radio display
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
21
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights22
Auto Check Control*
Car state
The Auto Check Control carries out a check of certain functions and vehicle compo-
nents. The check is performed constantly when the ignition is switched on, both
when the vehicle is stationary, as well as when driving.
Some operational faults, urgent repairs, service work or other information appear
in the display of the instrument cluster. The displays are shown with a red or yellow
light symbol depending on the priority of the message.
The red symbols indicate danger (priority 1) while the yellow symbols indicate a
warning (priortity 2). Information for the driver may also appear in addition to the
symbols ⇒ page 26.
There is at least one error message when the term Vehicle status is displayed in the
menu. After selecting this menu the first of the error messages is displayed. Several
error messages are shown on the display under the message e.g. 1/3 ⇒ fig. 16. This
display indicates that the first of a total of three error messages should be displayed.
The respective messages are displayed one after the other in an interval of 5
seconds. Check as soon as possible the displayed error messages.
As long as the operational faults are not rectified, the symbols are always indicated
again. After the first display, the symbols are indicated without information for the
driver.
If a fault occurs, a warning signal will also sound in addition to the symbol and text
in the display:
• Priority 1 - three warning signals
• Priority 2 - one warning signal
Red symbols
A red symbol signals danger.
Proceed as follows if a red symbol is displayed:
– Stop the vehicle.
– Switch the engine off.
– Investigate the function indicated.
– Obtain professional assistance.
Meaning of the red symbols:
Three successive warning signals will sound if a red symbol appears.
Fig. 16 Information display:
Display of operational fault
Engine oil pressure too low ⇒ page 30
Fig. 17 Information display:
Oil pressure is low
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
22
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 23
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Yellow symbols
Check the relevant function as soon as possible.
The meaning of the yellow symbols:
One warning signal will sound if a yellow symbol appears.
If several operational faults of priority 2 exist, the symbols appear one after the
other and are each illuminated for about 5 seconds.
Set-up
You can change certain settings by means of the information display. The current
setting is shown on the information display in the respective menu at the top below
the line ⇒ fig. 19.
You can select the following information (depending on the equipment installed on
the vehicle):
• MFD Data (MFA DATA)
• Convenience
• Lights & Vision
• Time
• Winter tyres
• Language
• Units
• Assistant
• Alternative speed displayed (Second speed)
• Automatic light (Automat. Lights)
• Service Interval (Service)
• Factory Setting
• Back
After selecting the menu Back you will reach one level higher in the menu.
Check engine oil level,
engine oil sensor faulty
⇒ page 35
Brake pad worn ⇒ page 33
Fig. 18 Information display:
Brake pad worn
Fig. 19 Setting the clock
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
23
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights24
Displays of the MFA
Here you can switch off or on certain displays of the multi-functional indicator.
Comfort*
You can set the following functions (depending on the equipment installed on the
vehicle):
Lights and Visibility
Here you can set how long the light should stay on for the function Coming/Leaving
Home and the intensity of the footwell lighting. Furthermore you can here switch
on or off the function daylight driving lights and convenience turn signal.
After selecting the menu Factory setting the factory setting is established again.
Time
Here you can set the time, the time format (12 or 24 hour indicator) and the time
change summer/winter time.
Winter tyres
Here you can set at which speed a warning signal should sound. This function is
used for e.g winter tyres with the permissible maximum speed less than the
maximum speed of the vehicle.
When exceeding the speed, the following is displayed on the information display*:
Snow tyres max. speed ... km/h (Winter tyres maximum ... km/h)
Language
Here you can set in which language the warning and information texts should be
displayed.
Measures
Here you can set the units for temperature, consumption and distance driven.
Assistant
Here you can adjust the tones of the acoustic signals of the parking aid*.
Second speed
Here you can switch on the display of the second speed in mph or in km/h
2)
.
Service
Here you can have the kilometers still to be driven and the days until the following
service interval shown and the Service Interval Display reset.
Factory Setting
After selecting the menu Factory Setting the factory setting of the information
display is established again.
Rain closing
On vehicles with rain sensor you can switch on or off the
function for automatic closing of the windows and the
sliding/tilting roof in case of rain and locked vehicle. If it
is not raining and the function is set, the windows
including the sliding/tilting roof are closed automatically
after approx. 12 hours.
Door open Here you can switch on or off the functions for opening
a single door and automatic closing.
ATA confirm
Here you can set if a signal tone should sound addition-
ally when activating or deactivating the anti-theft alarm
system .
Window op. Here you can set the convenience mode only for the
driver window or for all the windows.
Mirror down
Here you can switch on or off the function for mirror
adjustment on the front passenger side when engaging
the reverse gear .
Mirror adjust. Here you can switch on or off the function for left and
right exterior mirror adjustment simultaneously.
Factory setting
After selecting this menu the convenience setting is
reset to factory setting. The following is displayed in the
information display:
Factory setting for convenience is set
.
2)
Valid for countries where the values are indicated in British measuring units.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
24
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 25
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Information display in the rear centre console
The time and the outside temperature is displayed on the information display in the
rear centre console when the ignition is switched on ⇒ fig. 20.
The values are taken over by the instrument cluster.
Fig. 20 Centre console at
rear: Information display
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
25
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights26
Warning lights
Overview
The warning lights indicate certain functions or faults.
Fig. 21 Instrument cluster with warning lights
Turn signal lights (to the left) ⇒ page 27
Turn signal lights (to the right) ⇒ page 27
Fog lights ⇒ page 28
Main beam ⇒ page 28
Low beam ⇒ page 28
Rear fog light ⇒ page 28
Speed regulating system ⇒ page 28
Failure of the light bulbs ⇒ page 28
Adaptive headlights* ⇒ page 28
Diesel particle filter* (diesel engine) ⇒ page 28
Airbag system ⇒ page 29
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
26
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 27
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
• If you do not pay attention to the warning lights coming on and the corre-
sponding descriptions and warning notes, this may result in severe body
injuries or major vehicle damage.
• The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. There is a risk
of injuries, scalding, accidents and fire when working in the engine
compartment, e.g. inspecting and replenishing oil and other fluids. It is also
essential to observe all warnings ⇒ page 209, “Working in the engine
compartment”.
Note
• The arrangement of the indicator light is dependent on the model version. The
symbols shown in the following functional description are to be found as indicator
lights in the instrument cluster.
• Operational faults are shown in the instrument cluster as red symbols (priority
1 - danger) or yellow symbols (priority 2 - warning).
Turn signal system 
Either the left or right indicator light flashes depending on the position of the
turn signal lever.
The indicator light flashes at twice its normal rate if a turn signal light fails. This does
not apply when towing a trailer.
Control system for exhaust ⇒ page 29
Electromechanical power steering ⇒ page 29
Engine oil pressure ⇒ page 30

EPC fault light (petrol engine) ⇒ page 30
Glow plug system (diesel engine) ⇒ page 30
Coolant temperature/coolant level ⇒ page 31
Traction control system (TCS) ⇒ page 31
Electronic stability programme (ESP)* ⇒ page 32
Selector lever lock* ⇒ page 32
Tyre pressure* ⇒ page 32
Antilock brake system (ABS) ⇒ page 32
Bonnet ⇒ page 33
Seat belt warning light ⇒ page 33
Brake pad wear* ⇒ page 33
Boot lid ⇒ page 33
Open door ⇒ page 34
Fluid level in windshield washer system ⇒ page 34
Brake system ⇒ page 34
Dynamo ⇒ page 34
Engine oil level ⇒ page 35
Fuel reserve ⇒ page 35
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
27
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights28
Switching off the hazard warning light system is switched on will cause all of the
turn signal lights as well as both indicator lights to flash.
Further information about the turn signal system ⇒ page 60.
Fog lights
The warning light comes on when the fog lights are operating ⇒ page 57.
Main beam
The indicator light comes on when the main beam is selected or also when the
headlight flasher is operated.
Further information about the main beam ⇒ page 60.
Low beam
The warning light comes on when low beam is selected ⇒ page 53.
Rear fog light
The warning light comes on when the rear fog lights are operating ⇒ page 58.
Cruise control system*
The warning light lights up, when operating the speed regulating system.
Failure of the light bulbs
The warning light comes on if a light bulb is damaged:
• up to 2 seconds after the ignition is switched on;
• when switching on the defective light bulb.
The following text e.g will be displayed in the information display*:
Check front right dipped beam!
The rear side lights and the licence plate lighting require several light bulbs. The
indicator light only lights up if all light bulbs of the licence plate lighting or the
parking light (in one rear light unit) are defective. Check regularly the function of the
light bulbs.
Adaptive headlights*
If the warning light flashes for 1 minute while driving or after switching on the
ignition and a warning signal sounds, a fault of the adaptive headlights is
confirmed.
Further information ⇒ page 56.
Diesel particle filter* (diesel engine)
If the warning light comes on, this means that soot has accumulated in the
diesel particle filter because of the frequent short distances.
In order to clean the diesel particle filter, the vehicle should be driven at an even
speed of at least 60 km/h at engine speeds of 1 800 - 2 500 rpm for at least 15
minutes or until the warning light goes out with the 4th or 5th gear engaged (auto-
matic gearbox: position S) when the traffic situation permits it. This increases the
exhaust temperature and the soot deposited in the diesel particle filter is burnt.
Always pay attention to the valid speed limits ⇒ .
The warning light goes out after the successful cleaning of the diesel particle
filter.
If the filter is not properly cleaned, the warning light does not go out and the
warning light begins to flash. In the information display* appears Diesel-
particle Owner's manual. Afterwards the engine control unit shifts the engine into
the emergency mode, which only has a reduced power output. After switching the
ignition off and on again the warning light comes on.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
28
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 29
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Have the vehicle inspected without delay by your specialist garage.
WARNING
• If you do not pay attention to the warning light coming on and the corre-
sponding descriptions and warning notes, this may result in injuries or
major vehicle damage.
• Always adjust your speed to suit weather, road, region and traffic condi-
tions. The route indicated by the warning light must not tempt you to disre-
gard the national regulations for road traffic.
Caution
As long as the warning light lights up, one must take into account an increased
fuel consumption and in certain circumstances a power reduction of the engine.
Note
Further information about diesel particle filter ⇒ page 186.
Airbag system
Monitoring the airbag system
The warning light
comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.
There is a fault in the system if the warning light does not go out or flashes while
driving ⇒ . This also applies if the warning light does not come on when the igni-
tion is switched on.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Airbag fault!
The functionality of the airbag system is also monitored electronically, when one
airbag has been switched off
Front, side and head airbags or belt tensioner which have been switched off
using the vehicle system tester:
• The warning light lights up for 4 seconds after switching on the ignition and
then flashes again for 12 seconds afterwards in 2 second intervals.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Airbag/belt tensioner deactivated!
Front passenger airbags switched off using the switch for front passenger
airbags* in stowage compartment on the front passenger side:
• The warning light comes on for 4 seconds after the ignition has been
switched on.
• Switching off airbags is indicated in the middle of the dash panel by the lighting
up of the warning light     (airbag switched off) ⇒ page 169.
WARNING
Have the airbag system checked immediately by a specialist garage if a fault
exists. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the event
of an accident.
Control system for exhaust
The warning light comes on after the ignition has been switched on.
If the warning light does not go out after starting the engine or it lights up when
driving, a fault exists in an exhaust relevant component. The engine management
system selects an emergency programme which enables you to drive to the nearest
specialist garage by adopting a gentle style of driving.
Electromechanical power steering
The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.
If the warning light after switching on the ignition or when driving lights up contin-
uously, a fault exists in the electromechanical power steering.
• If the yellow warning light lights up, this indicates a partial failure of the power
steering and the steering forces can be greater.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
29
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights30
• If the red warning light lights up, this indicates a complete failure of the power
steering and the steering assist has failed (significantly higher steering forces).
Further information ⇒ page 184.
WARNING
Contact your specialist garage if the power steering is defective.
Note
• If the yellow warning light goes out after starting the engine again and a short
drive, it is not necessary to visit a specialist garage.
• If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the yellow warning light
comes on after switching on the ignition. The warning light must go out after
driving a short distance.
Engine oil pressure
The warning light comes on for a few seconds
3)
when the ignition is switched
on.
Stop the vehicle and switch the engine off if the warning light does not go off
after the engine has started or flashes while driving. Check the oil level and top up
with oil as necessary ⇒ page 212.
An audible signal sounds three times as an additional warning signal.
Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under the
conditions prevailing to top up with oil. Keep the engine switched off and obtain
professional assistance from a specialist garage, otherwise it could lead to severe
engine damage.
Do not drive any further if the warning light flashes even if the oil is at the correct
level. Do not run the engine not at idling speed either. Contact the nearest specialist
garage to obtain professional assistance.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Oil Pressure Engine off! Owner's manual
WARNING
• If you must stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe
distance from the traffic and switch off the engine and switch on the hazard
warning light system.
• The red oil pressure light is not an oil level indicator! One should
therefore check the oil level at regular intervals, preferably after every refu-
eling stop.
EPC fault light  (petrol engine)
The  (Electronic Power Control) warning light comes on for a few seconds when
the ignition is switched on.
If the warning light  does not go out or lights up after starting the engine, a fault
exists in the engine control. The engine management system selects an emergency
programme which enables you to drive to the nearest specialist garage by adopting
a gentle style of driving.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Engine fault Workshop!
Glow plug system (diesel engine)
The warning light lights up for a cold engine when switching on the ignition
(pre-heat position) 2 ⇒ page 111. Start the engine after the indicator light goes out.
The glow plug indicator light will come on for about 1 second if the engine is at a
normal operating temperature or if the outside temperature is above +5°C. This
means that you can start the engine right away.
There is a fault in the glow plug system if the warning light does not come on
at all or lights up continuously. Contact a specialist garage as soon as possible to
obtain assistance.
3)
The warning light on vehicles fitted with information display does not come on after
switching the ignition on, but only if a fault exists or the engine oil level is too low.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
30
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 31
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
If the warning light begins to flash while driving, a fault exists in the engine
control. The engine management system selects an emergency programme which
enables you to drive to the nearest specialist garage by adopting a gentle style of
driving.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Engine fault Workshop!
Coolant temperature/ Coolant quantity
The warning light comes on for a few seconds
4)
when the ignition is switched on.
The coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level too low if the warning light
does not go out or flashes while driving.
3 peeps sound as an additional warning signal.
In this case stop and switch the engine off and check the coolant level; top up the
coolant as necessary.
Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under the
conditions prevailing to top up with coolant. Keep the engine switched off and
obtain professional assistance from a specialist garage, otherwise it could lead to
severe engine damage.
If the coolant is within the specified range, the increased temperature may be
caused by an operating problem at the coolant fan. Check the fuse for the coolant
fan, replace it if necessary ⇒ page 242, “Fuse assignment in engine compartment -
version 1” or ⇒ page 244, “Fuse assignment in engine compartment - version 2”.
Do not continue driving if the warning light does not go off although the fluid is at
the correct level and also the fuse of the fan is in proper order. Contact a specialist
garage to obtain assistance.
Please also refer to the additional instructions ⇒ page 213, “Cooling system”.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Check coolant! Owner's manual
WARNING
• If you must stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe
distance from the traffic and switch off the engine and switch on the hazard
warning light system ⇒ page 59.
• Take care when opening the coolant expansion bottle. If the engine is hot,
the cooling system is pressurized - risk of scalding! It is best to allow the
engine to cool down before removing the cap.
• Do not touch the coolant fan The coolant fan may switch on automati-
cally even if the ignition is off.
Traction control system (TCS)
The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.
The warning light comes on when driving when a control cycle is activated.
The warning light will come on and remains on if the TCS is switched off or if there
is a fault in the system.
The fact that the TCS system operates together with the ABS means that the TCS
warning light will also come on if the ABS system is not operating properly.
If the warning light
comes on immediately after starting the engine, the TCS
system can be switched off for technical reasons. In this case, the TCS system can
be switched on again by switching the ignition on and off. If the warning light goes
out, the TCS system is fully functional again.
Further information about the TCS ⇒ page 181, “Traction control system (TCS)”.
Note
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the warning light comes
on after switching on the ignition. The warning light must go out after driving a short
distance.
4)
The warning light on vehicles fitted with information display does not come on after
switching the ignition on, but only if the coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level
is too low.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
31
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights32
Electronic stability programme (ESP)*
The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.
Components of the ESP system also include the Traction Control System (TCS),
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL), and the Antilock Brake System ABS (ABS).
The warning light comes on when driving when a control cycle is activated.
The warning light will come on and remains on if the ESP is switched off or if there
is a fault in the system.
The fact that the ESP system operates together with the ABS means that the ESP
warning light will also come on if the ABS system is not operating properly.
If the warning light comes on immediately after starting the engine, the ESP
system can be switched off for technical reasons. In this case, the ESP system can
be switched on again by switching the ignition on and off. If the warning light goes
out, the ESP system is fully functional again.
Further information on the ESP ⇒ page 179, “Electronic stability programme
(ESP)*”.
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)*
The EDL is a part of the ESP. A fault in the EDL is indicated by the ESP warning light
in the instrument cluster. Have the vehicle inspected without delay by a Škoda
Service Partner. Further information on the EDL ⇒ page 180, “Electronic Differen-
tial Lock (EDS)*”.
Note
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the warning light comes
on after switching on the ignition. The warning light must go out after driving a short
distance.
Selector lever lock*
If the green warning light lights up, operate the brake pedal. This is necessary, in
order to be able to move the selector lever out of the position P or N.
Tyre inflation pressure*
The warning light lights up, if there is a substantial drop in inflation pressure in
one of the tyres. Reduce the speed and check or correct as soon as possible the
inflation pressure in the tyres ⇒ page 222.
If the warning light flashes, there is a system fault. Visit the nearest specialist garage
and have the fault rectified.
Further information about tyre pressure-control system ⇒ page 185.
WARNING
• When the warning light lights up, immediately reduce the speed and
avoid sudden steering and brake manoeuvres. Please stop the vehicle
without delay at the nearest possible stop and inspect the tyres and their
inflation pressures.
• Under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty style of driving, wintry or
unpaved roads) the warning light can be delayed or does not light up at
all.
Note
If the battery has been disconnected, the warning light comes on after switching
on the ignition. The warning light must go out after driving a short distance.
Antilock brake system (ABS)
The warning light shows the functionality of the ABS.
The warning light comes on for a few seconds after the ignition has been switched
on or when starting the engine. The warning light goes out after an automatic check
sequence has been completed.
A fault in the ABS
The system is not functioning properly if the ABS warning light does not go out
within a few seconds after switching on the ignition, does not light up at all or lights
up while driving. The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system. Visit
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
32
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 33
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
a specialist garage as quickly as possible and adjust your style of driving in the
meantime since you will not know how great the damage is.
Further information about ABS ⇒ page 183, “Antilock brake system (ABS)”.
A fault in the entire brake system
If the ABS warning light comes on together with the brake system warning light
(handbrake must be released), there is a fault not only in the ABS but also in
another part of the brake system ⇒ .
WARNING
• If the brake system warning light comes on together with the ABS
warning light stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid
level in the reservoir ⇒ page 215, “Brake fluid”. If the fluid level has dropped
below the MIN marking, do not drive any further - risk of accident! Contact
a Škoda dealer to obtain professional assistance.
• Pay attention to the following instructions ⇒ page 209, “Working in the
engine compartment” before checking the brake fluid level and opening the
bonnet.
• If the brake fluid is at the correct level, the ABS control function has
failed. The rear wheels may then block very rapidly when braking. In certain
circumstances, this can result in the rear end of the car breaking away - risk
of skidding! Drive carefully to the nearest specialist garage and have the
fault rectified.
Bonnet *
The warning light comes on if the bonnet is unlocked. If the engine bonnet
unlocks while driving , the warning light lights up and an audible signal sounds.
The warning light comes on even when the ignition is switched off. The warning
light lights up for a maximum of 5 minutes.
On vehicles with information display* this warning light is replaced by a vehicle
symbol ⇒ page 21, fig. 14.
Seat belt warning light
The warning light comes on after the ignition is switched on as a reminder for the
driver and front passenger to fasten the seat belt. The warning light only goes out if
the driver or front passenger has fastened his seat belt.
If the seat belt has not been fastened by the driver or front passenger, a permanent
warning signal sounds at vehicle speeds greater than 20 km/h and simultaneously
the warning light flashes.
If the seat belt is not fastened by the driver or front passenger during the next 90
seconds, the warning signal is deactivated and the warning light lights up perma-
nently.
Further information on the seat belts ⇒ page 154, “Seat belts”.
Thickness of the brake pads *
The warning light comes on for a few seconds
5)
when the ignition is switched
on.
If the warning light comes on, contact a specialist garage immediately and have
the brake pads on all of the wheels inspected.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Check brake pads!
Boot lid *
The warning light comes on when the ignition is switched on if the luggage
compartment door is open. If the boot lid opens while driving , the warning light
lights up and an audible signal sounds.
An audible signal sounds as an additional warning signal.
5)
The warning light on vehicles fitted with information display does not come on after
switching the ignition on, but only if a fault exists.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
33
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights34
The warning light comes on even when the ignition is switched off. The warning
light lights up for a maximum of 5 minutes.
On vehicles with information display* this warning light is replaced by a vehicle
symbol ⇒ page 21, fig. 14.
Open door
The warning light comes on if one or several doors are opened or if the boot lid
is opened. If one of the doors opens while driving, the warning light lights up and
an audible signal sounds.
The warning light comes on even when the ignition is switched off. The warning
light lights up for a maximum of 5 minutes.
On vehicles with information display* this warning light is replaced by a vehicle
symbol ⇒ page 21, fig. 14.
Liquid in reservoir for windscreen washer system
The warning light comes on when the ignition is switched on if there is insuffi-
cient fluid in the windshield washer system. Top up with liquid ⇒ page 220.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Add wash fluid!
Brake system
The warning light flashes or comes on if the brake fluid level is too low, if there
is a fault in the ABS or if the handbrake is applied.
If the warning light flashes and an audible signal sounds three times (handbrake
is not applied), stop and check the brake fluid level ⇒ .
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Brake fluid Owner's manual
If there is a fault in the ABS which also influences the function of the brake system
(e.g. distribution of brake pressure), the ABS warning light comes on and at the
same time the brake system warning light starts flashing . Be aware that not only
the ABS but also another part of th brake system is defective ⇒ .
An audible signal sounds three times as an additional warning signal.
One should get used to high pedal forces, long braking distances and long free play
of the brake pedal when driving to the next specialist garage.
For further information on the brake system ⇒ page 182, “Brakes”.
Handbrake applied
The warning light also comes on if the handbrake is applied. An audible warning
is also given if you drive the vehicle for at least 3 seconds at a speed of more than 6
km/h.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Release parking brake!
WARNING
• Pay attention to the following instructions ⇒ page 209, “Working in the
engine compartment” before checking the brake fluid level and opening the
bonnet.
• If the brake system warning light does not go out a few seconds after
switching on the ignition or comes on when driving, stop immediately and
check the brake fluid in the reservoir ⇒ page 215, “Brake fluid”. If the fluid
level has dropped below the MIN marking, do not drive any further - risk of
accident! Contact a Škoda dealer to obtain professional assistance.
Alternator
The warning light comes on after the ignition has been switched on. It should go
out after the engine has started.
If the warning light does not go out after the engine has started, or comes on when
driving, drive to the nearest specialist garage. The vehicle battery will be discharged
in this case so switch off all non-essential electrical components.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
34
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Instruments and Indicator/Warning Lights 35
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Caution
If the warning light comes on when driving and in addition the warning light
(cooling system fault) also comes on in display, you must then stop the car imme-
diately and switch the engine off - risk of engine damage!
Engine oil level*
Warning light lights up
If the warning light lights up, the quantity of oil in the engine is probably too low.
Check as soon as possible the oil level or top up ⇒ page 212 with engine oil.
A peep sounds as an additional warning signal.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Check oil level!
The warning light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 seconds. If
no engine oil has been replenished, the warning light will come on again after
driving about 100 km.
Warning light flashes
A fault on the engine oil level sensor is indicated additionally by an audible signal
and the warning light coming on several times after the ignition has been switched
on.
In this case have the engine inspected without delay by a specialist garage.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Oil sensor Workshop!
Fuel reserve
The warning light comes on, if the fuel level is still below 9 litres.
An audible signal sounds as an additional warning signal.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Please refuel! Range...km
Note
The Text in the information display* goes out only after refuelling and driving a
short distance.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
35
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Unlocking and locking36
Unlocking and locking
Key
Two keys with remote control are provided with the vehicle ⇒ fig. 22.
WARNING
• Always withdraw the key whenever you leave the vehicle - even if it is
only for a short time. This is particularly important if children are left in the
vehicle. The children might otherwise start the engine or operate electrical
equipment (e.g. power windows) - risk of injury!
• Do not withdraw the ignition key from the ignition lock until the vehicle
has come to a stop. The steering lock might otherwise engage unintention-
ally - risk of accident!
Caution
• Each key contains electronic components; therefore protect them against mois-
ture and severe shocks.
• Keep the groove of the keys absolutely clean as impurities (textile fibres, dust
etc.) have a negative effect on proper operation of the keys and the ignition lock.
Note
Please approach a Škoda Service Partner if you lose a key since he can obtain a new
one for you.
Changing the battery of the radio remote control
Each radio-operated key contains a battery which is housed in the cover
of the transmitter housing ⇒ fig. 23. We recommend that you have
Fig. 22 Radio-operated key
Fig. 23 Disconnect key with
radio remote control
Fig. 24 Cover of the trans-
mitter housing
A
B
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
36
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Unlocking and locking 37
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
the batteries of the key replaced by a Škoda Service Partner. You should,
however, proceed as follows if you wish to replace the battery yourself:
– Fold open the key.
– Use a thin screwdriver to carefully lever off the front part of the key
⇒ page 36, fig. 23 from the transmitter housing .
– Take off the cover of the transmitter housing ⇒ page 36, fig. 24 in
direction of arrow.
– Take the used battery out of the housing cover.
– Insert the new battery. Ensure that the “+” symbol on the battery is
facing downwards. The correct polarity is also shown on the cover of
the transmitter housing.
– Insert cover with battery in place at the rear of the transmitter housing
and press both parts together.
– Insert the transmitter housing into the front part of the key so that the
two parts lock into each other.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of an old battery in accordance with environmental regulations.
Note
• The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original
battery.
• If it is still not be possible to unlock or lock the vehicle with the remote control
even after replacing the battery this means that the system has to be synchronised
⇒ page 45.
Electronic immobiliser
The electronic immobiliser prevents the vehicle being operated by an
unauthorised person.
An electronic chip is integrated in the head of the key. The immobiliser is deacti-
vated with the aid of this chip when the key is inserted in the ignition lock. The elec-
tronic immobiliser is automatically activated when you withdraw the ignition key
from the lock.
Note
It is only possible to start the engine of your car with a Genuine Škoda key with the
matching code.
Child safety lock
The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being opened from
the inside.
The rear doors are equipped with a child safety lock. You can switch the
child safety lock on and off using the vehicle key.
A
A
A
B
Fig. 25 Child safety locks on
the rear doors
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
37
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Unlocking and locking38
Switching child safety lock on
– Use the vehicle key to turn the slit in the rear door to the left in the
direction of the arrow ⇒ page 37, fig. 25.
Switching child safety lock off
– Use the vehicle key to turn the slit to the right against the direction of
the arrow.
So long as the child safety lock is switched on it is not possible to open the door
from the inside with the door opening lever. In this case the door can be opened
only from the outside.
Central locking system
Description
Unlocking or locking the vehicle causes all the doors and the fuel filler flap to be
unlocked or locked at the same time by the central locking system. The boot lid is
unlocked when opening. Afterwards you can open the boot lid by pressing the
handle on the lower edge of the boot lid ⇒ page 41.
Operation of the central locking system is possible:
• by using the remote control ⇒ page 44,
• using the buttons for the central locking system ⇒ page 39,
• from the outside using the vehicle key ⇒ page 40, “Emergency unlocking and
locking of the driver's door”.
The indicator light in the driver's door
After locking the vehicle the indicator light flashes for 2 seconds fast, then more
slowly.
If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system ⇒ page 39 is not operating, the
indicator light in the driver door flashes for about 2 seconds fast, goes out and starts
to flash slowly after about 30 seconds.
If the indicator light first of all flashes fast for about 2 seconds, afterwards lights up
for about 30 seconds and then flashes slowly, there is a fault in the system of the
central locking or the interior monitor and in the towing protection monitoring*
⇒ page 46. Contact a specialist garage to obtain assistance.
Convenience operation of windows
One can open and close the windows when opening and closing the vehicle
⇒ page 49.
Opening a single door*
This function allows one to just unlock the driver's door. The other doors and the
fuel filler flap remain locked and are only unlocked after repetitive unlocking.
You can have the function opening a single door activated by a Škoda Service
Partner on request or you can activate it yourself with the aid of the information
display* ⇒ page 23.
Automatic locking*
All the doors and the boot lid are locked automatically once the car reaches a speed
of about 15 km/h.
If the ignition key is withdrawn, the car is then automatically unlocked again. In
addition, it is possible for the driver or front passenger to unlock the car by pressing
the central locking button ⇒ page 39 or by pulling the door opening lever.
You can have the function of the automatic locking activated by a specialist garage
on request or you can activate it yourself with the aid of the information display*
⇒ page 23.
WARNING
Locking the doors prevents involuntary opening in an exceptional situation
(an accident). Locked doors prevent unwanted entry into the vehicle from
outside, for example at road crossings. Locked doors do, however, make it
more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency - danger to
life!
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
38
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Unlocking and locking 39
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Note
• In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed, the locked doors
are automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehicle.
• Only the driver's door can be unlocked using the key if the central locking
system fails ⇒ page 40, “Emergency unlocking and locking of the driver's door”.
You can lock or unlock manually the other doors and the boot lid.
− Emergency locking of the door ⇒ page 41.
− Emergency unlocking of the boot lid ⇒ page 43.
Safe securing
The central locking system is equipped with a safe securing system. Locking the
vehicle from the outside causes the door locks to be automatically blocked. It is not
possible to open the doors with the door handle either from the inside or from the
outside. This acts as an effective deterrent for attempts to break into your vehicle.
You can deactivate the safe securing system by locking two times within 2 seconds.
If the safe securing system is not operating:
• the indicator light in the driver door flashes for about 2 seconds fast, goes out
and starts to flash slowly after about 30 seconds,
• is the filler flap locked.
The safe securing system is again activated the next time the vehicle is unlocked and
locked again.
If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system is deactivated, you can open
the vehicle from the inside by pulling on the handle.
WARNING
If the vehicle is locked from the outside and the safe securing system is acti-
vated, there must not be any person and animals in the vehicle as it is then
not possible to open either a door or a window from the inside. The locked
doors make it more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emer-
gency - hazard!
Note
The anti-theft alarm system* is also activated with the deactivated safe securing
system when locking the vehicle. The interior monitor* is however not activated.
Buttons for the central locking system
If the vehicle was not locked from outside, you can also unlock and lock
it with the rocker switch on the handle of the driver or front passenger
door even without the ignition switched on.
Locking all doors and the boot lid
– Press on the bottom part of the button ⇒ fig. 26. The symbol
in the
button comes on.
Unlocking all doors and the boot lid
– Press on the top part of the button ⇒ fig. 26. The symbol
goes out
in the button.
The following applies if you have locked your vehicle using the central locking
system:
Fig. 26 Central locking
switch
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
39
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Unlocking and locking40
• It is not possible to open the doors or the boot lid from the outside (safety
feature, e.g. when stopping at traffic lights etc.).
• You can unlock the doors individually from the inside and open them by pulling
the door opening lever.
• If at least one door has been opened, the vehicle cannot be locked.
• In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed, the locked doors
are automatically unlocked from the inside in order to enable rescuers to gain
access to the vehicle.
By pressing and holding down the top and bottom part of the switch in the driver's
door, you can conveniently close or open the windows.
WARNING
The central locking system also operates if the ignition is switched off. All the
doors and the boot lid are locked. Children should never be left unattended
in the vehicle since it is difficult to provide assistance from the outside when
the doors are locked. Locked doors make it difficult for rescuers to get into
the vehicle in an emergency - hazard!
Note
The door opening lever and the buttons for the central locking system do not
operate if the safe securing system is activated.
Emergency unlocking and locking of the driver's door
If the key does not operate, the driver's door can be unlocked or
locked manually using the remote control or the central locking
system.
– Pull on the handle.
– Guide the vehicle key into the recess on the bottom side of the cover
and lift it up to the top.
– Put the vehicle key into the locking cylinder and unlock or lock the
vehicle.
Fig. 27 Handle on the
driver's door: covered
locking cylinder
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
40
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Unlocking and locking 41
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Emergency locking of the doors
An emergency locking mechanism is located on the face side of the doors
which have no locking cylinder; it is only visible after opening the door.
Lock the doors using the vehicle key.
Locking
– Remove the panel ⇒ fig. 28.
– Guide the key into the slot and turn it to the outside.
– Re-insert the panel.
After closing the door, you can no longer open it from outside. If the child safety
lock is not switched on, it is possible to open the door from the inside by pulling on
the door handle. If the child safety lock is switched on, it is necesary to also open
the door from outside besides pulling on the inner door handle.
Twindoor - small boot lid
After unlocking the vehicle using the remote control or the key ⇒ page 40
you can open the small boot lid ⇒ fig. 30.
Open small boot lid
– Press on the handle at the bottom side of the boot lid ⇒ fig. 29, the
boot lid lifts up automatically ⇒ fig. 30.
Close small boot lid
– Pull the boot lid down and close it with a slight swing ⇒ . The
bonnet locks automatically.
Fig. 28 Rear door: Emer-
gency locking of the door
Fig. 29 Handle of boot lid
Fig. 30 Boot lid
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
41
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Unlocking and locking42
You can open the small boot lid by pressing the button on the remote control
⇒ page 44 for approx. 2 seconds.
A handle which makes the closing easier is located on the inner paneling of the
boot lid.
WARNING
• Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the boot lid. Other-
wise, the boot lid might open suddenly when driving even if the boot lid lock
is closed - risk of accident!
• Never drive with the boot lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise
exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle - risk of poisoning!
Note
• After closing the boot lid, it is automatically locked within 2 seconds and
the anti-theft alarm system* is activated. This applies only if the vehicle was
locked before closing the boot lid.
• The function of the hand grip on the bottom edge of the boot lid is deactivated
after starting off or as of a speed of more than 5 km/hour. The function of the hand
grip is acitvated again after stopping the vehicle and after opening the driver or
front passenger door or after pressing the button on the remote control
⇒ page 44.
Twindoor - large boot lid
After unlocking the vehicle using the remote control or the key
⇒ page 40, “Emergency unlocking and locking of the driver's door” you
can open the large boot lid ⇒ fig. 32.
Open large boot lid
– Press the handle ⇒ fig. 31 on the bottom edge of the boot lid.
– You must wait until the brake light in the rear window flashes twice.
– Press on the handle and at the same time raise the boot lid.
A
2
A
1
Fig. 31 Handle of boot lid
Fig. 32 Boot lid
A
1
A
2
A
3
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
42
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Unlocking and locking 43
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Close large boot lid
– Pull the boot lid down and close it with a slight swing ⇒ . The
bonnet locks automatically.
A handle which makes the closing easier is located on the inner paneling of the
boot lid.
WARNING
• Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the boot lid. Other-
wise, the boot lid might open suddenly when driving even if the boot lid lock
is closed - risk of accident!
• Never drive with the boot lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise
exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle - risk of poisoning!
Note
• After closing the boot lid, it is automatically locked within 2 seconds and
the anti-theft alarm system* is activated. This applies only if the vehicle was
locked before closing the boot lid.
• The function of the hand grip on the bottom edge of the boot lid is deactivated
after starting off or as of a speed of more than 5 km/hour. The function of the hand
grip is acitvated again after stopping the vehicle and after opening the driver or
front passenger door or after pressing the button on the remote control
⇒ page 44.
Emergency unlocking of the boot lid
If there is a fault in the central locking, you can open the boot lid as
follows:
– Fold the rear seats forwards ⇒ page 76.
– Guide the key into the slot in the trip panel as far as the stop ⇒ fig. 33.
– You can unlock the boot lid by the movement in the direction of arrow.
– Open the boot lid/luggage compartment door from outside.
Remote control
Description
You can use the remote control:
• to unlock and lock the car,
• unlock or open the boot lid,
• opening and closing window.
A
1
Fig. 33 Emergency
unlocking of the boot lid
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
43
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Unlocking and locking44
The transmitter with the battery is housed in the handle of the key. The receiver is
located in the interior of the car. The operating range of the remote control is
approx. 30 m. But this range of the remote control can be reduced if the batteries
are weak.
The key has a fold-open key bit which can be used for unlocking and locking the car
manually and also for starting the engine.
If a lost key is replaced or if the receiver unit has been repaired or a new unit
installed, it is then necessary for a Škoda Dealer to initialise the system. Only after
this is it possible to again use the remote control.
Note
• The remote control is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched
on.
• The operation of the remote control may temporarily be affected by interfer-
ence from transmitters close to the car and which operate in the same frequency
range (e.g. mobile phone, TV transmitter).
• The battery must be replaced, ideally by a Škoda Service Partner, if the central
locking or anti-theft alarm system does react to the remote control at less than 3
metres away.
• If the vehicle door is opened, the vehicle cannot be locked using the remote
control.
Unlocking and locking car
Unlocking the vehicle
– Press button for about 1 second.
Locking the vehicle
– Press button for about 1 second.
Deactivating safe securing system
– Press button twice in 3 seconds. Further information ⇒ page 39.
Small boot lid release
– Press button for about 1 second ⇒ fig. 34. Further information
⇒ page 41.
Automatic raising of the small boot lid
– Press button for about 2 second ⇒ fig. 34. Further information
⇒ page 41.
Folding out of the key
– Press button .
Fig. 34 Radio-operated key
A
1
A
3
A
2
A
2
A
2
A
4
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
44
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Unlocking and locking 45
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Folding up of the key
– Press button and collapse the key bit in the housing.
The turn signal lights flash twice as confirmation that the vehicle has been
unlocked. The vehicle will lock again automatically if you unlock the vehicle using
button but do not open a door or the boot lid within the next 30 seconds. This
function is intended to prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally.
In addition, when the car is unlocked, the power seats and exterior mirrors* move
into the position assigned to this key. The stored setting of driver seat and exterior
mirrors is retrieved.
The interior lights and the lighting of the entry area are automatically switched on
or off (if they have been set to operate via door contact) when unlocking and
locking the vehicle.
Display of the locking
The turn signal lights flash once to confirm that the vehicle has been correctly
locked.
If the doors or the boot lid remain open after the vehicle has been locked, the turn
signal lights do not flash until they have been closed.
WARNING
If the vehicle is locked from the outside and the safe securing system is acti-
vated, there must not be any person in the vehicle as it is then not possible
to open either a door or a window from the inside. The locked doors make it
more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency - hazard!
Note
• Operate the radio remote control only when the doors and boot lid are closed
and you have visual contact with the vehicle.
• Once in the car, you must not press the lock button of the radio remote
control before inserting the key into the ignition lock in order to avoid the car being
inadvertently locked and, in addition, the anti-theft alarm system* being switched
on. Should this happen, press the unlock button of the radio remote control.
Synchonisation of the remote control
If the vehicle cannot be unlocked by actuating the remote control system then it is
possible that the code in the key and the control unit in the vehicle are no longer
synchronised. This can occur when the buttons on the radio-operated key are actu-
ated a number of times outside of the operative range of the equipment or the
battery on the remote control was replaced.
This means it is necessary to synchronise the code as follows:
• Press any button on the remote control.
• after pressing the button, the door must be unlocked using the key within 1
minute ⇒ page 40, “Emergency unlocking and locking of the driver's door”.
Anti-theft alarm system*
Description
The anti-theft alarm system increases the level of protection against people seeking
to break into the vehicle. The system triggers audible and visual warning signals if
an attempt is made to break into the vehicle.
How is the alarm system activated?
The anti-theft alarm system is activated automatically when the vehicle is locked
with the key in the driver's door or by using the radio remote control ⇒ page 40,
“Emergency unlocking and locking of the driver's door”. The door contact moni-
toring is activated approx. 15 seconds after the locking. The interior and the towing
protection monitoring are activated approx. 30 seconds after the locking. If a door
is opened during activation, the monitoring is only activated 5 seconds after
closing.
How is the alarm system deactivated?
The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated by pressing the unlock button on the
remote control. The vehicle is automatically locked again if the vehicle is not
opened within 30 seconds after reactivating the anti-theft alarm system.
A
4
A
1
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
45
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Unlocking and locking46
The anti-theft alarm system is also deactivated if you unlock the vehicle door using
the key within 45 seconds after locking the vehicle.
Once you unlock the vehicle by inserting the key into the driver door within 45
seconds, you then have to insert the key into the ignition lock and switch the igni-
tion on within 15 seconds after opening the door in order to deactivate the anti-
theft alarm system. The alarm will be triggered if you do not switch on the igni-
tion within 15 seconds.
When is the alarm triggered?
The following security areas of the locked vehicle are monitored:
• Bonnet,
• Boot lid,
• Doors,
• Ignition lock,
• Socket of the factory-fitted towing device
• Angle of the vehicle*,
• Vehicle interior*,
• A drop in voltage of the on-board power supply.
An alarm is immediately triggered if either of the two battery terminals is discon-
nected while the anti-theft alarm system is activated.
How is the alarm switched off?
You switch the alarm off if you unlock the car with the radio remote control in the
key or if you switch the ignition on.
Note
• The working life of the alarm siren is 6 years. More detailed information is avail-
able by a specialist garage.
• Before leaving the car, check that all the doors, windows and the electric
sliding/tilting roof* are properly closed in order to ensure that the anti-theft alarm
system is fully operational.
• Coding of the radio remote control and the receptor part precludes the use of
the radio remote control from other vehicles.
Interior monitor and towing protection monitoring*
The interior monitor detects movements inside the car and then trig-
gers the alarm.
Switch off the interior monitor and towing protection monitoring
– Switch off the ignition.
– Open the driver door.
– Press the button
at the centre column on the driver side ⇒ fig. 35,
the symbol
which lights up in the button changes from red to
orange.
– Lock the vehicle within 30 seconds.
The interior monitor and the towing protection monitoring are switched on again
automatically the next time the car is locked.
Note
• You can switch the interior monitor and the towing protection monitoring off if
there is a possibility that movements from (e.g. children or animals) inside the
vehicle interior or if the vehicle must be transported (e.g. by train or ship) or towed,
might trigger the alarm.
Fig. 35 Button for interior
monitor and towing protec-
tion monitoring
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
46
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Unlocking and locking 47
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• The opened storage compartment for spectacles reduces the effectiveness of
the interior monitor. In order to ensure the function to be fully operational, close
the storage compartment for spectacles before locking the vehicle.
Power windows
Buttons on the driver's door
The power windows operate only when ignition is switched on.
Opening a window
– A window is opened by pressing lightly on the respective button in the
door. The process stops when one releases the button.
– Additionally you can open the window automatically (fully opened) by
pressing the button up to the stop. Renewed pressing of the button
causes the window to stop immediately.
Closing a window
– A window is closed through pulling lightly on the respective button in
the door. The closing process stops when one releases the button.
– Additionally you can close the window automatically (fully closed) by
pulling the button up to the stop. Renewed pulling of the button
causes the window to stop immediately.
The switches for the individual windows are located in the armrest of the driver's
door ⇒ fig. 36, front passenger door and in the rear doors ⇒ page 48, fig. 37
Buttons for the power window in the armrest of the driver's door
Button for the power window in the driver's door
Button for the power window in the front passenger's door
Button for the power window at the rear right door
Button for the power window at the rear left door
Safety switch
Safety pushbutton
You can deactivate the switches for power windows at rear doors by pressing the
safety pushbutton ⇒ fig. 36. The buttons for power windows at rear doors are
activated again by pressing the safety pushbutton again.
If the buttons for the rear doors are deactivated, the indicator light in the safety
switch lights up.
WARNING
• If you lock the vehicle from the outside, do not leave any person in the
vehicle since it is no longer possible to open the windows from the inside in
an emergency.
• The system is fitted with a force limiter ⇒ page 48. The closing process
will be stop if an obstruction is detected and the window will open again. You
should then take particular care when closing the windows! You may other-
wise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm, for example, jammed
in the window!
• It is recommended to deactivate the electrically operated power
windows in the rear doors (safety pushbutton) ⇒ fig. 36 when children
are being transported on the rear seats.
Fig. 36 Buttons on the
driver's door
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
A
S
A
S
A
S
A
S
A
S
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
47
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Unlocking and locking48
Note
• After switching the ignition off, it is still possible to open or close the windows
for a further 10 minutes. The automatic window closing will not operate during this
time. The power windows are switched off completely once you open the driver or
front passenger door.
• When driving always use the existing heating, air conditioning and ventilation
system for ventilating the interior of the vehicle. If the windows are opened, dust as
well as other dirt can get into the vehicle and in addition the wind noise is more at
certain speeds.
Button in front passenger door and in rear doors
A button for the relevant window is provided in these doors.
Opening a window
– Lightly press the appropriate switch down and hold it until the
window has moved into the desired position.
– Additionally you can open the window automatically (fully opened) by
pressing the switch down up to the stop. Renewed pressing of the
button causes the window to stop immediately.
Closing a window
– Lightly press the appropriate switch up and hold it until the window
has moved into the desired position.
– Additionally you can close the window automatically (fully closed) by
pressing the switch up up to the stop. Renewed pressing of the button
causes the window to stop immediately.
WARNING
The system is fitted with a force limiter ⇒ page 48. The closing process will
be stop if an obstruction is detected and the window will open again. You
should then take particular care when closing the windows! You may other-
wise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm, for example, jammed
in the window!
Note
After switching the ignition off, it is still possible to open or close the windows for a
further 10 minutes. The automatic closing and opening functions will not operate
during this time. The power windows are switched off completely once you open
the driver or front passenger door.
Force limiter of the power windows
The electrically operated power windows are fitted with a force limiter. It reduces
the risk of bruises or injuries when closing the windows.
If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by
several centimeters.
If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 seconds,
the closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down by several
centimeters.
You must try to close the window once again within 10 seconds after the window
has gone down twice, even if the obstacle was not yet removed, the closing process
Fig. 37 Fitting position of the
switch at the rear door
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
48
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Unlocking and locking 49
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
is stopped. During this time it is not possible to automatically close the window. The
force limiter is still switched on.
The force limiter is only switched off, if you attempt to close the window within the
next 10 seconds - the window closes now with full strength!
If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the force limiter is switched on again.
WARNING
You should take particular care when closing the windows! You may other-
wise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm, for example, jammed
in the window!
Window convenience operation
You can open and close the electrically powered windows as follows when
unlocking and locking the vehicle (just closing of the sliding roof).
Opening a window
• by holding the pressed unlock button on the remote control,
• by holding the pressed top part of the button for the central locking system in
the driver door,
• by holding the key in the driver's lock in the unlock position ⇒ page 40, “Emer-
gency unlocking and locking of the driver's door”.
Closing a window
• by holding the pressed lock button on the remote control,
• by holding the pressed bottom part of the button for the central locking system
in the driver door,
• by holding the key in the driver's lock in the lock position ⇒ page 40.
You can interrupt the opening or closing operation of the windows immediately by
releasing the key or the closing button.
WARNING
The system is fitted with a force limiter ⇒ page 48. The closing process will
be stop if an obstruction is detected and the window will open again. You
should then take particular care when closing the windows! You may other-
wise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm, for example, jammed
in the window!
Note
• The convenience opening of the windows with the aid of the key in the driver's
lock is only possible 45 seconds after deactivating or activating the alarm system.
Operational faults
Electrically operated power windows do not operate
If the battery has been disconnected and then reconnected while the window was
opened, the electrically operated power windows do not operate. The system must
be activated. Proceed as follows in order to re-establish the function:
• you can close the window by pulling the switch on the top edge.
• release the switch
• you must pull the switch again for approx. 3 seconds
Operation in winter
Ice accumulating on the surface of the windows during the winter may result in a
greater resistance when closing the windows and the window may stop and move
back several centimetres
Proceed as follows to close the window fully:
• Turn the key in the lock of the driver door into the closing position and hold it
there until all of the windows are closed.
• If the window closing is interrupted, it is necessary to put the force limiter out of
operation ⇒ page 48.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
49
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Unlocking and locking50
WARNING
The system is fitted with a force limiter ⇒ page 48. The closing process will
be stop if an obstruction is detected and the window will open again. You
should then take particular care when closing the windows! You may other-
wise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm, for example, jammed
in the window!
Electric sliding/tilting roof*
Description
The sliding/tilting roof is operated by means of the control dial ⇒ fig. 38 and only
functions when the ignition is switched on. The control dial has a number of fixed
positions.
After switching the ignition off, it is still possible to open or close the sliding/tilting
roof for a further 10 minutes. It is no longer possible to operate the sliding/tilting
roof after opening or closing one of the front doors, however.
Note
• If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, it is possible that the
sliding/tilting roof does not close fully. Here you have to set the control dial to the
switch position and press it forward for about 10 seconds.
• It is necessary after each emergency operation (using crank handle) to move the
sliding/tilting roof into the basic position. Here you have to set the control dial to
the switch position and press it forward for about 10 seconds.
Opening and tilting
Comfort position
– Turn the switch to position ⇒ fig. 38.
Opening roof fully
– Turn the switch to position and hold it in this position (spring-
tensioned position).
Tilting roof
– Turn the switch to position .
The wind noise in the comfort position is less than when the roof is fully opened.
The sun screen is also opened automatically when the roof slides open.
Caution
It may be necessary during winter to remove any ice and snow in the area of the
sliding/tilting roof before opening it in order to prevent damaging the opening
mechanism.
Fig. 38 Control dial for the
power sliding/tilting roof
A
A
A
A
A
C
A
B
A
D
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
50
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Unlocking and locking 51
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Closing
Sliding closed/closing the sliding/tilting roof
– Turn the switch to position ⇒ page 50, fig. 38.
Safety closing
The sliding/tilting roof is equipped with an overload protection system. If an
obstacle (e.g. ice) prevents closing, the sliding/tilting roof stops and opens
completely. You can close the sliding/tilting roof completely without overload
protection by pressing the switch to the position ⇒ page 50, fig. 38 at the front
for as long as it takes for the sliding/tilting roof to shut completely ⇒ .
WARNING
Close the sliding/tilting roof carefully - risk of injury!
Convenience operation
You can also close an open sliding/tilting roof from the outside.
– Keep pressed the lock button on the remote control or hold down the
key in the driver's door in the lock position until the sliding/tilting roof
is closed ⇒ .
The closing process stops when one releases the key or the closing button.
WARNING
Close the sliding/tilting roof carefully - risk of injury! The overload protec-
tion system does not function with the convenience closing.
Emergency operation
You can close and/or open the sliding/tilting roof by hand if the system is
defect.
– Position the flat blade of a screwdriver carefully against the rear edge
of the cover of the electrical drive ⇒ fig. 39.
– Pull the cover down.
– Take the crank out of the holder on the safety cover at the side of the
dash panel. Insert the crank up to the stop into the opening ⇒ fig. 40
and close and/or open the sliding/tilting roof ⇒ fig. 40.
A
A
A
A
Fig. 39 Detail of the head-
liner: point for positioning
screwdriver
Fig. 40 Detail of the head-
liner: Emergency operation
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
51
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Unlocking and locking52
– Press on the cover again by first of all inserting the plastic lugs and
then pushing the cover up.
– Insert the crank into the holder on the safety cover.
– Have the fault rectified by a specialist workshop.
On vehicles fitted with a storage compartment for spectacles, it must be opened
before removing the cover for the emergency operation ⇒ page 90.
Note
It is necessary after each emergency operation (using crank handle) to move the
sliding/tilting roof into the basic position. Here you have to press the control dial
forward to switch position ⇒ page 50, fig. 38 for about 10 seconds.
A
A
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
52
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Lights and Visibility 53
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Lights and Visibility
Lights
Switching lights on and off
Switching on side lights
– Turn the light switch into position
.
Switching on the low beam and main beam
– Switch on the ignition.
– Turn the light switch into position
.
– Press the main beam lever forward in order to switch on the main
beam ⇒ page 60, fig. 47.
Switching off lights (except daylight driving lights)
– Turn the light switch into position.
When the parking lights are switched on, the symbol next to the light switch is
illuminated.
Low beam comes on only if the ignition is switched on. After switching off the igni-
tion, the low beam is switched off automatically and only the side lights come on.
On models fitted with right-hand steering the position of certain switches differs
from that shown in ⇒ fig. 41. The symbols which mark the switch positions are
identical, however.
WARNING
Never drive with side lights on - risk of accident! The side lights are not
bright enough to light up the road sufficiently in front of you or to be seen by
other oncoming traffic. In this case, always switch on the low beam when it
is dark or if visibility is poor.
Note
• An audible warning will sound if you withdraw the ignition key and open the
driver's door when the vehicle lights are still on.
• The acoustic warning signal is switched off over the door contact when the
driver's door is closed (ignition off). The vehicle can be parked with the side lights
on.
• If the car is parked for a lengthy period, we recommend switching off all lights,
or leaving only the parking lights switched on.
• The switching on of the described lights should only be undertaken in accord-
ance with the legal requirements.
• If a fault occurs in the light switch, the low beam comes on automatically
• In the event of cool or humid weather conditions, the headlights can be misted
up from inside.
− The temperature difference between interior and external area of the head-
light lenses is decisive.
− When the driving lights are switched on, the light outlet surfaces are free
from mist after a short period. The headlight lenses can possibly mist up at the
border areas.
Fig. 41 Dash panel: Light
switch
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
53
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Lights and Visibility54
− It also concerns reverse light and turn signal lights.
− This mist has no influence on the life of the lighting system.
Daylight driving lights*
In some countries, the national legislation requires that the vehicles are
equipped with the function daylight driving lights.
Switching on daylight driving lights
– Switch on the ignition without turning the light switch out of the posi-
tion 0.
Deactivate function daylight driving lights
– Pull the turn signal light lever towards the steering wheel up to 3
seconds after switching on the ignition and at the same time, slide it to
the bottom and hold it in this position for at least 3 seconds.
Activate function daylight driving lights
– Pull the turn signal light lever towards the steering wheel up to 3
seconds after switching on the ignition and at the same time, slide it to
the top and hold it in this position for at least 3 seconds.
When the daylight driving lights are switched on, also the low beam with reduced
brightness shines together with the side lights (approx. 92 % of the performance).
This contributes to a longer life of the lamps for the low beam.
When the daylight driving lights are switched on, the illumination of the instrument
cluster is switched off, however, it is switched on in the position  when it is dark
and the low beam shines with full brightness (100 % of the performance).
On vehicles fitted with an information display*, you can activate or deactivate in the
menu the function daylight driving lights:
SETUP (Settings)
Lights & Vision (Lights & Vision)
Automatic light control*
Switching on automatic light control*
– Turn the light switch ⇒ fig. 42 into position
.
Switching off automatic light control*
– Turn the light switch to the position 0,
or .
If the light switch is in the position , the symbol illuminates when the ignition
is switched on  next to the light switch. If the low beam is activated with the
light sensor, the symbol
illuminates additionally next to the light switch.
If the light comes on automatically, the side lights and low beam as well as licence
plate light light up at the same time.
If the automatic light control* is switched on, the light is regulated with the light
sensor in the rear mirror holder. If the light intensity drops below the set value, e.g
when driving during the day into a tunnel, the low beam and the side lights as well
as the licence plate light come on automatically. If the light intensity increases
again, the lights switch off automatically.
Motorway lights
If the automatic light control* has been switched on and the vehicle speed is over
140 km/h for at least 10 seconds, the side lights and low beam are switched on
automatically.
Fig. 42 Dash panel: Light
switch
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
54
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Lights and Visibility 55
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
If the vehicle speed is below 65 km/h for at least 2 minutes, the lights are switched
off.
Rain lights
If you move the windshield wiper lever in the position slow wipe for more than 5
seconds, the side lights and low beam are automatically switched on. The light is
switched off when the windshield wiper lever is no longer than 4 minutes in the
position for slow or intermittent wipe.
If you switch on the windscreen wipe in the operation rain sensor* for longer than
10 seconds or in the operation permanent wipe (position 2 or 3) ⇒ page 65
switching on for longer than 15 seconds, the side lights and low beam are switched
on automatically. The light switches off if the windscreen wipe is in operation rain
sensor* for more than 4 minutes or is not switched on in the operation permanent
wipe.
WARNING
The automatic light control only operates as a support. The driver is not
released from his responsibility to inspect the light and if necessary to switch
on the light depending on the light conditions. The light sensor cannot
detect for example rain or snow. For these conditions we recommend to
switch on the low beam !
Note
• Do not affix any stickers in front of the light sensor, so that you do not impair its
function or put it out of operation.
• The same principles as for using the automatic light control also apply to the
light which is switched on manually ⇒ page 53.
Coming Home Function
The function makes it possible to switch on the lights in the darkness for
a short time after leaving the vehicle.
Switching on Coming Home Function
– The light switch is in the position automatic driving lamp control

and the low beam illuminates.
– Switch off the ignition.
– After opening the driver's door, the function Coming Home is
switched on.
– Close all the doors and the boot lid and lock the vehicle. After a short
time, switch all lights off.
Depending on equipment fitted the function Coming Home switches on the
following lights:
• Parking lights,
• Low beam,
• Entry lighting in the exterior mirrors,
• Licence plate light.
Coming Home Function
The lights go out 10 seconds after closing all the doors and the boot lid.
If a door or the boot lid remains open, the lights go out 60 seconds after switching
off the ignition.
On vehicles fitted with automatic driving lamp control you can also switch the light
switch in the position . The function Coming Home is controlled with the light
sensor in the mount of the interior rear mirror. If the light intensity is higher than the
set value of the light sensor, the Coming Home Function is not switched on after
switching off the ignition.
Note
• If the Coming Home Function is switched on constantly, the battery will be
heavily discharged particularly in short-haul traffic.
• The switching on of the described lights should only be undertaken in accord-
ance with the legal requirements.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
55
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Lights and Visibility56
• You can change the illumination period for the Coming Home Function by
means of the information display*.
Leaving Home Function
This function makes it possible to switch on the lights when approaching
the vehicle.
Switching on Leaving Home Function
– Unlock the vehicle with the radio remote control - the lights come on.
Depending on equipment fitted the function Leaving Home switches on the
following lights:
• Parking lights,
• Low beam,
• Entry lighting in the exterior mirrors,
• Licence plate light.
Leaving Home Function
The function Leaving Home is controlled with the light sensor in the mount of the
interior rear mirror. If the light intensity is higher than the set value of the light
sensor, the Leaving Home Function is not switched on after unlocking the vehicle
with the radio remote control.
After unlocking the vehicle with the radio remote control, the lights come on for 30
seconds. The Leaving Home Function is also switched off after the ignition is
switched on and after locking the vehicle.
If no door is opened within 30 seconds, the lights go out and the vehicle is locked
automatically.
Note
• If the Leaving Home Function is switched on constantly, the battery will be
heavily discharged particularly in short-haul traffic.
• The switching on of the described lights should only be undertaken in accord-
ance with the legal requirements.
• You can change the illumination period for the Leaving Home Function by
means of the information display*.
Adaptive headlights (AHL)*
Switch on Adaptive headlights (AHL)*
– Turn the light switch ⇒ page 54, fig. 42 into position
.
The outer illumination switches on if:
• the light sensor recognizes the low light intensity,
• no reverse gear is engaged,
• the operation “tourist light” is not switched on.
The light sensor switches on the full outer illumination at low light intensity,
System AHL* makes it possible to change the length and width of illumination of
the headlight. The length and width of illumination changes automatically in rela-
tion to the vehicle speed and the use of the windscreen wiper.
System AHL* operates in the following modes.
Mode out of town
The mode “out of town” is a basic mode. The dispersion of the cone of light in front
of the vehicle is similar to the low beam. The mode is active if none of the following
modes are active.
Mode rain
In the mode “rain” the dispersion of the cone of light in front of the vehicle is wider
and the width of illumination is shorter, so that during bad weather (rain) the
dazzling of the oncoming drivers can be reduced. The mode is activated at speeds
of 15 - 70 km/h and if the windscreen wipers continuously operate for a period of
time longer than 2 minutes. The mode is deactivated when dropping below or
exceeding the set speed limit or if the windscreen wipers have been switched off for
a period of time longer than 8 minutes.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
56
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Lights and Visibility 57
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Mode city
In the mode “city”, the dispersion of the cone of light in front of the vehicle is wider
and the width of illumination is shorter. It has as an aim to illuminate the adjacent
footpaths, crossings, pedestrian crossings etc. The mode is active at speeds of 15 -
50 km/h.
Mode motorway
In the mode “motorway” the dispersion of the cone of light is so widespread, that it
illuminates also the left (and right)
6)
lane of the motorway, so that the driver can
react in time to an obstacle or any other danger. The mode is activated stepwise as
of a speed of 90 km/h. It gains its greatest effectiveness at speeds above 120 km/h.
Tourist light
When driving in countries with opposing traffic system, driving on the left/right, it is
possible to switch on the mode “tourist light” electronically. This mode makes it
possible to drive in the particular country without dazzling the oncoming vehicles.
When the mode “tourist light” is active, the above mentioned modes and the side
to side swivel of the headlight is deactivated.
The mode “tourist light” is activated in the information display* in the menu
⇒ page 19:
SETUP (Settings)
Automatic light (Automat. Lights)
Note
• The functions of the side to side swivel of the headlight* (activation at a speed
of 10 km/h), fog lights with the function “corner” ⇒ page 57 and the function
dynamic headlight beam range* add to the System AHL*.
• The System AHL* is solely delivered with Bi-Xenon gas discharge bulbs for low
beam and main beam lights.
Fog lights
Switching on the fog lights
– First of all turn the light switch into position
or ⇒ fig. 43.
– Pull the light switch into position .
The rear fog light warning light ⇒ page 26 lights up in the instrument cluster
when the fog light is switched off.
Fog lights with the function “Corner”*
The fog lights with the function “Corner” are designed for a better
illumination of all areas near the vehicle when corning, parking etc.
The fog lights with the function “Corner” are regulated according to the steering
angle or after switching on the turn signal light
7)
in the following circumstances:
• the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running or it moves with a speed of
maximum 40 km/h;
• the daylight driving lights are not switched on;
6)
It is valid for vehicles which are designed for driving on the left.
7)
If both switch on versions are conflicting, for example if the steering wheel is turned to the
left and the right turn signal light is switched on, the turn signal light has the higher priority.
Fig. 43 Dash panel: Light
switch
A
1
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
57
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Lights and Visibility58
• the low beam is switched on or the light switch is in the position  and the
intensity of the ambient light causes the low beam to be switched on;
• the fog lights are not switched on;
• no reverse gear is engaged.
Note
If you engage the reverse gear during the active function “Corner”, both fog lights
illuminate.
Rear fog light
Switching on the rear fog light
– First of all turn the light switch into position
or ⇒ page 57,
fig. 43.
– Pull the switch into position .
The rear fog light warning light ⇒ page 26 lights up in the instrument cluster
when the fog light is switched off.
Only the rear fog light of the trailer lights up automatically when you are towing a
trailer using a factory-fitted towing device which is fitted with the rear fog light.
The rear fog light is located in the rear light array on the driver's side.
Caution
The rear fog light should only be switched on if visibility is particularly poor
(conform with any varying legal provisions) to avoid dazzling vehicles behind your
vehicle.
Instrument lighting
You can adjust the brightness of the instrument lighting.
Instrument lighting
– Switch on the light.
– Turn the control dial ⇒ fig. 44 to the desired intensity of the instru-
ment lighting
8)
.
A
2
8)
For the information display* ⇒ page 19 the intensity of the lighting is automatically set. The
setting using the control dial ⇒ fig. 44 is only possible when driving in the dark.
Fig. 44 Dash panel: Instru-
ment lighting
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
58
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Lights and Visibility 59
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Headlamp range adjustment*
Once the low beam is switched on you can then adapt the range of
the headlights to the load of the vehicle.
– Turn the control dial ⇒ fig. 45 until you have adjusted the low beam
so that oncoming traffic is not dazzled.
Settings
The positions correspond approximately to the following vehicle loads:
Front seats occupied, luggage compartment empty.
All seats occupied, luggage compartment empty.
All seats occupied, luggage compartment laden.
Driver seat occupied, luggage compartment laden.
Caution
Set the headlight beam adjustment in such a way as to avoid dazzling oncoming
traffic.
Note
The Bi-Xenon bulbs* adapt automatically to the load and driving state of the vehicle
(e.g. speed, accelerating, braking) when the ignition is switched on and when
driving. Vehicles which are not equipped with Bi-Xenon bulbs* do not have a
manual headlight range adjustment control.
Switch for hazard warning lights
–Press switch ⇒ fig. 46 to switch the hazard warning light system on
or off.
All the turn signal lights on the vehicle flash at the same time when the hazard
warning light system is switched on. The indicator light for the turn signals and the
indicator light in the switch also flash at the same time. You can also switch on the
hazard warning light system if the ignition is switched off.
The hazard warning light system is switched on automatically if an airbag is
deployed in the event of an accident.
Please comply with any legal requirements when using the hazard warning light
system.
Note
Switch on the hazard warning light system if, for example:
• you encounter traffic congestion,
• your vehicle breaks down or an emergency situation occurs.
Fig. 45 Dash panel: Lights
and Visibility
A
-
A
1
A
2
A
3
Fig. 46 Dash panel: Switch
for hazard warning lights
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
59
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Lights and Visibility60
The turn signal and main beam lever
The parking lights and headlight flasher are also switched on and off
using the turn signal and main beam lever.
The turn signal and main beam lever perform the following functions:
Right
and left turn signal light
– Push the lever upwards or downwards ⇒ fig. 47.
– If you only wish to flash three times* (the so-called convenience turn
signal), push the lever briefly up to the upper or lower pressure point
and release it. This function can be activated/deactivated in the infor-
mation display* ⇒ page 23.
– Turn signal for changing lanes - in order to only flash briefly, move the
lever up or down to the pressure point and hold it in this position.
Main beam
– Switch on the low beam.
– Push the lever forwards.
– Pull the lever back into the initial position in order to switch the main
beam off again.
Headlight flasher
– Pull on the lever of the steering wheel (sprung position) - the main
beam and warning light in the instrument cluster come on.
Parking light
– Switch off the ignition.
– Push the lever up or down - the right-hand or left-hand parking light
is switched on.
Information concerning the function of the lights.
• The turn signal system only operates when the ignition is switched on. The
corresponding indicator light or in the instrument cluster also flashes.
• The turn signal is automatically cancelled after negotiating a curve.
• The indicator light flashes at twice its normal rate if a bulb of the turn signal light
fails.
• The side light and rear light on the appropriate side of the vehicle are switched
on when the parking light is selected. The parking light only operates if the ignition
is switched off.
Caution
Use main beam or the headlight flasher only if this does not risk dazzling other road
users.
Note
• If you have switched on the right or left turn signal light and you switch off the
ignition, the parking light is not automatically switched on.
• Use only in accordance with the legal requirements the described lighting and
signal systems.
Fig. 47 Turn signal and main
beam lever
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
60
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Lights and Visibility 61
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Interior lighting
Front interior lighting and lighting of storage compartment on
front passenger side
Switching the interior light on
– Press the switch at the point of the symbol
⇒ fig. 48 or ⇒ fig. 49.
Switching the interior light off
– Press the switch at the point of the symbol O.
Door contact setting
– Position the switch into middle position
.
Lighting of storage compartment on the front passenger side
– When opening the flap of the storage compartment on the front
passenger side the lighting in the storage compartment comes on.
– The light switches on automatically when the parking light is switched
on and goes out when the flap is closed.
The interior light comes on as soon as you unlock the car or open a door or when
the ignition key has been removed. The light goes out again about 30 seconds after
all the doors have been closed. The interior lighting is switched off when you lock
the car or switch the ignition on. This only applies when the switch for the corre-
sponding interior lights is standing n the door contact setting.
The interior lighting goes off after about 10 minutes when a door has been left open
in order to avoid discharging the battery of the vehicle.
If the switch is in the position (permanent lights), the interior lighting goes off at
the latest after 10 minutes in order to avoid discharging the battery of the vehicle.
Two LEDs are integrated in the interior lighting, which illuminates the shift lever and
the middle of the dash panel. They are switched on automatically when switching
on the parking light.
In addition, the lighting of the door handle is switched on after the ignition is
switched on when the side lights are switched on.
Together with the front interior light, the rear interior light is simultaniously
switched on or off.
Note
We recommend having these bulbs replaced by a specialist garage.
Fig. 48 Detail of the head-
liner: front interior lighting
Fig. 49 Detail of the head-
liner: front interior lighting
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
61
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Lights and Visibility62
Front reading lights
Front reading lights
– You switch on or off the reading light on the right or left by pressing the
switch
⇒ fig. 50 or ⇒ fig. 51.
Interior lighting and rear reading lights
Interior lighting
– The rear interior lighting is operated together with the front interior
lighting ⇒ page 61.
Reading lights
– You switch on or off the reading light on the right or left by pressing the
switch
⇒ fig. 52.
Door warning light
Fig. 50 Detail of the head-
liner: Front reading lights
Fig. 51 Detail of the head-
liner: Front reading lights
with integrated interior
monitor
Fig. 52 Detail of the head-
liner: Interior lighting and
rear reading lights
Fig. 53 Front door: Warning
light
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
62
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Lights and Visibility 63
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The warning light is located in the door trim panel below ⇒ page 62, fig. 53.
The warning light goes on every time the door is opened. The light goes out about
10 minutes after opening the door in order to avoid discharging the battery of the
vehicle.
Luggage compartment light
The lighting comes on automatically when the boot lid is opened. The luggage
compartment lighting will switch off again automatically if the boot lid remains
open for more than about 30 minutes.
Entry lighting*
The lighting is positioned on the bottom edge of the exterior mirror.
The light beam is directed towards the entry area of the front door.
The light comes on after the doors have been locked or on opening the boot lid. The
light goes out after switching on the ignition or up to 30 seconds after closing all the
doors, the bonnet and the boot lid.
If a door, the bonnet or the boot lid remains open, the light goes out within 2
minutes if the ignition is switched off.
WARNING
If the entry light comes on, do not touch its cover - risk of burns!
Visibility
Rear window heater
– You can switch the rear window heater on or off by pressing the switch
⇒ fig. 54 - the indicator light in the switch comes on or goes out.
The rear window heater only operates when the engine is running.
The rear window heater switches off automatically after 10 minutes.
For the sake of the environment
You should switch off the rear window heater as soon as the rear window is clear.
The reduced current consumption will have a favourable effect on fuel economy
⇒ page 191, “Saving electricity”.
Note
• The position and the shape of the switch can differ depending on equipment
installed in the vehicle.
• If the on-board voltage drops, the rear window heater is switched off automat-
ically, in order to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine control.
Fig. 54 Switch for rear
window heater
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
63
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Lights and Visibility64
Sun visors
You can pull the sun visor for the driver or front passenger out of the fixture and
swivel it toward the door in the direction of the arrow ⇒ fig. 55.
The vanity mirrors in the sun visors are provided with covers. When you slide open
the cover in the direction of the arrow , the vanity mirror lighting in the headliner
switches on automatically. It switches off again when you slide the cover closed or
when you raise the sun visor.
WARNING
The sun visors must not be swivelled to the side windows into the deploy-
ment area of the head airbags if any objects, such as ball-point pens etc. are
attached to them. This might result in injuries to the occupants if the head
airbag is deployed.
Sun screen*
The sun screen is located in the lower part of the luggage compartment
cover.
Unrolling
– Pull the sun screen at the handle and hang it in the bracket
⇒ fig. 56.
Rolling up
– Take the sun screen out of the brackets and hold it at the handle
so that it can roll up slowly and without damage into the housing on
the luggage compartment cover.
Note
Do not place any objects which can react sensitively to influences of magnetic fields
(watches, electronics etc.) in the immediate area of the brakets. They can be
damaged by the magnetic field.
Fig. 55 Sun visor: swivelling
out
A
1
A
2
Fig. 56 Unroll the sun screen
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
A
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
64
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Lights and Visibility 65
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Sun screen in the rear doors*
Unrolling
– Pull the sun screen at the handle ⇒ fig. 57 and hang it in the
bracket on the top edge of the door.
Rolling up
– Take the sun screen out at the handle and hold it in such a way that
it can roll up slowly and without damage.
Windshield wiper and wash system
Windshield wiper
You can operate the windscreen wipers and automatic wipe/wash
using the windscreen wiper lever.
The windscreen wiper lever ⇒ fig. 58 has the following positions:
Finger-operated wiping
– If you wish to wipe the windscreen only briefly, push the lever into the
sprung position . If you hold the lever in the lower position for more
than 1 second, the wiper wipes faster.
Intermittent wiping
– Position the lever up into position .
– Set with the switch the desired break between the individual wiper
strokes
Slow wipe
– Position the lever up into position .
Fig. 57 Rear door: Sun
screen
A
A
A
A
Fig. 58 Windscreen wiper
lever
A
4
A
1
A
A
A
2
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
65
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Lights and Visibility66
Fast wipe
– Position the lever up into position .
Automatic wipe/wash for windscreen
– Pull the lever towards the steering wheel into sprung position , the
wash system sprays immediately, the windscreen wiper starts wiping
a little later. The wash system and the windscreen wiper operate
simultaneously at a speed of more than 120 km/h.
– Release the lever. The windscreen wash system stops and the wiper
continues for another 3 - 4 wiper strokes (depending on the period of
spraying of the windscreen). At a speed of more than 2 km/h, the wiper
wipes once again* 5 seconds after the last wiper stroke in order to
wipe the last drops from the windscreen. This function can be acti-
vated/deactivated by a specialist garage.
Rain sensor*
– Move the lever into position .
– You can set the sensitivity of the sensor individually with switch .
Switching windscreen wipers off
– Move the lever back into its home position .
After the windscreen wiper switches off each time or the ignition switches off for
the third time, the position of the windscreen wiper changes, this counteracts an
early fatigue of the wiper rubbers.
The windscreen wipers and the wash system only operate if the ignition is switched
on and the bonnet is closed.
If the intermittent wipe is switched on, the intervals are also controlled depending
on speed.
The rain sensor* automatically regulates the break between the individual wiper
strokes depending on the intensity of the rain.
The windscreen washer nozzles are heated* when the ignition is switched on.
Top up with wash liquid ⇒ page 220.
Winter position
If the windscreen wipers are in rest position, they cannot be folded out from the
windscreen. For this reason we recommend adjusting the windscreen wipers in
winter so that they can be folded out from the windscreen easily. You can set this
rest position as follows:
• Switch on the windscreen wipers.
• Switch off the ignition. The windscreen wipers remain in the position in which
they were when switching off the ignition.
You can also use the service position as a winter position.
WARNING
• Properly maintained windscreen wiper blades are essential for clear visi-
bility and safe driving ⇒ page 67.
• Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures, without
heating the windscreen beforehand. Otherwise the window cleaner could
freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front.
• The rain sensor only operates as a support. The driver is not released
from the responsibility to set the function of the windscreen wipers manu-
ally depending on the visibility conditions.
Caution
In frosty weather, please first of all check whether the windscreen wiper blades are
not frozen to the windscreen before switching them on. Switching on windscreen
wipers when the blades are frozen to the windscreen may result in damage both to
the blades and the motor of the windscreen wipers!
Note
• If the slower or the faster wiper setting is switched on ⇒ page 65, fig. 58
and the vehicle speed decreases to below 4 km/h, the lower wiper step is switched
on automatically. At a speed increase of more than 8 km/h the previous wiper
setting is established again.
A
3
A
5
A
1
A
A
A
0
A
2
A
3
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
66
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Lights and Visibility 67
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• If there is an obstacle on the windscreen, the wiper will try to push away the
obstacle. If the obstacle continues to block the wiper, the wiper stops after 5 cycles,
in order to avoid a damage to the wiper. Remove the obstacle and and switch on
the wiper again.
Headlight cleaning system*
The headlights are being cleaned after the windscreen has been sprayed for the first
time and fifth time, the low beam or main beam are switched on and the wind-
screen wiper lever was held in the position ⇒ page 65, fig. 58 for about 1
second.
The headlight washer nozzles are moved forward out of the bumper by the water
pressure for cleaning the headlights.
You should remove stubborn dirt (such as insect residues) from the headlight
lenses at regular intervals, for example when refuelling. Please refer to the following
guidelines.
You should remove any snow from the fixtures of the washer nozzles and clear ice
in winter with a de-icing spray in order to ensure proper operation of the cleaning
system.
Replacing wiper blades for the windscreen wipers
One cannot fold out the wiper arms in the rest position from the wind-
screen. Before replacing the wiper arms you must put them into the
service position.
Service position for changing wiper blades
– Close the bonnet.
– Switch the ignition on and then again off.
– Then press the windscreen wiper lever in the position ⇒ page 65,
fig. 58 within 10 seconds - the wiper arms move into the service posi-
tion.
Taking off the wiper blade
– Fold windscreen wiper arm away from the windscreen.
– Press the locking button, in order to unlock the wiper blade and pull
off in the direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 59.
Attaching a wiper blade
– Push the wiper blade until it locks up to the stop.
– Check whether the wiper blade is correctly attached.
– Fold the windscreen wiper arm back onto the windscreen.
The wiper arms return to the rest position after switching on the ignition and
changing the position of the window wiper lever or when driving at a speed greater
than 6 km/h.
Wiper blades in proper condition are essential to obtain good visibility. Wiper
blades should not be allowed to become dirtied by dust, insect remains and
preserving wax.
Juddering or smearing of the wiper blades could then be due to wax residues left
on the windscreen by vehicle washing in automatic vehicle wash systems. It is
therefore important to degrease the lips of the wiper blades after every pass
through an automatic vehicle wash system.
A
5
Fig. 59 Wiper blade for the
windscreen wiper
A
4
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
67
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Lights and Visibility68
WARNING
• If the windscreen wipers are handled carelessly, there is a risk of damage
to the windscreen.
• You should clean the wiper blades regularly with a windscreen cleaner in
order to avoid any smears. Clean a wiper blade with a sponge or cloth if it is
very dirty, for example from insect residues.
• Replace the wiper blades once or twice a year for safety reasons. The
wiper blades are available from Škoda Service Partners.
Rear-view mirror
Manual dimming interior rear-view mirror
Basic setting
– Pull the lever on the bottom edge of the mirror forward.
Dimming mirror
– Pull the lever on the bottom edge of the mirror back.
Automatic dimming interior mirror*
Switching on the automatic dimming
– Press the button - the warning light lights up ⇒ fig. 60.
Switching off the automatic dimming
– Press again the button - the warning light goes out .
If the automatic dimming is switched on, the mirror dims automatically
depending on the light striking the mirror from the rear. The mirror has no lever on
the bottom edge of the mirror. When the interior lights are switched on or the
reverse gear is engaged, the mirror always moves back into the basic position.
Note
• Automatic mirror dimming operates only properly if the sun screen* for the rear
window is not in use or the light striking the rear of the interior rear-view mirror is
not affected by other objects.
• Do not affix any stickers in front of the light sensor, so that you do not impair the
automatic dimming function or put it out of operation.
• If you switch off the automatic dimming interior rear-view mirror, also the exte-
rior mirror dimming is switched off.
Exterior mirror with entry lighting*
The lighting is positioned on the bottom edge of the exterior mirror.
The light beam is aimed at the entry area of the front doors after the car is unlocked.
The light comes on after the doors have been locked or on opening the front door.
The lighting goes out about 30 seconds after the doors are closed or if the ignition
is switched on.
If the doors remain open, the lighting goes out automatically after about 10 minutes
provided the ignition is not switched on.
Fig. 60 Automatic dimming
interior mirror
A
B
A
A
A
B
A
A
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
68
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Lights and Visibility 69
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Exterior mirror
You can adjust the exterior mirrors electrically*.
The exterior mirror heater only operates when the engine is running and
up to an outside temperature of +20 °C.
Heating of the external mirror
– Turn the rotary knob to position
⇒ fig. 61.
Adjusting left and right exterior mirrors simultaneously
– Turn the rotary knob to position
. The movement of the mirror surface
is identical to the movement of the rotary knob.
Adjusting the right-hand exterior mirror
– Turn the rotary knob to position
. The movement of the mirror
surface is identical to the movement of the rotary knob.
Switching off operating control
– Turn the rotary knob to position
.
Folding in both exterior mirrors*
– Turn the rotary knob to position
.
Lowerable exterior mirror* with the aid of the key for remote control
– If all the windows are closed, press the unlock button on the
remote control ⇒ page 44, fig. 34 for approx. 2 seconds.
Tilting surface of front passenger exterior mirror*
When the rotary knob is in position ⇒ fig. 61 and the reverse gear is engaged, the
surface of the mirror tilts down slightly. This provides an aid in seeing the kerb of the
pavement when parking the car.
The mirror returns back into its initial position, after the rotary knob is moved out
of the position and put into another position or if the speed is more than 15 km/h.
Memory for exterior mirrors*
On vehicles fitted with a memory for the driver seat, the relevant setting of the exte-
rior mirror is also stored automatically when the seat position is stored.
WARNING
• Convex (curved outward) or a spherical exterior mirrors increase the
vision field. They do, however, make objects appear smaller in the mirror.
These mirrors are only of limited use, therefore, for estimating distances to
the following vehicles.
• Use whenever possible the interior rear mirror, for estimating the
distances to the following vehicles.
Note
• Do not touch the surfaces of the exterior mirrors if the exterior mirror heater is
switched on.
• You can set the exterior mirrors by hand, if the power setting function fails at any
time, by pressing on the edge of the mirror surface.
• Contact your specialist garage if a fault exists with the power setting of the exte-
rior mirrors.
Fig. 61 Inner part of door:
Rotary knob
A
3
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
69
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Lights and Visibility70
Automatic dimming exterior mirror*
The exterior mirrors are dimmed together with the interior mirror. If the automatic
dimming is switched on, the mirror dims automatically depending on the light
striking the mirror from the rear.
When the interior lights are switched on or the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
always moves back into the basic position (not dimmed).
Note
• Automatic mirror dimming operates only properly if the sun screen* for the rear
window is not in use or the light striking the rear of the interior rear-view mirror is
not affected by other objects.
• Do not affix any stickers in front of the light sensor, so that you do not impair the
automatic dimming function or put it out of operation.
• If you switch off the automatic dimming interior rear-view mirror, also the exte-
rior mirror dimming is switched off.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
70
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seats and Stowage 71
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Seats and Stowage
Front seats
Basic information
The front seats have a wide range of different settings and can thus be matched to
the physical characteristics of the driver and front passenger. Correct adjustment of
the seats is particularly important for
• safely and quickly reaching the controls,
• a relaxed, fatigue-free body position,
• achieving the maximum protection offered by the seat belts and the airbag
system.
WARNING
• Never transport more occupants than the maximum seating in the
vehicle.
• Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat.
Children must be fastened ⇒ page 171, “Transporting children safely” with
a suitable restraint system.
• The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted to match
the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts must always be
correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal protection for you and your
occupants.
• Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven - never
place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the window or on the
surfaces of the seats. This is particularly important for the front seat
passenger. You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes
necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident. If an airbag is
deployed, you may suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated
position!
• It is important for the driver and front passenger to maintain a distance
of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. Not maintaining this
minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to prop-
erly protect you - hazard! The front seats and the head restraints must
always also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occupant.
• Ensure that there are no objects in the footwell as any objects may get
behind the pedals during a driving or braking manoeuvre. You would then
no longer be able to operate the clutch, to brake or accelerate.
Adjusting the front seats
Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction
–Pull the lever ⇒ fig. 62 up and push the seat into the desired posi-
tion.
– Release the lever and push the seat further until the lock is heard
to engage.
Adjusting height of seat
– Lift the seat if required by pulling or pumping lever upwards.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 62 Controls at seat
A
1
A
1
A
2
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
71
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seats and Stowage72
– Lower the seat if required by pushing or pumping lever down-
wards.
Adjust the angle of the seat backrest
– Relieve any pressure on the backrest (do not lean on it) and turn the
handwheel ⇒ page 71, fig. 62 to adjust the desired angle of the
backrest.
Adjusting lumbar support
– Turn the lever until you have set the most comfortable curvature
of the seat upholstery in the area of your spine.
The driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that the pedals can be pressed
to the floor with slightly bent legs.
The backrest on the driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that the upper
point of the steering wheel can be easily reached with slightly bent arms.
WARNING
• Only adjust the driver seat when the vehicle is stationary - risk of injury!
• Take care when adjusting the seat! Adjusting the seat without care can
lead to bruises or injuries.
• The backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise
this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system -
risk of injury!
Adjusting front seats electrically*
Adjusting seats
Adjusting seat
– Adopt the correct seated position ⇒ page 71.
– Press switch or ⇒ fig. 63 in the direction of the desired setting.
Adjusting lumbar support
– Press the switch front ⇒ fig. 63 in order to enlarge the curvature of
the lumbar support.
– Press the switch rear in order to reduce the curvature of the lumbar
support.
– Press the switch top in order to adjust the curvature of the lumbar
support higher.
– Press the switch bottom in order to adjust the curvature of the
lumbar support lower.
Switch is operated in order to move the seat up/down and forward/back, while
switch is operated in order to move the backrest forward or back.
A
2
A
3
A
4
Fig. 63 Side view: Controls
for adjusting the seat
A
B
A
C
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
A
C
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
72
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seats and Stowage 73
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
• Only adjust the driver seat when the vehicle is stationary - risk of injury!
• Caution when adjusting the seat! You may suffer injuries or bruises as a
result of adjusting the seat without paying proper attention.
• In view of the fact that the seats can also be adjusted when the ignition is
switched off (even when ignition key withdrawn), you should never leave
children unattended in the car.
• The backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise
this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system -
risk of injury!
Note
If the movement of the seat is inadvertently interrupted during an adjustment, once
again press the switch in the appropriate direction and continue with the adjust-
ment of the seat to the end.
Storing setting
Storing seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward
– Switch on the ignition.
– Adjust the seat ⇒ page 72.
– Adjust both exterior mirrors ⇒ page 69.
–Press button SET ⇒ fig. 64.
– Press one of the memory buttons within 10 seconds after pressing
the button SET - an acknowledgement signal confirms that the seat
setting is stored.
Storing exterior mirror setting for reversing*
– Switch on the ignition.
– Turn the exterior mirror control to position
⇒ page 69.
– Engage reverse gear.
– Move the right exterior mirror into the desired position ⇒ page 69.
– Take the vehicle out of gear. The set position of the exterior mirror is
stored.
Memory buttons
Memory for the seat offers the possibility to store the individual driver seat and
external mirror position. An individual position can be allocated to each of the three
memory buttons ⇒ fig. 64, that is three in total. After pressing the corre-
sponding memory button , the seat and the exterior mirror are automatically
moved into the positions which have been allocated to this button ⇒ page 74.
Emergency Off
You can interrupt the setting operation at any time, if you operate any button of the
driver seat.
Note
• When storing settings with the memory buttons, we recommend that you begin
with the front button and assign a memory button to each additional driver.
• Each new setting stored with the same button erases the previous setting.
Fig. 64 Driver seat: Memory
buttons and SET button
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
B
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
73
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seats and Stowage74
• Each time you store the seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward you
also have to re-store the individual setting of the exterior mirror on the passenger
side for reversing.
Assigning remote control to the memory buttons
After storing the settings of the seat and exterior mirrors, you have 10
seconds in order to assign the remote control to the appropriate memory
button.
– Withdraw the ignition key.
– Press the unlock button ⇒ page 44, after the successful assignment
an audible confirmation will sound. The setting is stored with the
memory button which you have selected.
If you wish to be able to retrieve the settings which are stored in the memory by also
using the remote control, you have to assign the remote control to a memory
button in each case.
If you wish, you can obtain an additional key with radio remote control from a
Škoda dealer and then assign the radio remote control to another memory button.
Note
• If the remote control had previously been assigned to another memory button,
this setting is then erased by the new assignment.
• If you assign the remote control to a memory button which has already been
assigned to a remote control, the old assignment is also replaced by a new assign-
ment in this case.
• The assignment of the remote control to a memory button is retained, however,
after reassigning the seats and exterior mirrors.
Retrieving settings of the seat and mirrors
You can retrieve the stored settings either with the memory buttons
or with the remote control*.
Retrieving settings with memory buttons
– In order to retrieve the stored setting, you have two possibilities:
– One-touch automatic memory: Briefly press the desired memory
button ⇒ page 73, fig. 64. The seat and exterior mirror are moved
automatically into the stored positions (this applies only if the ignition
is switched on and the speed is less than 5 km/h).
– Memory keying: Press and hold the desired memory button
pressed long enough until the seat and the exterior mirror are moved
into the stored positions.
Retrieving settings with remote control
– If the driver door is closed and the ignition is switched off, briefly press
the unlock button of the remote control ⇒ page 44 and then open the
driver door.
– The seat and exterior mirrors now move automatically into the stored
positions.
Retrieving setting of exterior mirror for reversing*
– Turn the rotary knob for the exterior mirror setting into the position
⇒ page 69 before engaging the reverse gear.
The mirror returns back into its initial position, after the rotary knob is moved out
of the position and put into another position or if the speed is more than 15 km/h.
Emergency Off
You can interrupt the setting operation at any time, if you operate any button of the
driver seat.
A
B
A
B
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
74
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seats and Stowage 75
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Head restraints
Best protection is achieved if the top edge of the head restraint is at the
same level as the upper part of your head.
Adjusting the height of a head restraint
– Grasp the side of the head restraint with both hands and pull in
upward direction as desired ⇒ fig. 65.
– Move the head restraint downwards if required by pressing and
holding the locking button with one hand ⇒ fig. 66 and by pressing
with the other hand the head restraint downwards.
Removing and installing a head restraint
– Pull the head restraint up out of the backrest of the seat as far as the
stop (on the rear head restraints fold forward the seat backrest).
– Press the locking button in the direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 66 and pull
the head restraint out.
– To re-insert the head restraint, push it down into the backrest of the
seat far enough until you hear the locking button engage.
The position of the front and rear head restraints is adjustable in height. The middle
rear head restraint is adjustable in two positions.
Middle rear head restraint*
IIn certain countries national legal provisions also require the equipment
of the rear seat with fixing eyes for child seat using the “Top Tether” system
⇒ page 178, “Attaching child seat using the “Top Tether” system”. For
vehicles, which are equipped with such fixing eyes, a deviating sequence
for removing the middle head restraint must be observed.
Removing and installing the rear middle head restraint
– Pull the head restraint out of the backrest of the seat as far as the stop.
Fig. 65 Adjusting head
restraint
Fig. 66 Removing a head
restraint
Fig. 67 Rear seats: middle
head restraint
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
75
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seats and Stowage76
– Press the locking button in the direction of arrow ⇒ page 75,
fig. 67, press simultaneously the locking button into the opening
using a flat screwdriver with a width of maximum 5 mm and pull out
the head restraint.
– To re-insert the head restraint, push it down into the backrest of the
seat far enough until you hear the locking button engage.
WARNING
• The head restraints must be correctly adjusted in order to offer effective
protection for the occupants in the event of an accident.
• Do not drive under any circumstance with removed head restraints - risk
of injury!
• If the rear seats are occupied, the rear head restraint must not be in the
lower position.
Rear seats
Folding the seat backrest forwards
The luggage compartment can be increased in size by folding forwards
the rear backrests.
Folding the rear backrests forward
– Before folding the rear backrests forward, you must adapt the position
of the front seats in such a way that they are not damaged by the
folded rear backrests.
9)
– Unlock the rear backrests by pressing the unlocking handle
⇒ fig. 68 and fold completely forwards.
Fold the rear backrests back into position
– Install the head restraint in the slightly lifted rear seat backrest.
– Place the rear lateral seat belt behind the edge of the side trim
panel ⇒ fig. 69.
– Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the
securing knob clicks into place - check by pulling on the rear seat
backrest.
A
A
A
B
Fig. 68 Unlock the seat back-
rest
9)
If the front seats are too far back, we recommend that you have the rear head restraints re-
moved before the seat backrests are folded forward. Store the removed head restraints in
such a way that they cannot be damaged or soiled. Please refer to the guidelines ⇒ page 78.
Fig. 69 Lock the seat back-
rest
A
A
A
C
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
76
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seats and Stowage 77
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– Make sure that the red pin is covered ⇒ page 76, fig. 68.
WARNING
• The belts and the belt locks must be in their original position after folding
back the rear backrests - they must be ready to use.
• The rear backrests must be securely interlocked in position so that no
objects in the luggage compartment can slide into the passenger compart-
ment if there is sudden braking - risk of injury!
• Pay attention that the rear seat backresst are correctly interlocked. It is
only then that the three-point seat belt for the middle seat can reliably fulfil
its function.
• Before folding the seat backrest back into the secure position, place the
rear lateral seat belt behind the edge of the side trim panel. Take suitable
measures to prevent that the seat belt is jammed between the seat backrest
and the side trim panel is thus damaged.
Rear seat armrest
– You can fold down the armrest to enhance occupant comfort
⇒ fig. 70.
Seat heaters*
You can heat the surfaces of the seats and of the backrests of the front
seats and the two outer rear seats.
Front seats
– You can switch on and regulate the seat heating of the driver or front
passenger seat by pressing the surface of the regulator at the point at
which the symbol is located
⇒ fig. 71.
– With one press, you can switch the heating to highest intensity which
is indicated by the lighting up of the three warning lights in the switch.
A
B
Fig. 70 Rear seats: Armrest
Fig. 71 Dash panel: Regu-
lator for front seat heating
Fig. 72 Centre console at
rear: Rotary controls for
heaters of rear seats
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
77
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seats and Stowage78
– With repeated pressing of the switch, the intensity of the heating is
down-regulated up to the switch-off. The intensity of the heating is
indicated by the number of illuminated warning lights in the switch.
Rear seats
– You can switch on and adjust the heating of the left and right seats by
pressing the switch
⇒ page 77, fig. 72.
– With one press, you can switch the heating to highest intensity which
is indicated by the lighting up of the three warning lights in the switch.
– With repeated pressing of the switch, the intensity of the heating is
down-regulated up to the switch-off. The intensity of the heating is
indicated by the number of illuminated warning lights in the switch.
WARNING
If you have a subdued pain and/or temperature sensitivity, e.g. through
medication, paralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabetes), we
recommend not to use the seat heating. This can lead to burns on the back,
the posterior and the legs which are difficult to heal. If the seat heating is
used, we recommend to make regular breaks in your journey when driving
long distances, so that in specific cases as mentioned above the body can
recuperate from the stress of the journey. Please consult your doctor, who
can evaluate your specific condition.
Caution
• You should not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply pressure at specific points
in order to avoid damaging the heating elements of the seat heaters.
• If items are fitted or are stored on the seats e.g. a child seat or a pouch etc, do
not use the seat heating. A fault in the heater elements of the seat heating can occur.
• Do not clean the seats moist ⇒ page 202.
Note
• The seat heating should only be switched on when the engine is running. This
has a significant effect of saving on the battery capacity.
• If the on-board voltage drops, the seat heating is switched off automatically, in
order to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine control.
Pedals
Concerning a secure depressing of the pedal, you should use only footmats from
the Škoda genuine accessories.
Operation of the pedals must not be hindered!
WARNING
• Greater pedal distances may be needed when there is a fault in the brake
system.
• Do not place any footmats or other additional floor coverings in the area
of the pedals in order to ensure that all the pedals can be fully depressed and
are able to return unobstructed to their initial position - risk of accident!
• There must be no objects on the floor which could roll under the pedals.
You would then no longer be able to apply the brakes, operate the clutch or
accelerator - risk of accident!
luggage compartment
Loading the luggage compartment
Please observe the following in the interest of having good handling char-
acteristics of your vehicle:
– Distribute the items of luggage as evenly as possible.
– Place heavy objects as far forward as possible.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
78
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seats and Stowage 79
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– Attach the items of luggage to the lashing eyes or the safety net*
⇒ page 79.
In the event of an accident, there is such a high kinetic energy which is produced by
small and light objects that they can cause severe injuries. The magnitude of the
kinetic energy depends on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and on the
weight of the object. The speed at which the vehicle is travelling is in this case the
more significant factor.
Example: In the event of a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, an unsecured
object with a weight of 4.5 kg produces an energy, which corresponds to 20 times
its own weight. This means that it results in a weight of approx. 90 kg. You can
imagine the injuries that can occur, if this “bullet” is flying through the interior
compartment and hits an occupant.
WARNING
• Store the objects in the luggage compartment and attach them to the
lashing eyes.
• Loose objects in the passenger compartment can be thrown forward
during a sudden manoeuvre or in case of an accident and can injure the
occupants or other oncoming traffic. This risk is still increased, if the objects
which are flying around are hit by a deployed airbag. In this case, the objects
which are thrown back can injure the occupants - hazard.
• Please note that the handling properties of your vehicle may be affected
when transporting heavy objects as a result of the displacement of the
centre of gravity. The speed and style of driving must be adjusted accord-
ingly.
• The items carried in the luggage compartment should be stored in such
a way that no objects are able to slip forward if there are any sudden driving
or braking manoeuvres undertaken - risk of injury!
• Never drive with the boot lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise
exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle - risk of poisoning!
• On no account exceed the permissible axle loads and the permissible
gross weight of the vehicle - risk of accident!
• Never transport occupants in the luggage compartment!
Caution
Please ensure that the heating elements of the rear window heater are not
damaged as a result of objects sliding in this area.
Note
Tyre pressure must be adjusted to the load ⇒ page 222, fig. 195.
Lashing eyes
Eyes are located on the sides of the loading area for lashing the goods to be loaded.
You can also attach a floor fixing net* to these eyes for lashing small objects.
WARNING
• The load to be transported must be fixed in place in such a way that it
cannot move during the journey and when braking.
• If the items of luggage or objects are attached to the lashing eyes with
unsuitable or damaged lashing straps, injuries can occur in the event of
braking manoeuvres or accidents. In order to prevent the items of luggage
being thrown forward, always use suitable lashing straps which are firmly
attached to the lashing eyes.
Fig. 73 Luggage compart-
ment: Lashing eyes
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
79
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seats and Stowage80
Fixing nets - Net programme*
Fixing examples of the fixing net as vertical pocket ⇒ fig. 74 and the fixing net as
horizontal pocket ⇒ fig. 75.
The fixing nets* are stored in the right side storage compartment of the luggage
compartment.
WARNING
The maximum permissable load of the side nets is 3.5 kg. Heavy objects are
not secured sufficiently - risk of injury and net damage!
Caution
Do not place any objects with sharp edges in the nets - risk of net damage.
Folding hooks
Folding hooks for attaching small items of luggage, such as bags etc., are provided
on both sides of the luggage compartment ⇒ fig. 76.
An item of luggage weighing up to 10 kg can be attached to the hook.
Fixing floor covering of the luggage compartment
Fig. 74 Fixing net: Vertical
pocket
Fig. 75 Fixing net: Floor
fixing net and horizontal
pocket
Fig. 76 Luggage compart-
ment: folding hooks
Fig. 77 Luggage compart-
ment: Fixing of the floor
covering
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
80
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seats and Stowage 81
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
A loop is located on the floor covering of the luggage compartment ⇒ page 80,
fig. 77. When handling the spare wheel, you can fix the raised floor covering on a
hook at the luggage compartment cover.
Luggage net*
The luggage net is designed for the tranportation of lighter objects.
WARNING
• In the luggage net you must only store objects (up to a total weight of 1.5
kg). Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently - risk of injury!
• No objects with sharp edges should be stored in the luggage net, because
they can damage the luggage net.
The luggage compartment cover
You can use the luggage compartment cover behind the head
restraints for storing light and soft items.
The luggage compartment cover can be removed as required if one must
transport bulky goods.
– Unhook the support straps on the boot lid ⇒ fig. 79.
– Place the cover on the side supports.
– Pull the cover out of the holder horizontally to the rear.
– Install again by pushing the luggage compartment cover forwards into
the holder and hanging the support straps on the boot lid.
You can stow the removed luggage compartment cover behind the rear seat back-
rest.
WARNING
No objects should be placed on the luggage compartment cover, the vehicle
occupants could be endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle
collides with something.
Fig. 78 Luggage compart-
ment: Luggage net
Fig. 79 Removing the
luggage compartment cover
A
1
A
2
A
2
A
1
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
81
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seats and Stowage82
Caution
Please ensure that the heating elements of the rear window heater are not
damaged as a result of objects placed in this area.
Note
Opening the boot lid also lifts up the luggage compartment cover.
Remove raised floor*
The raised floor makes handling of bulky items of luggage easier. You can
remove the raised floor if necessary.
– Unlock the floor by turning the safety eyes to the left by approx. 90°
⇒ fig. 80.
– Fold together the floor and take it out by moving in direction of arrow.
– Unlock the carrier rail by turning the arbor-mounted fixing eyes
to the right by approx. 90° ⇒ fig. 81.
WARNING
Pay attention when installing the raised floor that the carrier rail and the
raised floor are correctly fastened. If this is not the case, there is risk of injury
for the occupants.
Note
The maximum load of the raised floor is 75 kg.
Separation of the luggage compartment with the aid of the raised
floor*
Fig. 80 Luggage compart-
ment: remove raised floor
Fig. 81 Luggage compart-
ment: Remove carrier rail
A
A
A
B
A
C
Fig. 82 Luggage compart-
ment: Separation of the
luggage compartment
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
82
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seats and Stowage 83
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The luggage compartment can be separated with the aid of the raised
floor.
– Lift up a part of the floor with the holder and secure it by moving it into
the grooves marked by arrows ⇒ page 82, fig. 82.
The roof rack*
Description
Pay attention to the following points if you wish to transport luggage or other items
on the roof of your vehicle:
• A special roof luggage rack system was developed for the vehicle, that is why
you should only use a roof luggage rack which has been released for use by Škoda
Auto a.s.
• The base carrier is the basis for a complete roof luggage rack system. Separate
additional holders are required for safety reasons for transporting luggage, bikes,
surfboards, skis and boats.
• The basic version of the roof luggage rack system and further components are
obtainable as accessories from Škoda Service Partners.
Caution
• If you use other roof rack systems or if the roof bars are not properly fitted, then
any damage which may result to your car is not covered by the warranty agree-
ments. It is therefore essential to pay attention to the fitting instructions supplied
with the roof luggage rack system.
• On models fitted with a power sliding/tilting roof, ensure that the opened
sliding/tilting roof does not strike any items of luggage transported on the roof.
• Ensure that the opened boot lid does not collide with the roof load.
For the sake of the environment
The increased aerodynamic drag results in a higher fuel consumption. One should
therefore take off the roof bar system after use.
Attachment points
Fitting
– Insert the attachment points of the roof rack into the mounts of the
body so that the pins of the attachment points grasp into the holes of
the body.
Note
• Pay attention to the information regarding assembly and disassembly in the
attached instructions.
• If you have any questions, please contact a specialist garage.
Roof load
Distribute weight evenly over the roof luggage rack system. The maximum permis-
sible roof load (including roof rack system) of 100 kg and the maximum permissible
total weight of the vehicle should not be exceeded.
You cannot make full use of the permissible roof load if you use a roof luggage rack
system with a lower load carrying capacity. The load transported on the roof
luggage rack system must not exceed the weight limit which is stated in the fitting
instructions.
Fig. 83 Attachment points
for base roof carrier
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
83
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seats and Stowage84
WARNING
• The items which you transport on the roof bar system must be reliably
attached - risk of accident!
• You must on no account exceed the permissible roof load, the permis-
sible axle loads and the permissible gross weight of your vehicle - risk of
accident!
• Please note that the handling properties of your vehicle change when
you transport heavy or bulky items on the roof bar system as a result of the
displacement of the centre of gravity and the increased wind attack area -
risk of accident! You must absolutely adapt your style of driving and the
speed of the vehicle to the specific circumstances.
Cup holder
Cup holder in front centre console
You can place two cups or beverage cans into the recesses ⇒ fig. 84.
On vehicles which are fitted with a cover for cup holders*, you can cover the cup
holder by pulling at the handle .
WARNING
• Do not place any hot beverages into the cup holder while the car is
moving. The hot beverages may spill - risk of scalding!
• Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material (e.g.
glass, porcelain). You might be injured by them in the event of an accident.
Caution
Do not open the beverages in the cup holder while driving. They may spill when
braking and while doing so damage the vehicle.
Cup holders in the armrest of the rear seats*
Fig. 84 Front centre console:
Cup holder
A
A
Fig. 85 Armrest of rear seats:
Cup holder
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
84
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seats and Stowage 85
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
You can place two cups into the cup holder.
– If you press on the face end of the armrest in the direction of arrow
⇒ page 84, fig. 85, the cup holder comes out.
– In order to slide the cup holder in again, press the middle part of the
cup holder ⇒ fig. 86 and slide it into the armrest.
WARNING
• Do not place any hot beverages into the cup holder while the car is
moving. The hot beverages may spill - risk of scalding!
• Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material (e.g.
glass, porcelain). You might be injured by them in the event of an accident.
Caution
Do not open the beverages in the cup holder while driving. They may spill when
braking and while doing so damage the vehicle.
Note holder
The note holder is designed e.g. for attaching a car park ticket in parking areas.
The attached note has to always be removed before starting off in order not to
restrict the driver's vision.
Ashtray
Front ashtray*
Fig. 86 Armrest of rear seats:
Insert cup holder
Fig. 87 Windscreen: Note
holder
Fig. 88 Centre console: Front
ashtray
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
85
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seats and Stowage86
Removing ashtray insert
– Open the ashtray ⇒ page 89, fig. 94.
– Grasp the ashtray insert at the point ⇒ page 85, fig. 88 and take it
out in direction of arrow.
Insert ashtray insert
– Insert the ashtray vertically downwards.
WARNING
Never lay flammable objects in the ashtray basin - risk of fire!
Rear ashtray*
Removing ashtray insert
– Open the ashtray ⇒ page 91, fig. 101.
– Grasp the insert at the points marked with the arrows ⇒ fig. 89 and
take it out.
Insert ashtray insert
– Insert the ashtray insert into the mount and press it in.
WARNING
Never lay flammable objects in the ashtray basin - risk of fire!
Cigarette lighter*, power sockets
Cigarette lighter
You can also use the socket on the cigarette lighter for other elec-
trical appliances.
Using the cigarette lighter
– Press the button of the lighter ⇒ fig. 89 or ⇒ page 85, fig. 88.
– Wait until the button jumps forward.
– Remove the cigarette lighter immediately and use it.
– Insert the cigarette lighter again into the socket.
Using the socket
– Remove the cover.
– Connect the plug of the electrical appliance to the socket.
The 12 volt power socket can also be used to supply power to electrical accessories
with a power uptake up to 180 watts.
WARNING
• Take care when using the cigarette lighter! Not paying proper attention
or incorrect use the cigarette lighter in an uncontrolled manner may result in
burns.
• The cigarette lighter and the power socket also operates when the igni-
tion is switched off or the ignition key withdrawn. You should therefore
never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
A
A
Fig. 89 Centre console: Rear
ashtray
A
A
A
B
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
86
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seats and Stowage 87
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Caution
Always use matching plugs to avoid damaging the power socket.
Note
• Connecting electrical components when the engine is not running will
drain the battery of the vehicle - risk of battery draining!
• Further information ⇒ page 228.
Power socket in the luggage compartment
– Open the cover of the power socket ⇒ fig. 90.
– Connect the plug of the electrical appliance to the socket.
You can only use the power socket for the connection of approved electrical acces-
sories with a power uptake up to 180 watts. The vehicle battery will be discharged
in the process if the engine is stationary.
The same remarks apply here as for ⇒ page 86.
Further information ⇒ page 228.
Storage compartments
Overview
You will find the following storage facilities in your vehicle:
WARNING
• Please do not place anything on top of the dash panel. Such objects
might slide or fall down when driving (when accelerating or cornering) and
may distract you from concentrating on the traffic situation - risk of acci-
dent!
• Ensure that when driving no objects from the centre console of from
other storage possibilities may get into the footwell of the driver. You would
Fig. 90 Luggage compart-
ment: Power socket
Storage compartment on the front passenger side ⇒ page 88
Storage compartment on the driver's side ⇒ page 89
Stowage compartment in front centre console* ⇒ page 89
Storage net on the front centre console* ⇒ page 89
Stowage compartment for spectacles* ⇒ page 90
Storage compartment in the front doors ⇒ page 90
Stowage compartment below front passenger seat* ⇒ page 90
Front seat armrest with stowage compartment ⇒ page 91
Rear armrest with stowage compartment* ⇒ page 91
Stowage compartment in rear centre console* ⇒ page 91
Stowage compartment for an umbrella ⇒ page 92
Seat backrest with opening for skis* ⇒ page 92
Through-loading bag* ⇒ page 93
Side compartments in the luggage compartment* ⇒ page 94
Clothes hooks* ⇒ page 95
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
87
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seats and Stowage88
then no longer be able to apply the brakes, operate the clutch or accelerator
- risk of accident!
Storage compartment on the front passenger side
Opening and closing the storage compartment on the front
passenger side
– Press the button ⇒ fig. 91, the lid folds down.
– Raise the lid and press it until the catch is heard to engage.
In the storage compartment are pencil holders.
WARNING
The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety
reasons.
Cooling of storage compartment on front passenger side
The compartment is fitted with an isolatable entry for cooled air.
– Switch on the cooling system by pulling the lever in direction of arrow
⇒ fig. 92.
– Switch off the cooling by pressing the lever.
Opening the air inlet when the air conditioning system is on causes fresh or interior
air to flow into the storage compartment.
We recommend that you switch off the cooling if it is operating in the heating mode
or if you are not using the cooling system for the storage compartment.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 91 Dash panel: Storage
compartment on the front
passenger side
Fig. 92 Storage compart-
ment: Using cooling system
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
88
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seats and Stowage 89
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Storage compartment on the driver's side
– The storage compartment is opened by lifting the handle and folding
open in the direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 93.
WARNING
The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety
reasons.
Stowage compartment in front centre console*
– Press on the lid at the point in direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 94, the lid
slides in.
WARNING
The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and must also
not be used for such purposes - risk of fire!
Storage net on the front centre console*
The storage net in the front center console ⇒ fig. 95 is designed for the transport of
smaller objects.
WARNING
• In the luggage net you must only store objects (up to a total weight of 0,5
kg). Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently - risk of injury!
• No objects with sharp edges should be stored in the luggage net, because
they can damage the luggage net.
Fig. 93 Dash panel: Storage
compartment on the driver's
side
Fig. 94 Front centre console:
Storage compartment
A
A
Fig. 95 Front centre console:
Storage net
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
89
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seats and Stowage90
Stowage compartment for spectacles*
– Press button , the storage compartment folds down ⇒ fig. 96.
WARNING
The compartment must only be opened when removing or inserting objects
and otherwise must be kept closed.
Storage compartment in the front doors
WARNING
Use the storage compartments in the door panels ⇒ fig. 97 only for small
items which do not project out of the compartment in order to avoid any
interference with the proper operation of the side airbags.
Stowage compartment below front passenger seat*
The storage compartment is foreseen for storing small objects of up to 1,5
kg. in weight.
– Tilt the lock to open the flap and pull out the flap ⇒ fig. 98.
– Tilt the lock to close the flap and press flap close.
Fig. 96 Detail of the head-
liner: Stowage compartment
for spectacles
A
A
Fig. 97 Storage compart-
ment in the front doors
Fig. 98 Front passenger seat:
Storage compartment
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
90
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seats and Stowage 91
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Front seat armrest with storage compartment
The armrest is adjustable for height and length.
Opening stowage compartment
– Open the lid of the armrest in the direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 99.
Closing stowage compartment
– Open the lid up to the stop, then you can fold it downwards.
Setting height
– First of all fold the lid to the bottom and lift it in the direction of arrow
into one of the 4 fixed positions.
Adjusting in forward/back direction
– Push the lid into the desired position.
Note
Push the lid of the armrest up to stop to the rear before operating the handbrake.
Rear seat armrest with storage compartment*
You can fold down the armrest to enhance occupant comfort.
The armrest includes a stowage compartment. You open the compartment by
pressing the button on the front side and raising the cover ⇒ fig. 100.
Stowage compartment in rear centre console*
The storage compartment is equipped with a removeable insert.
Fig. 99 Armrest: Storage
compartment
Fig. 100 Armrest at the rear
door
Fig. 101 Centre console at
rear: Storage compartment
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
91
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seats and Stowage92
– Open the storage compartment by pulling at the handle in direc-
tion of arrow ⇒ page 91, fig. 101.
WARNING
The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and must also
not be used for such purposes - risk of fire!
Stowage compartment for umbrella*
The umbrella supplied with the car is stowed in the compartment in the
rear left door ⇒ fig. 102.
Opening umbrella
– Press button ⇒ fig. 103.
Closing umbrella
– Press the button . The umbrella closes partially in direction of arrow
.
– Press the umbrella in direction of arrow in order to fold it closed
completely.
Seat backrest with opening for skis
A
A
Fig. 102 Left rear door:
Storage compartment
Fig. 103 Opening and
closing umbrella
A
A
A
A
A
B
A
C
Fig. 104 Rear seats: Handle
of lid
Fig. 105 Luggage compart-
ment: Unlock button
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
92
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seats and Stowage 93
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
After folding open the armrest and the lid, an opening in the seat backrest
becomes visible through which you can push long objects e.g. skis etc.
You can fold open the armrest and the lid from the passenger or luggage
compartment.
Opening from passenger compartment
– Fold the rear armrest ⇒ page 77, fig. 70.
– Pull the handle up to the stop in upward direction and fold open the
lid downwards ⇒ page 92, fig. 104.
Opening from luggage compartment
– Push the unlock button downwards ⇒ page 92, fig. 105 and fold
the lid (with armrest) to the front.
Closing
– Fold the lid and the armrest up to the stop in upward direction - the lid
must click into place audibly.
Ensure that the armrest is always locked into place after closing. You can recognize
this on the fact that the red field above the unlocking button of the luggage
compartment is not visible.
Through-loading bag (Unibag)*
Loading
– Open the boot lid/luggage compartment door.
– Push the unlock button downwards ⇒ page 92, fig. 105 and fold
the lid (with armrest) to the front.
– Place the empty through-loading bag in such a way that the end of the
bag with the zip lies in the boot.
– Push the objects into the through-loading bag from the boot ⇒ .
Securing
– Insert the securing belt of the through-loading bag into the middle
seat belt buckle ⇒ fig. 106.
– Place the securing belt on ski sport articles in the middle between the
bindings ⇒ .
– Pull the securing belt tight at the free end of the belt .
A
A
A
A
Fig. 106 Attaching through-
loading bag to middle seat
belt buckle of rear seats
A
A
A
A
A
C
A
B
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
93
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seats and Stowage94
Stowing
– Fold the lid and the armrest up to the stop in upward direction - the lid
must click into place audibly. You can recognize this on the fact that
the red field above the unlocking button of the luggage compart-
ment is not visible ⇒ page 92, fig. 105.
– Carefully fold the empty (dry) through-loading bag together, place it in
the luggage compartment and secure it to prevent it slipping.
WARNING
• After placing items into the through-loading bag, you must secure the
bag with the securing belt .
• The securing belt must hold the items tight.
• Ensure that the securing belt on ski sport articles lies in the middle
between the bindings (see imprint on the through-loading bag).
Note
• Place the skis with the tips facing the front, snowboards and ski sticks with the
tips facing the rear into the through-loading bag.
• If there are several pairs of skis in the through-loading bag, ensure that the bind-
ings are positioned at the same height.
• The through-loading bag must never be folded together or stowed when
moist.
Side compartments*
– You can open the compartment by turning the locks in the direction of
arrow ⇒ fig. 107 ⇒ fig. 108.
On some vehicles the battery is located in the left compartment ⇒ page 216. This
compartment is marked by the symbol and can be opened by turning the
securing pins e.g with a coin or using a flat screwdriver.
In the right compartment ⇒ fig. 108 is located the CD changer*, the TV tuner* and
the first-aid box.
A
A
A
A
Fig. 107 Luggage compart-
ment: Left side compartment
Fig. 108 Luggage compart-
ment: Right side compart-
ment
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
94
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seats and Stowage 95
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Clothes hooks*
A clothes hook is located above the rear doors ⇒ fig. 109.
WARNING
• Ensure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impair your
vision to the rear.
• Use the hooks for hanging only light items of clothing and ensure that
there are no heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
• Do not use clothes hangers for hanging up items of clothing otherwise
this will interfere with the protection offered by the head airbag*.
Fig. 109 Rear door: Clothes
hooks
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
95
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
The air conditioning system96
The air conditioning system
Climatic* (semi-automatic air conditioning system)
Description
The Climatic is a combined cooling and heating system. It makes it
possible to optimally control the air temperature at any season of the
year.
Description of the Climatic
It is important for your safety and for your driving comfort that the Climatic is oper-
ating properly.
The cooling only operates if button ⇒ page 97, fig. 110 is pressed, and the
following conditions are met:
• engine running,
• outside temperature above +2°C and
• blower switch switched on (positions 1 to 4).
If the cooling system is switched on, the temperature and air humidity drops in the
vehicle. The wellbeing of the occupants of the car is enhanced as a result of this
particularly at high outside temperatures and a high air humidity. The system
prevents the windows misting up during the cold season of the year.
The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full heat
output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
It is possible to briefly activate recirculated air mode in order to enhance the
cooling effect ⇒ .
Air at a temperature of about 5°C may flow out of the vents under certain circum-
stances when the cooling system is operating. Lengthy and uneven distribution of
the air flow out of the vents and large differences in temperature, for example when
getting out of the vehicle, can result in chills in sensitive persons.
The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of ice, snow or leaves in order
to ensure that the heating and cooling systems operate properly.
After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air condi-
tioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle. This is quite normal
and not an indication of a leak!
WARNING
• For your own safety and that of other road users, ensure that all the
windows are free of ice, snow and misting. Please familiarize yourself about
how to correctly operate the heating and ventilation systems, how to demist
and defrost the windows, as well as with the cooling mode.
• You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of
time, as “stale” air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, divert
your attention and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an
accident increases. Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows
begin misting up.
Note
• We recommend that you do not smoke in the vehicle when the recirculating air
mode is operating since the smoke which is drawn at the evaporator from the inte-
rior of the vehicle forms deposits in the evaporator of the air conditioning system.
This produces a permanent odour when the air conditioning system is operating
which can only be eliminated through considerable effort and expense (replace-
ment of compressor).
AC
A
1
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
96
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
The air conditioning system 97
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Using the system
Fig. 110 Climatic: Control elements
Setting temperature
– Turn the control dial ⇒ fig. 110 to the right in order to increase the
temperature.
– Turn the control dial to the left in order to increase the tempera-
ture.
Controlling blower
– Turn the blower switch into one of the positions, 1 to 4, in order to
switch the blower on.
– Turn the blower switch into position 0 in order to switch the blower
off.
– Pressing button - causes the recirculating air system
⇒ page 99 to be switched on.
Control for air distribution
– You can adjust the direction of the air flow ⇒ page 99 using air distri-
bution regulator .
Switching cooling on and off
– Press the button ⇒ fig. 110. The warning light lights up in the
button.
– When you again press the switch , the cooling system is switched
off. The warning light in the button goes out.
Rear window heater
– Press button . Further information ⇒ page 63.
Auxiliary heating
– Press the button in order to directly switch on/off the auxiliary
heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation. Further information
⇒ page 106.
The set temperature will be automatically maintained other than when the
control dial is on the extreme right or extreme left position:
• Extreme right position - full heating;
• Extreme left position - full cooling;
• The blower should aways be on to prevent the windows from misting up.
Note
• The whole heat output will be needed to unfrost the windscreen and side
windows. No warm air will be fed to the footwell. This can lead to restriction of the
heating comfort.
• The used air streams out through the air removal openings in the luggage
compartment.
• If the cooling system has not been switched on for a lengthy period, odours may
be produced at the evaporator because of deposits. Switch the cooling system on
A
A
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
4
A
C
AC
A
1
AC
A
2
A
3
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
97
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
The air conditioning system98
at least once a month for approximately 5 minutes at the highest blower stage - also
during the cold season of the year - in order to remove such odours. Also open a
window for a short time.
• Please refer to the information regarding recirculated air mode ⇒ page 99.
Set Climatic
Recommended settings of Climatic controls for the respective operating modes:
Set-up
Setting of the control dial Button
Air outlet vents 2
Defrosting the windscreen and
side windows
recommended
22°C
3
switched off do not switch on
open and align with the side
window
Free windscreen and side win-
dows from mist
desired tempera-
ture
2
switched on do not switch on
open and align with the side
window
The fastest heating
recommended
22°C
2
switched off briefly switched on open
Comfortable heating
desired tempera-
ture
2 or 3
or
switched off do not switch on open
The fastest cooling
recommended
22°C
briefly 4, then 2
or 3
switched on briefly switched on open
Optimal cooling
desired tempera-
ture
1, 2 or 3
switched on do not switch on open and align to the roof
Fresh air mode - ventilation
up to the stop
towards the left
desired position
switched off do not switch on open
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
1
A
4
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
98
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
The air conditioning system 99
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Recirculated air mode
In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle
and then fed back into the interior.
Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from
getting into the vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or
when standing in a traffic jam.
Switching recirculated air mode on
– Press the button ⇒ page 97, fig. 110 the warning light lights
up in the button.
Switching recirculated air mode off
– Press again the button - the warning light in the button goes out.
The recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution control
is in position ⇒ page 97, fig. 110. You can also switch recirculated air mode
on again from this setting by repeatedly pressing button .
WARNING
You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time,
as “stale” air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, divert your
attention and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an acci-
dent increases. Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows
begin misting up.
Air outlet vents
Fig. 111 Air vents at the front
Fig. 112 Air vents at the rear
Open air outlet vents
– Turn the rotary knob to position
.
Close air outlet vents
– Turn the rotary knob to position 0.
A
4
A
C
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
99
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
The air conditioning system100
Redirecting air flow
– The horizontal as well as the vertical direction of the air flow is set with
the handle in the middle of the air outlet vents.
You can set the air supply to the individual air outlet vents using the control dial
⇒ page 97, fig. 110. The air outlet vents 2, 3 ⇒ page 99, fig. 111 and 5 ⇒ page 99,
fig. 112 can also be closed and opened individually.
Unwarmed or cooled air will flow out of the air outlet vents according to the setting
of control dial ⇒ page 97, fig. 110 and the atmospheric conditions.
Using the air conditioning system economically
The compressor on the air conditioning system uses power from the engine when
in cooling mode which will effect the fuel consumption.
It recommended to open the windows or the doors of a vehicle for which the inte-
rior has been strongly heated through the effect of direct sunlight in order to allow
the heated air to escape.
The cooling system should not be switched on while travelling when the window is
open.
The desired interior temperature can also be achieved without switching in the
cooling system just by switching to fresh air mode.
For the sake of the environment
When you economize on fuel, you also reduce pollutant emissions.
Operational problems
If the cooling system does not operate at outside temperatures higher than +5 °C,
there is a problem in the system. The reasons for this may be:
• The fuse on the air conditioning system has blown. Check the fuse, replace it if
necessary ⇒ page 241.
• The cooling system has switched off automatically for a short time because the
coolant temperature of the engine is too hot ⇒ page 11.
If you are not able to rectify the operational problem yourself, or if the cooling
capacity decreases, switch the cooling system off. Contact a specialist garage.
Climatronic* (automatic air conditioning)
Description
The Climatronic system is a combination of an automatic heating,
fresh air and cooling system which provides optimal comfort for the
occupants of the car.
The Climatronic maintains fully automatically a convenience temperature. This is
achieved by automatically varying the temperature of the outflowing air, the blower
stages and the air distribution. The system also takes into account sunlight which
eliminates the need to alter the settings manually. The automatic mode
⇒ page 102 ensures maximum wellbeing of the occupants at all times of the year.
Description of Climatronic system
The cooling operates only if the following conditions are met:
• engine running,
• outside temperature above +2°C,
• switched on.
If the cooling system is switched on, the temperature and air humidity drops in the
vehicle. The wellbeing of the occupants of the car is enhanced as a result of this
particularly at high outside temperatures and a high air humidity. The system
prevents the windows misting up during the cold season of the year.
The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full heat
output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
It is possible to briefly activate recirculated air mode in order to enhance the
cooling effect ⇒ page 103.
A
C
A
A
AC
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
100
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
The air conditioning system 101
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of ice, snow or leaves in order
to ensure that the heating and cooling systems operate properly.
The AC compressor is switched off at a high coolant temperature in order to provide
cooling at a high load of the engine.
After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air condi-
tioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle. This is quite normal
and not an indication of a leak!
Recommended setting for all periods of the year:
• Set the desired temperature, we recommend 22 °C.
• Press the button ⇒ page 102, fig. 113.
• Move the air outlet vents 2 and 3 so that the air flow is directed slightly upwards.
Aeration of the vehicle when ignition is switched off*
On models fitted with power sliding/tilting roof with sollar cells, the fresh air blower
is automatically switched over to “solar mode” if the sun ray's are sufficient after
switching off the ignition. The solar cells on the sliding/tilting roof deliver power for
the fresh air blower. This supplies the interior of the car with fresh air.
For an optimum ventilation, the air outlet vents 2 and 3 must be opened
⇒ page 105, fig. 114.
The ventilation functions only when the sliding/tilting roof is closed.
WARNING
• For your own safety and that of other road users, ensure that all the
windows are free of ice, snow and misting. Please familiarize yourself about
how to correctly operate the heating and ventilation systems, how to demist
and defrost the windows, as well as with the cooling mode.
• You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of
time, as “stale” air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, divert
your attention and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an
accident increases. Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows
begin misting up.
Note
• If the cooling system has not been switched on for a lengthy period, odours may
be produced at the evaporator because of deposits. Switch the cooling system on
at least once a month for approximately 5 minutes at the highest blower stage - also
during the cold season of the year - in order to remove such odours. Also open a
window for a short time.
• We recommend that you do not smoke in the vehicle when the recirculating air
mode is operating since the smoke which is drawn at the evaporator from the inte-
rior of the vehicle forms deposits in the evaporator of the air conditioning system.
This produces a permanent odour when the air conditioning system is operating
which can only be eliminated through considerable effort and expense (replace-
ment of compressor).
• The used air streams out through the air removal openings in the luggage
compartment.
• On vehicles equipped with a factory-fitted radio* or navigation*, the informa-
tion of the Climatronic is also shown on the display. You can switch off this function
for the Radio* - see operating instructions for radio. This function cannot be
switched off during Navigation*.
• Using the cooling economically ⇒ page 100.
• Operational problems ⇒ page 100.
AUTO
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
101
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
The air conditioning system102
Overview of the control elements
The controls enable a separate setting of the temperature for the left
and right side.
Fig. 113 Climatronic: Control elements
The buttons
Defrost windscreen intensively
Air flow to the windows
Air flow to head
Air flow in the footwell
Recirculated air mode with air quality sensor*
Rear window heater
Buttons / control dial
Setting of the temperature for the left side.
Automatic mode
Switching off Climatronic
Setting the blower speed
Button for direct switching on/off of auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating)*
⇒ page 106
Switching on/off of the temperature setting in dual mode
Switching cooling on and off
Setting of the temperature for the right side.
Note
Below the top row of buttons is located the interior temperature sensor. Do not
glue or cover over the sensor, otherwise it could have an unfavourable effect on the
Climatronic.
Automatic mode
The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant temper-
ature and to demist the windows in the interior of the car.
Switching automatic mode on
– Set a temperature between +18 °C and +26 °C.
– Move the air outlet vents 1 and 2 ⇒ page 105, fig. 114 so that the air
flow is directed slightly upwards.
– Press the button . In the right or left top corner a warning light
lights up, depending on which unit was last selected.
If the warning light in the top right corner of the button lights up, the
Climatronic operates in “HIGH” mode. The “HIGH” mode is the standard setting of
the Climatronic.
When pressing again the button , the Climatronic changes into the “LOW”
mode and the warning light in the top left corner lights up. The Climatronic uses
only in this mode the lower blower speed. However taking into account the noise
level, this is more comfortable, yet be aware that the effectiveness of the air condi-
tioning system is reduced particularly if the vehicle is fully occupied.
By pressing again the button , you change into the “HIGH” mode.
The automatic mode is switched off by pressing the button for the air distribution
or increasing or decreasing the blower speed. The temperature is nevertheless
regulated.
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
A
7
A
8 AUTO
A
9 OFF
A
10
A
11
A
12 DUAL
A
13 AC
A
14
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
102
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
The air conditioning system 103
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Switching cooling on and off
Switching cooling on and off
– Press the button . The warning light lights up in the button.
– When you again press the switch , the cooling system is switched
off. The warning light in the button goes out. Only the function of the
ventilation remains active when no lower temperature than the
outside temperature can be reached.
Setting temperature
You can separate the interior temperature for the left and right side sepa-
rately.
– You can set the temperature for both sides after switching on the igni-
tion with the control dial .
– If you wish to set the temperature for the right side, turn the control
dial . The warning light in the button lights up, this indicates
that differing temperatures for the left and right side can be set.
If the warning light in the button lights up, the temperature for both sides
cannot be set with the control dial . You can reinitiate this function by pressing
the button . The warning light in the button which indicates the possibility to
set differing temperatures for the left and right side, goes out.
You can set the interior temperature between +18°C and +26°C. The interior
temperature is regulated automatically within this range. If you chose a tempera-
ture lower than +18°C, a blue symbol lights up at the start of the numerical scale. If
you chose a temperature higher than +26°C, a red symbol lights up at the end of
the numerical scale. In both limit positions the Climatronic operates at maximum
cooling or heating capacity, respectively. The temperature is not controlled in this
case.
Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents (in particular at the
leg area) and large differences in temperature, for example when getting out of the
vehicle, can result in chills in sensitive persons.
Recirculated air mode
In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle
and then fed back into the interior.
Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from
getting into the vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or
when standing in a traffic jam.
Switching recirculated air mode on
– Press the button - the warning light lights up in the button.
Switching recirculated air mode off
– Press again the button or the button - the warning light in
the button goes out.
WARNING
You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time,
as “stale” air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, divert your
attention and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an acci-
dent increases. Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows
begin misting up.
Note
If the windscreen mists up, press the button ⇒ page 102, fig. 113. After
the windscreen has been demisted, press the button .
AC
AC
A
7
A
14 DUAL
DUAL
A
7
DUAL
AUTO
A
1
AUTO
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
103
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
The air conditioning system104
Automatic air distribution control*
When the automatic air distribution control is switched on, an air
quality sensor measures the concentration of pollutants in the drawn
in air.
If a considerable increase in concentration of pollutants is recognized by
the air quality sensor, the air distribution control will temporarily be
switched off. If the concentration of pollutants decreases to the normal
level, the air distribution control is automatically switched off so that fresh
air can be guided into the vehicle interior.
Switch on automatic air distribution control
– Press the button repeatedly * until the warning light on the right
side of the button lights up.
Switch off automatic air distribution control temporarily
– If the air quality sensor does not switch on automatically when there
is a nauseating smell, you can switch it on yourself by pressing the
button *. The warning light lights up in the button on the left side.
Switch on automatic air distribution control again
– Hold the button pressed * for more than 2 seconds and on the
right side of the button the warning light lights up.
Switch off automatic air distribution control
– Press again the button * until the warning lights in the button go
out.
WARNING
You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time,
as “stale” air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, divert your
attention and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an acci-
dent increases. Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows
begin misting up.
Note
• If the windscreen mists up, press the button ⇒ page 102, fig. 113.
After the windscreen has been demisted, press the button .
• The automatic air distribution control operates only if the outside temperature
is higher than approx. 2°C.
Controlling blower
There are a total of seven blower stages available.
The Climatronic system controls the blower stages automatically in line
with the interior temperature. You can also, however, adapt the blower
stages manually to suit your particular needs.
– Press again the button
on the left side (reduce blower speed) or on
the right side (increase blower speed).
If you switch off the blower, the Climatronic is switched off.
The set blower speed is displayed above the button when the respective
number of warning lights come on.
WARNING
• “Stale air” may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, reduce
attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an
accident increases.
• Do not switch the Climatronic system off for longer than necessary.
• Switch the Climatronic system on as soon as the windows mist up.
WARNING (continued)
A
1
AUTO
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
104
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
The air conditioning system 105
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Defrosting windscreen
Defrosting windscreen - switching on
– Press the button ⇒ page 102, fig. 113.
Defrosting windscreen - switching off
– Once again press the button or the button .
The temperature control is controlled automatically. More air flows out of the air
outlet vents 1.
Air outlet vents
Fig. 114 Air vents at the front
Fig. 115 Air vents at the rear
Open air outlet vents
– Turn the rotary knob to position
.
Close air outlet vents
– Turn the rotary knob to position 0.
Redirecting air flow
– The horizontal as well as the vertical direction of the air flow is set with
the handle in the middle of the air outlet vents.
You can control the air distribution to the air outlet vents via the buttons of the
operating part of the Climatronic ⇒ page 102. Air outlet vents 2, 3 ⇒ fig. 114 and 5
⇒ fig. 115 can also be opened or closed individually.
Note
The air outlet vents 1 ensure in the ventilation and cooling mode for a comfortable
(no-draught) ventilation of the interior of the vehicle, also if the air outlet vents 3
are closed.
AUTO
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
105
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
The air conditioning system106
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation)*
Description and important information
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) heats or
supplies the interior of the vehicle with fresh air independent of the
engine.
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating)
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating) functions in connection with the Climatic or
Climatronic.
It can be used when stationary, when engine is switched off for preheating of the
vehicle as well as while driving (e.g. during the heating phase of the engine).
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating) warms up the coolant during the combus-
tion of fuel from the vehicle tank. The coolant warms up the air, which (if the blower
speed is not set to zero) flows into the occupant compartment.
10)
Auxiliary ventilation
The auxiliary ventilation enables fresh air to flow into the vehicle interior by
switching off the engine, whereby the interior temperature is effectively decreased
(e.g. with the vehicle parked in the sun).
WARNING
• The auxiliary heating must never be operated in closed rooms - risk of
poisoning!
• The auxiliary heating must not be running during refueling - risk of fire.
• The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating is located on the underside of
the vehicle. Therefore do not place the vehicle, if you wish to operate the
auxiliary heating, in such a way that the exhaust gases of the auxiliary
heating can come easily into contact with inflammable materials (e.g. dry
grass) or easily inflammable substances (e.g. fuel run out).
Note
• If the auxiliary heating runs, the fuel consumption comes from the vehicle tank.
Therefore the auxiliary heating should not be operated, if there is very little fuel in
the tank.
• The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating, which is located on the underside of
the vehicle, must not be clogged and the exhaust flow must not be blocked.
• If the auxiliary heating and ventilation is running, the vehicle battery discharges.
If the auxiliary heating and ventilation has been operated several times over a
longer period, the vehicle must be driven a few kilometers in order to recharge the
vehicle battery.
• The auxiliary heating only switches the blower on, if it has achieved a coolant
temperature of approx. 50 °C.
• At low outside temperatures, this can result in a formation of water vapour in
the area of the engine compartment. This is quite normal and is not an operating
problem.
• After switching off the auxiliary heating, the coolant pump runs for a short
period.
• The auxiliary heating and ventilation does not switch on or comes on, if the
vehicle battery indicates a low loading state.
• The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating) switches off, if in the information
display: Please refuel! is indicated or was indicated before switching off the igni-
tion.
• When driving, the auxiliary heating can only be switched on, if the exterior
temperature is lower than 5 °C.
• The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of ice, snow or leaves in
order to ensure that the auxiliary heating operates properly.
• So that warm air can flow into the vehicle interior after switching on the auxil-
iary heating, you must maintain the temperature normally selected by you (we
recommend 22°C). It is recommended to put the air flow in the position .
• On vehicles with DPF (diesel particle filter) the warm coolant heats up the
engine.
10)
However the coolant does not warm up the engine.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
106
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
The air conditioning system 107
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Using the system
So that the auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) func-
tions according to your expectations, it is necessary to carry out the
basic setting before its programming.
Basic setting
– In the information display, select from the menu Main menu the
Menu Setup (settings).
– In the menu Settings select the menu Aux. heating.
– In the menu Aux. heating ⇒ fig. 116 select the menu Weekday and
set the current day.
– Return to a higher level by selecting the menu Back, i. e. in the menu
Aux. Heating.
– In the menu Aux. Heating select the menu Running time and set the
desired operating period in steps of 1 minute. The operating period
can be 5 to 60 minutes.
– Return to a higher level by selecting the menu Back in the menu
Aux. heating.
– In the menu Aux. heating select the menu Mode.
– In the menu Mode select the desired mode Heating or Ventilation.
Programming
For the programming of the auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) in
the menu Aux. heating there are three pre-set times:
• Pre-set time 1
• Pre-set time 2
• Pre-set time 3
In each pre-set time, the day (if necessary each day = daily) and the time (hour and
minute) can be set for the operating period of the auxiliary heating and/or ventila-
tion.
If you leave the pre-set menu by selecting menu Back or do not operate the display
for longer than 10 seconds, the set values are stored, but the pre-set time is not
active.
Both other pre-set times can be programmed and stored in the same way.
If you select the menu Activate after setting the desired values, Pre-set time
(weekday, hours, minute) activated! is displayed in the display and the set pre-
set time is active.
Only one programmed pre-set time can be active.
The last programmed pre-set time remains active.
The active pre-set time can be changed in the menu Aux. heating in the menu
Activation by selecting a pre-set time.
The prerequisite for the correct switching on of the auxiliary heating (auxiliary
heating and ventilation) according to the programmed pre-set time is the correct
setting of the current time and the weekday ⇒ page 107.
If the system is running, a warning light in the button for direct switching on/off of
the auxiliary heating lights up.
The running system deactivates after expiration of the operating period or is deac-
tivated earlier by pressing the button for direct switching on/off of the auxiliary
heating ⇒ page 109.
Fig. 116 Information
display: Aux. Heating (auxil-
iary heating)
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
107
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
The air conditioning system108
The deactivation of a desired pre-set time can be performed by selecting the menu
Deactive in the menu Active .
It is possible to re-establish the factory setting using the menu Factory setting in
the menu Aux. heating.
Radio remote control
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) can be
switched on or off with the remote control.
– For switching on, press the button .
– For switching off, press the button .
The transmitter and the battery are housed in the housing of the remote control.
The receiver is located in the interior of the car.
If the battery is properly charged, the effective range is up to 600 m. For switching
on or off the auxiliary heating, hold the remote control vertically with the antenna
⇒ fig. 117 towards the top. You must not cover over the antenna with the
fingers or the palm of the hand. Obstacles between the remote control and the
vehicle, bad weather conditions and a weaker battery can clearly reduce the range.
The auxiliary heating can only be switched on or off with the remote control, if the
distance between the remote control and the vehicle is at least 2 m.
Warning light in the remote control
The warning light in the remote control ⇒ fig. 117 indicates after a keystroke if the
remote control signal was received by the auxiliary heating and if the battery is
adequately charged.
Caution
There are electronic components in the remote control, protect the remote control
against water, severe shocks and direct sun rays.
Changing the battery of the radio remote control
If the warning light of the remote control indicates a weak or discharged
battery, ⇒ fig. 117, it must be replaced. The battery is located under a
cover on the back of the remote control.
Fig. 117 Auxiliary heating:
Radio remote control
ON
OFF
A
A
Display warning light Importance
Lights up green for 2 seconds. The auxiliary heating was switched on.
Lights up red for 2 seconds. The auxiliary heating was switched off.
Slowly flashes green for 2 seconds. The ignition signal was not received.
Quickly flashes green for 2 seconds.
The auxiliary heating is blocked, e. g
because the tank is nearly empty or
there is a fault in the auxiliary heating.
Flashes red for 2 seconds. The switch off signal was not received.
Lights up orange for 2 seconds, then
green or red.
The battery is weak, however the
switching on or off signal was received.
Lights up orange for 2 seconds, then
flashes green or red.
The battery is weak, however the
switching on or off signal was not
received.
Flashes orange for 5 seconds. The battery is discharged, however the
switching on or off signal was not
received.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
108
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
The air conditioning system 109
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– Place a coin into the gap of the battry cover and by turning to the left,
unlock the cover.
– Change the battery, insert the cover and lock it by turning to the right.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of an old battery in accordance with environmental regulations.
Note
• Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the battery.
• The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original
battery.
Direct switching on/off
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) can be switched on or off at
any time directly using the button on the operating part of the Climatic
⇒ fig. 118 or on the operating part of the Climatronic.
The auxiliary heating system (auxiliary heating and ventilation) switches off auto-
matically after expiration of the set operating period in the menu Running time, if
it is not switched off beforehand by you.
Fig. 118 Button for direct
switching on/off of the auxil-
iary heating (auxiliary
heating and ventilation) on
the operating part of the
Climatic
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
109
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Starting-off and Driving110
Starting-off and Driving
Setting steering wheel position
You can set the height and the forward/back position of the steering
wheel to the desired position.
– Adjust the driver seat ⇒ page 71.
– Pull the lever below the steering column ⇒ fig. 119 down ⇒ .
– Set the steering wheel to the desired position (concerning height and
forward/back position).
– Push the lever upwards as far as the stop.
WARNING
• You must not adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving!
• The driver must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the steering
wheel ⇒ fig. 120. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the
airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard!
• For safety reasons the lever must always be firmly pushed up to avoid the
steering wheel altering its position unintentionally when driving - risk of
accident!
• If you adjust the steering wheel further towards the head, you will reduce
the protection offered by the driver airbag in the event of an accident. Check
that the steering wheel is aligned to the chest.
• When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the
outer edge in the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock position. Never hold the steering
wheel firmly in the 12 o'clock position or in another way (e.g. in the middle
of the steering wheel or at the inner steering wheel edge). In such cases,
injuries to the arms, the hands and the head can occur when the driver
airbag is deployed.
Fig. 119 Adjustable steering
wheel: Lever next to the
steering column
Fig. 120 Safe distance to
steering wheel
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
110
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Starting-off and Driving 111
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Ignition lock
Petrol engines
- ignition switched off, engine off, the steering can be locked
- ignition switched on
- start engine
Diesel engines
- interruption of fuel supply, ignition switched off, engine off, the steering can
be locked.
- heating glow plugs on, ignition switched on
• You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating
period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.
- start engine
Applies to all models:
Position
To lock the steering, with the ignition key withdrawn, turn the steering wheel until
the steering locking pin is heard to engage. You should always lock the steering as
a general rule if you leave your vehicle. This acts as a deterrent against possible theft
of your vehicle ⇒ .
Position
Move the steering wheel back and forward a little if the ignition key cannot, or
cannot easily be turned into this position, in order to release the steering lock.
Position
The engine is started in this position. At the same time switched on low beam or
main beam or other electrical components with major power consumption are
briefly switched off. The ignition key moves back into position when one
releases the key.
The ignition key must be turned back into position each time before starting the
engine again. The starter repeat lock in the ignition lock prevents the starter being
engaged when the engine is running and thus getting damaged.
Ignition key withdrawal lock (automatic gearbox)
You can only withdraw the ignition key after switching off the ignition if the selector
lever is in position P.
WARNING
• When driving, the ignition key must always be in the position (igni-
tion switched on) without the engine running. This position is indicated by
the warning lights coming on. If this is not the case, it could result in unex-
pected locking of the steering wheel - risk of accident!
• Only remove the ignition key from the ignition lock when the vehicle has
come to a standstill (put on the handbrake or select the selector lever posi-
tion P). The steering lock can engage immediately - risk of accident!
• Always withdraw the ignition key if you are going to leave the vehicle,
even for a short time. This is particularly important if children are left in the
vehicle. The children might otherwise start the engine or switch on electrical
equipment (e.g. power windows) - risk of accident or injury!
Fig. 121 Ignition lock posi-
tions
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
2
A
1
A
2
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
111
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Starting-off and Driving112
Starting the engine
General
You can only start the engine only using an original ignition key.
• Place the gearshift lever into neutral (or place the selector lever to the position
P or N in the case of an automatic gearbox) and put on the handbrake firmly before
starting the engine.
• The clutch pedal should be fully depressed when starting the engine which
means that the starter only has to crank the engine.
• Let go of the key as soon as the engine starts otherwise there may be damage
to the starter.
The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after
starting the cold engine until oil pressure can be built up in the hydraulic valve
clearance compensation. This is quite normal and is not an operating problem.
If the engine does not start ...
You can use the battery of another vehicle as a jump-start aid ⇒ page 236.
It is only possible to tow-start vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox. The tow-
starting distance must not be more than 50 metres.
WARNING
• Never run the engine in non ventilated or enclosed areas. The exhaust
gases of the engine contain besides the odorless and colourless carbon
monoxide a poisonous gas - hazard! Carbon monoxide can cause uncon-
sciousness and death.
• Never leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running.
Caution
• The starter may only be operated (ignition key position ), if the engine is not
running. If the starter is immediately operated after switching off the engine, the
starter or the engine can be damaged.
• Avoid high engine revolutions, full throttle and high engine loads as long as the
engine has not yet reached its normal operating temperature - risk of damaging the
engine!
• Vehicles which are fitted with an exhaust gas catalytic converter should not be
tow-started over a distance of more than 50 metres.
For the sake of the environment
Never warm up the engine when the vehicle is standing. Drive off right away.
Through this the engine reaches its operating temperature more rapidly and the
pollutant emissions are lower.
Petrol engines
These engines are fitted with a starter system which selects the correct fuel/air
mixture for every external air temperature.
• Do not operate accelerator before and when starting engine.
• Interrupt the attempt at starting after 10 seconds if the engine does not start
right awayand wait for about 30 seconds before repeating the attempt.
• It is possible that the fuse on the electrical fuel pump is defect if the engine still
does not start. Check the fuse and replace it if necessary ⇒ page 241.
• Contact the nearest specialist garage to obtain professional assistance.
It may be necessary, if the engine is very hot, to slightly depress the accelerator
after the engine has started.
Diesel engines
Glow plug system
Diesel engines are equipped with a glow plug system, the preglow period being
controlled automatically in line with the coolant temperature and outside temper-
ature.
The preglow indicator light comes on after the ignition has been switched on.
A
3
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
112
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Starting-off and Driving 113
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating
period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.
• You should start the engine immediately after the glow plug warning light
has gone out.
• The glow plug warning light will come on for about one second if the engine is
at a normal operating temperature or if the outside temperature is above +5°C. This
means that you can start the engine right away.
• Interrupt the attempt at starting after 10 seconds if the engine does not start
right awayand wait for about 30 seconds before repeating the attempt.
• It is possible that the fuse on the diesel preglow system is defect if the engine
still does not start. Check the fuse and replace it if necessary ⇒ page 241.
• Contact the nearest specialist garage to obtain professional assistance.
Starting the engine after the fuel tank has run dry
It may take longer than normal to start the engine after refuelling if the fuel tank has
run completely dry - up to one minute. This is because the fuel system must first of
all be filled while the attempting to start the engine.
Switching off the engine
– The engine can be switched off by turning the ignition key from posi-
tion into ⇒ page 111, fig. 121.
WARNING
• Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary - risk of acci-
dent!
• The brake booster only operates when the engine is running. Greater
physical effort for braking is required when engine is switched off. Because
if you do not stop as normal, this can cause an accident and severe injuries.
Caution
you should not switch the engine off right away at the end of your journey after the
engine has been operated for a lengthy period at high loads but should be allowed
it to run at idling speed for about 2 minutes. This prevents any accumulation of heat
when the engine is switched off.
Note
• The radiator fan may continue running for a further 10 minutes or so after the
engine and the ignition have been switched off. The coolant fan may, however, also
switch on again after some time if the coolant temperature rises because of an
accumulation of heat in the engine or if the engine is warm and the engine
compartment is additionally heated by strong sunlight.
• This is why particular care is required when carrying out any work in the engine
compartment ⇒ page 209, “Working in the engine compartment”.
Shifting (manual gearbox)
Shift into reverse only when the car is stationary. Depress the clutch pedal and hold
it fully depressed. Wait a moment before engaging reverse gear in order to avoid
any shift noises.
The reversing lights will come on once reverse gear is engaged, provided the igni-
tion is on.
A
1
Fig. 122 The shift pattern: 5-
speed or 6-speed manual
gearbox
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
113
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Starting-off and Driving114
WARNING
Never engage the reverse gear when driving - risk of accident!
Note
• One should not lay the hand on the shift lever while driving the vehicle. The
pressure of the hand will be transferred to the gearshift forks in the gearbox. This
can, over a period of time, lead to early wear of the gearshift forks.
• Depress the clutch pedal fully when changing gears, in order to avoid unneces-
sary wear and damage to the clutch and gearbox parts.
Handbrake
Applying the handbrake
– Pull the handbrake lever up fully.
Releasing the handbrake
– Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time press in the
locking button ⇒ fig. 123.
– Hold the button pressed and push the handbrake lever down fully
⇒ .
The handbrake warning light lights up when the handbrake is applied, provided
the ignition is on.
A warning signal sounds and the following text appears in the display* if you have
inadvertently driven off with the handbrake applied:
Release parking brake!
The handbrake warning is activated if you drive at a speed of more than 6 km/h for
more than 3 seconds.
WARNING
• Please note that the handbrake must be fully released. A handbrake
which is only partially released can result in the rear brakes overheating
which will have a negative effect on the operation of the brake system - risk
of accident! In addition this can result in premature wear of the rear brake
pads.
• Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. The children might, for
example, release the handbrake or take the vehicle out of gear. The vehicle
might then move off - risk of accident!
Caution
After the car has come to a stop, always first of all apply the handbrake firmly before
then additionally engaging a gear (manual gearbox) or moving the selector lever
into position P (automatic gearbox).
Fig. 123 Centre console:
Handbrake
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
114
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Starting-off and Driving 115
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Rear parking aid*
The parking aid provides a warning of obstacles behind the vehicle.
The audible parking aid determines the distance between the rear bumper and an
obstacle located behind the vehicle with the aid of ultrasound sensors. The tones
of the parking aid can be adapted in the menu of the information display*
⇒ page 23. The sensors are integrated in the rear bumper.
Range of sensors
The clearance warning begins at a distance of about 160 cm from the obstacle (area
⇒ fig. 124). The interval between the warning signals becomes shorter as the
clearance is reduced.
A continuous tone sounds from a clearance of just 30 cm (Bereich ) - danger
area. You should not reverse any further after this signal sounds! If the vehicle
is equipped with a factory-fitted towing device*, the border of the danger area
starts - continuous tone - 5 cm further behind the vehicle. The vehicle can be
extended through an installed detachable towing device.
On vehicles equipped with a factory-fitted radio* or navigation*, the distance to the
obstruction is shown graphically on the display. On vehicles with a factory-fitted
towing device, the sensors are deactivated when towing a trailer. The driver is also
informed of the radio* or the navigation* by a graphic display (vehicle towing a
trailer) on the display. The radio* or navigation*, which is factory-fitted, can be set
so that the play function volume decreases when activating the parking aid, see
Owner's Manual radio* or navigation*. This improves the audibility of the parking
aid.
Activating
The parking aid is activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged and the
ignition is turned on. This is confirmed by a brief acknowledgement signal.
Deactivating
The parking aid is deactivated by removing the reverse gear.
WARNING
• The parking aid is not a substitute for the driver paying proper attention
and it is always the driver's responsibility to take care when parking the
vehicle or carrying out similar manoeuvres.
• You should therefore satisfy yourself, before reversing, that there is no
small obstacle, such as a rock, thin post, trailer drawbar etc., behind your
vehicle. Such an obstacle might not be within the range detected by the
sensors.
• Under certain circumstances, surfaces of certain objects and types of
clothing cannot reflect the signal of the parking aid. Thus, these objects or
people who wear such clothing are not recognised by the sensors of the
parking aid.
Note
• The parking aid does not operate if you are towing a trailer (applies to models
which feature a factory-fitted towing device*).
• If a warning signal sounds for about 3 seconds after switching the ignition on
and engaging reverse gear, and there is no obstacle close to your car, this indicates
a system fault. Have the fault rectified by a specialist workshop.
• The sensors must be kept clean and free of ice to enable the parking aid to
operate properly.
• If the parking aid is activated and the selector lever of the automatic gearbox is
in the position , warning signal indicates interruption (vehicle can no longer
move).
Fig. 124 Parking aid: Detec-
tion range of rear sensors
A
A
A
B
A
P
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
115
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Starting-off and Driving116
Front and rear parking aid*
The parking aid provides a warning of obstacles in front and behind
the vehicle.
The audible parking aid determines the distance between the front or rear bumper
and an obstacle with the aid of ultrasound sensors. The sensors are integrated in the
front and rear bumper. The signal tones for the front parking aid sound higher as
standard than for the rear parking aid. The tones of the parking aid can be adapted
in the menu of the information display* ⇒ page 23.
Range of sensors
The distance warning begins at a distance of about 120 cm from the obstacle in
front of the vehicle (area ⇒ fig. 126) and about 160 cm from the obstacle
behind the vehicle (area ⇒ page 115, fig. 124). The interval between the
warning signals becomes shorter as the clearance is reduced.
A continuous tone sounds from a clearance of just 30 cm (Bereich ) - danger
area. You should not reverse any further after this signal sounds! If the vehicle
is equipped with a factory-fitted towing device*, the border of the danger area
starts - continuous tone - 5cm further behind the vehicle. The vehicle can be
extended through an installed detachable towing device.
On vehicles equipped with a factory-fitted radio* or navigation*, the distance to the
obstruction is shown graphically on the display. On vehicles with a factory-fitted
towing device, the rear sensors are deactivated when towing a trailer. The driver is
also informed of the radio* or the navigation* by a graphic display (vehicle towing
a trailer) on the display. The radio* or navigation*, which is factory-fitted, can be set
so that the play function volume decreases when activating the parking aid, see
Owner's Manual radio* or navigation*. This improves the audibility of the parking
aid.
Activating
The parking aid is activated when the reverse gear is engaged and the ignition is
turned on or by pressing the button ⇒ fig. 125 - the symbol lights up in the
button. The activation is confirmed by a brief acknowledgement signal.
Deactivating
The parking aid is deactivated after pressing the button ⇒ fig. 125 or at a speed
of more than 10 km/h - the symbol in the button is no longer illuminated.
WARNING
• The parking aid is not a substitute for the driver paying proper attention
and it is always the driver's responsibility to take care when reversing the
vehicle or carrying out similar manoeuvres.
• You should therefore satisfy yourself, before reversing, that there is no
small obstacle, such as a rock, thin post, trailer drawbar etc., in front or
behind your vehicle. Such an obstacle might not be within the range
detected by the sensors.
• Under certain circumstances, surfaces of certain objects and types of
clothing cannot reflect the signal of the parking aid. Thus, these objects or
Fig. 125 Activating the
parking aid
Fig. 126 Parking aid: Detec-
tion range of the front
sensors
A
A
A
A
A
B
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
116
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Starting-off and Driving 117
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
people who wear such clothing are not recognised by the sensors of the
parking aid.
Note
• Only the front parking aid operates if you are towing a trailer (applies only to
models which feature a factory-fitted towing device*).
• If a warning signal sounds for about 3 seconds after activating the system and
there is no obstacle close to your car, this indicates a system fault. The fault is
confirmed additionally when the symbol flashes in the button ⇒ page 116,
fig. 125. Have the fault rectified by a specialist workshop.
• The sensors must be kept clean and free of ice to enable the parking aid to
operate properly.
• If the parking aid is activated and the selector lever of the automatic gearbox is
in the position , warning signal indicates interruption (vehicle can no longer
move).
Park Assist*
Description and important information
The park assist assists you when parking in a suitable parallel parking place
between two vehicles or behind a vehicle.
The park assist automatically searches for suitable parking spaces after switching
on the ignition and when driving up to 30 km/h.
During the parking procedure the park assist only takes over the steering move-
ments, the pedals continue to be operated by the driver.
Function of the system is based on:
• Length and depth measurement of the parking spaces when driving
• Evaluation of the size of the parking space
• Definition of the correct position of the vehicle for parking
• Calculating the line on which the vehicle drives backwards into the parking
place
• Actuation of the steering force assistance, automatic spinning of the wheels of
the front axle when parking.
WARNING
The park assist does not take away the responsability from the driver when
parking.
• Pay particular attention to small children and animals as they would not
be recognised by the sensors of the parking aid.
• Under certain circumstances, surfaces of certain objects and types of
clothing cannot reflect the signal of the park assist or the parking aid. Thus,
these objects or people who wear such clothing are not recognised by the
sensors of the parking aid.
• The external sound source of the park assist and the parking aid can be
disruptively influenced and under unfavourable conditions, objects or
people cannot be recognised by the sensors of the parking aid.
Caution
• If other vehicles are parked behind or on the kurb, the park assist guides your
vehicle beyond the kurb or onto it. Make sure that the wheels or the wheel rims of
your vehicle are not damaged and if necessary intervene in time.
• You should satisfy yourself before parking that there is no small obstacle, such
as a rock, thin post, trailer drawbar etc., in front or behind your vehicle. Such an
obstacle might not be within the range detected by the sensors.
• Under certain circumstances, surfaces or structures of certain objects such as
wire mesh fences, powder snow etc..., cannot be recognised by the system.
• The evaluation of the parking place and the parking procedure depends on the
circumference of the wheels. The system does not function correctly if your vehicle
is mounted with wheels of non-permissible size, snow chains or a temporary spare
wheel (in order to reach the nearest workshop). If the tyres other than those
excepted by the manufacturer are mounted, the resulting position of the vehicle in
WARNING (continued)
A
P
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
117
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Starting-off and Driving118
the parking place can differ slightly. This can be avoided through new calibration of
the system in a specialist garage.
• The accuracy of the evaluation for the parking place can be influenced by the
incorrectly determined outside temperature if the later is influenced by the thermal
radiation of the engine i.e for stop and go in a traffic jam.
• In order to avoid damaging the sensors while cleaning with high-pressure
cleaners or steam jets, the sensors must only be directly sprayed for short periods
while a minimum distance of 10 cm must be observed.
Note
• A component of the park assist is the front and rear parking aid*.
• The electronic stability programme (ESP) must always be switched on for the
parking procedure.
• Only the front parking aid operates if you are towing a trailer (applies only to
models which feature a factory-fitted towing device*). This is why it is not possible
to park backwards with the help of the park assist when towing a trailer.
• The sensors must be kept clean and free of ice to enable the parking aid to
operate properly.
Switch on display of the park assist in the information display*
Switch on display of the park assist in the information display*
– Press the button ⇒ fig. 127.
– Drive past the parking row up to maximum 30 km/h and with a
distance of 0.5 m to 1.5 m ⇒ fig. 128.
Operate the turn signal for the driver's side if you wish to park on this side of the
road. In the information display* the search area for the parking place is indicated
on the driver's side.
If the button is pressed above a speed of 30 km/h, the display appears in the display
of the instrument cluster as soon as you drive slower than 30 km/h.
Note
• If the park assist is switched on, a yellow warning light lights up in the button.
• The search for suitable parking places is automatic after switching on the igni-
tion at speeds of more than 30 km/h. Searching for a parking place is performed at
the same time on the driver and front passenger side.
• If the sensors find a suitable parking place, they store its parameters until
another suitable parking place has been found or until a distance of 10 m had been
driven after finding the parking place. This is why it is possible to switch on the park
assist after driving past the driving place; on the information display* appears the
information if this parking space is suitable for parking.
Fig. 127 Switch on display of
the park assist in the infor-
mation display
Fig. 128 Information
display: Finding a suitable
parking place
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
118
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Starting-off and Driving 119
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Parking with the help of the park assist and concluding the
parking procedure
The time limit for the parking procedure with the help of the park assist
lasts 180 seconds.
– If the park assist has recognized a suitable parking place, the parking
place is shown in the information display* ⇒ fig. 129.
– Drive on further until the display ⇒ fig. 130 appears.
– Bring the vehicle to a stop for at least 1 second.
– Engage the reverse gear or set the selector lever* in the position R.
– As soon as the following message is indicated in the information
display*: Steering intervention! Check area around veh.! let go of
the steering wheel, the steering will be taken over by the system.
– Observe the surroundings and drive backwards with a speed of
maximum 7 km/h, at the same time operate the pedal.
– End the parking procedure from a distance on the basis of the infor-
mation of the system.
As soon as the parking procedure is completed, an audible signal sounds and in the
information display* the following message appears: Steering intervention
finished! Please take over steering! .
If your vehicle is not properly parked, the position of the wheels is corrected by the
system after disengaging the reverse gear when your vehicle is stationary, so that
you can align the vehicle yourself during a forward movement after taking over the
steering.
Switch off park assist
The park assist switches off during one of the following occurences:
• A speed of 30 km/h exceeded
• A speed of 7 km/h exceeded during the parking procedure
• A time limit of 180 seconds exceeded for engaging the reverse gear after
switching on the park assist
• A time limit of 180 seconds exceeded for the parking procedure
• The button pressed for the park assist
• Parking aid activated
• Switch off ESP
• Intervention of the driver in the automatic steering procedure (stop the steering
wheel)
• Disengage reverse gear or take out selector lever* out of the position R during
the parking procedure.
Further warning and information texts of the park assist in the information
display*:
Fig. 129 Information
display: Parking place recog-
nized with the information to
drive on
Fig. 130 Information
display: Parking place recog-
nized with the information to
engage the reverse gear
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
119
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Starting-off and Driving120
Park Assist cancelled!
The parking procedure has ended or after switching on the ignition, the vehicle has
not been driven above 10 km/h.
Park Assist: Speed too high!
Reduce the speed below 30 km/h.
Driver steering intervention! Please take over steering!
The parking procedure is ended through driver intervention.
Park Assist cancelled! ESP switched off!
The parking procedure cannot be carried out because the ESP system is switched
off.
ESP switched off! Please take over steering!
The parking procedure was ended because the ESP system was switched off during
the parking procedure.
Park Assist cancelled! Trailer
The parking procedure is not possible because the trailer is hitched and a plug is
inserted in the socket of the towing device.
Park Assist cancelled! Time limit exceeded
The parking procedure was not started because a time limit of 180 seconds for
engaging the reverse gear was exceeded.
Time limit exceeded! Please take over steering!
The parking procedure was ended because a time limit of 180 seconds for parking
was exceeded.
Park Assist cancelled! System error
The parking procedure is not possible because a fault exists on the vehicle. Have the
fault rectified by a specialist workshop.
Park Assist defective! Service now!
The parking procedure is not possible because a fault exists on the park assist. Have
the fault rectified by a specialist workshop.
Steering intervention! Check area around veh.!
The park assist is active and takes over the steering movements. Observe the
surroundings and carefully drive backwards, at the same time operate the pedal.
Please take over steering! Finish parking manually
Take over the steering. End the parking procedure without using the park assist.
Speed too high! Please take over steering!
The parking procedure was ended while the speed was exceeded.
Park Assist: ESP Intervention!
Intervention of the ESP system while searching for a suitable parking place.
ESP intervention! Please take over steering!
Parking procedure is ended through the intervention of the ESP system.
Cruise control system (CCS)*
Introduction
The cruise control system (CCS) maintains a constant speed, more than 30 km/h (20
mph), once it has been set, without you having to depress the accelerator pedal.
This is only possible within the range which is permitted by the power output and
braking power of the engine. The cruise control system makes it possible - particu-
larly on long journeys - for you to rest your “accelerator foot”.
WARNING
• The cruise control system must not, for safety reasons, be used in dense
traffic or on unfavourable road surfaces (such as icy roads, slippery roads or
loose chippings) - risk of accident!
• In order to prevent unintentional use of the cruise control system, always
switch off the system after use.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
120
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Starting-off and Driving 121
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Note
• Models fitted with a manual gearbox: Always depress the clutch pedal if you
switch on the cruise control system when the gearbox is in Neutral. Otherwise the
engine can rev up unintentionally.
• The cruise control system is not able to maintain a constant speed when driving
on steep downhill sections. The weight of the vehicle increases the speed at which
it travels. One should shift down in good time to a lower gear or slow the vehicle
down by applying the foot brake.
• It is not possible on vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox to switch on the
cruise control system if the selector lever is in the position P, N or R.
Storing a speed
The cruise control system is operated by means of the switch and
rocker button in the left lever of the multi-functional switch.
– Press the switch ⇒ fig. 131 into the position ON.
– After the desired speed has been reached, press the rocker button
into the SET position.
After you have released the rocker button out of the position SET, the speed you
have just stored is maintained at a constant speed without having to depress the
accelerator.
You can increase the speed by depressing the accelerator. Releasing the acceler-
ator will cause the speed to drop again to the set speed.
This does not apply, however, if you drive at a speed which is more than 10 km/h
higher than the set speed for a period of longer than 5 minutes. The stored speed
will be cancelled in the memory. You then have to re-store the desired speed.
One can reduce the speed in the usual manner. The system is switched off tempo-
rarily by actuating the brake or clutch pedal ⇒ page 122.
WARNING
First ensure that it is not too high for the traffic conditions which exist at that
moment before resuming the stored speed.
Changing a stored speed
You can also change the speed of the vehicle without depressing the
accelerator.
Faster
–You can increase the stored speed without depressing the acceler-
ator, by pressing the rocker button ⇒ fig. 131 into the RES posi-
tion.
– The speed of the car will increase continuously if you hold the rocker
button pressed in the RES position. Once the car has reached the
desired speed, release the rocker button. The set speed is then stored
in the memory.
Slower
–You can decrease the stored speed by pressing the rocker button
in the SET position.
Fig. 131 Operating lever:
Rocker button and switch of
cruise control system
A
A
A
B
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
121
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Starting-off and Driving122
– Holding down the rocker button pressed in the SET position will cause
the speed of the vehicle to reduce continuously. Once the car has
reached the desired speed, release the rocker button. The set speed is
then stored in the memory.
– If you release the rocker button when the car is travelling at a speed of
less than 30 km/h, the speed is not stored, the memory is erased. It is
then necessary to again store the speed with the rocker button in
the position SET after an increase in speed of the vehicle to more than
30 km/hour.
Switching off the cruise control system temporarily
– You can switch off the cruise control system temporarily by
depressing the brake pedal or clutch pedal, on models with auto-
matic gearbox and only with brake pedal.
– You can switch off temporarily the cruise control system, if you press
the switch in the middle position.
The set speed remains stored in the memory.
The Resumption of the stored speed is achieved by releasing the brake or clutch
pedal, on vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox only after releasing the brake pedal
and after shortly pressing the rocker button ⇒ page 121, fig. 131 into the posi-
tion RES.
WARNING
First ensure that it is not too high for the traffic conditions which exist at that
moment before resuming the stored speed.
Switching off the cruise control system completely
– Press the switch ⇒ page 121, fig. 131 to the right into position
OFF.
A
B
A
A
A
B
A
A
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
122
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Automatic gearbox DSG* 123
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Automatic gearbox DSG*
Automatic gearbox DSG*
Introduction
Your car is equipped with an automatic gearbox DSG. The abbreviation DSG means
Direct shift gearbox (Direct shift gearbox).
Two independent clutches are needed for the power transmission between the
engine and the gearbox. These replace the torque converter of the conventional
automatic gearbox. Their shifting is matched in such a way that there are no jerks
when shifting the gear and the power transmission of the engine to the front wheels
is not interrupted.
Information for driving with the automatic gearbox DSG
Shifting up and down through the gears is performed automatically.
You can also, however, switch the gearbox over into the Tiptronic mode.
This mode makes it possible for you to also shift gears manually
⇒ page 126.
Starting-off and Driving
– Depress the brake pedal and hold it depressed.
– Press the Shiftlock button (button in handle of the selector lever),
move the selector lever into the desired position, e.g. D ⇒ page 124,
and then release the Shiftlock button.
– Release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator ⇒ .
Stopping for a short time
– The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stop-
ping just for a short time, such as at a cross roads. It is sufficient to hold
the vehicle stationary using the foot brake. The engine can, however,
be allowed just to idle.
Parking
– Depress the brake pedal and hold it depressed.
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
– Press and Shiftlock button in the selector lever, move the selector
lever to P and then release the Shiftlock button.
The engine can only be started when the selector lever is in position P or N
⇒ page 112. At temperatures below -10 °C the engine can only be started in the
selector lever position P.
It is sufficient to engage selector lever position P when parking on a flat surface.
When parking on a slope you should first apply the handbrake firmly and then
move the selector lever into position P. This is to ensure that there is no excessive
pressure acting on the lock mechanism and that it is easier to subsequently move
the selector lever out of position P.
If the selector lever position N is selected by accident while driving it is first neces-
sary to release pressure on the accelerator pedal and wait for idling speed of the
engine to be reached before engaging a drive position in the selector lever.
WARNING
• Do not depress the accelerator when changing the position of the
selector lever if the car is stationary and the engine is running - risk of acci-
dent!
• Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving - risk of
an accident!
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
123
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Automatic gearbox DSG*124
• If you are stopping at a hill (downhill section), never try to hold the car
stationary with the gear engaged by means of the “accelerator”, this means
by letting the clutch slip. This can lead to overheating of the clutch. If there is
a risk of overheating of the clutch due to overload, the clutch is opened auto-
matically and the vehicle rolls backward - risk of accident!
• If you must stop at a slope, depress and hold the brake pedal, so that you
can prevent the vehicle from rolling back.
Caution
• The double clutch on the automatic gearbox DSG is equipped with an overload
protection. If you make use of the uphill function on a vehicle which is stationary or
driving slowly uphill, it will result in an increase of thermal stress of the clutches.
• An overheating of the clutches can be detected by the flashing of the selector
level indicator and the “jerk” of the clutches, finally the clutches are opened. The
power transmission from the engine to the front wheels is interrupted and as a
result of this the vehicle can no longer be driven. If the clutch opens automatically,
depress the brake pedal, wait a few seconds and only then continue driving.
Selector lever positions
The current selector lever position is indicated in the information display of the
instrument cluster ⇒ fig. 133.
P - Parklock
The driven wheels are locked mechanically in this position.
The Parklock must only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary ⇒ .
If you wish to move the selector lever into or out of this position, you must press the
Shiftlock button in the handle of the selector lever and at the same time depress the
brake pedal.
If the battery is used, the selector lever cannot be moved out of the position P.
R - Reverse
Reverse gear must only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary and the engine
idling ⇒ .
The brake pedal must be depressed and at the same time the Shiftlock must be
pressed, if you wish to obtain the selector lever positions R, P or N.
When the ignition is switched on and the selector lever is in position R, the reverse
lights will come on.
N - Neutral
The transmission is in Neutral in this position.
The brake pedal must be depressed (if the lever is in its position for longer than 2
seconds) in order to move the selector lever out of the position N into the position
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 132 Selector lever
Fig. 133 Information
display: Selector lever posi-
tions
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
124
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Automatic gearbox DSG* 125
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
D, with the ignition switched on, on a vehicle travelling at less than 5 km/hour or on
a stationary vehicle.
The brake pedal must be depressed (if the lever is in its position for longer than 2
seconds) in order to move the selector lever out of the position N into the position
R, with the ignition switched on, on a vehicle travelling at less than 5 km/hour or on
a stationary vehicle.
D - Drive, position for driving forward
When the selector lever is in this position, the forward gears are shifted up and
down automatically in line with engine load, vehicle speed and the dynamic shift
programme.
You must depress the brake pedal if you wise to move into position D from N when
the vehicle is travelling at less than 5 km/hour or is stationary ⇒ .
In certain circumstances (e.g. when driving in mountainous regions or when towing
a trailer) it may be beneficial to select the manual shift programme for a short time
in order to adapt the gearbox ratios manually to the driving situations.
S - Position for sporty style of driving
Shifting up later into a higher gear makes it possible to fully exploit the power
potential of the engine. The gearbox also then shifts down at higher engine speeds
as in the position D.
The Shiftlock on the selector lever grip must be pressed when moving the selector
lever out of the position D into the position S.
WARNING
• Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving - risk of
an accident!
• When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary, it is necessary
to hold the car with the brake pedal in all the positions of the selector lever
(except P and N) since the power transmission is never completely inter-
rupted, also not when the engine is idling - the vehicle "creeps".
• You must on no account unintentionally operate the throttle (e.g. by
hand from the engine compartment) if a drive position is engaged when the
car is stationary. The vehicle would otherwise immediately start off - also
when the handbrake is firmly applied - risk of an accident!
• You must move the selector lever into position P and firmly apply the
handbrake first before you or any other person opens the bonnet and starts
working on the engine when it is running - risk of accident! Pay particular
attention to the warning instructions.
Selector lever lock
Automatic selector lever lock
With the ignition on, the selector lever is locked when it is in the positions P and N.
You must first of all depress the brake pedal in order to move the selector lever out
of this position. The warning light ⇒ page 26 lights up in the instrument cluster
as a reminder for the driver when the selector lever is in position P and N:
A time delay element ensures that the selector lever is not blocked when rapidly
switching over the position N (e.g. from R to D). This does, for example, allow one
to seesaw out a stuck vehicle. The selector lever lock will click into place if the lever
is in the N position for more than 2 seconds without the brake pedal being pressed.
The selector lever lock is only active if the vehicle is stationary or moving at speed
of less than 5 km/hour. The lock is switched off automatically into position N when
the car is travelling at a higher speed.
Shiftlock button
The Shiftlock button in the handle of selector lever prevents certain selector lever
positions being engaged inadvertently. The selector lever lock is cancelled when
you press the Shiftlock button.
Keylock - Ignition key withdrawal lock
You can only withdraw the ignition key after switching off the ignition if the selector
lever is in position P. If the ignition key is withdrawn, the selector lever is blocked in
position P.
WARNING (continued)
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
125
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Automatic gearbox DSG*126
Kickdown function
The kickdown function provides you with maximum acceleration
power.
Depressing the accelerator pedal allows the kickdown function to be activated in
the desired driving program. This function has precedence over the driving
programme and serves for maximum acceleration of the vehicle when exploiting
the maximum power potential of the engine without taking into account the
current selector lever position (D, S or Tiptronic). The gearbox shifts down to one
or several gears in line with the driving state and the vehicle accelerates. The
gearbox does not shift up into the highest gear until the engine has reached its
maximum revolutions for this gear range.
WARNING
Please note that using the kickdown function can result in the driven wheels
spinning on a smooth or slippery road surface - risk of skidding!
Dynamic shift programme
The automatic gearbox of your vehicle is controlled electronically. Shifting up and
down through the gears is performed automatically on the basis of pre-defined
driving programmes.
Adopting a moderate style of driving will cause the gearbox to select the most
economical driving programme. Shifting up into a higher gear as soon as possible
and shifting down as late as possible will have a favourable effect on your fuel
consumption.
Adopting a sporty style of driving with rapid movements of the accelerator pedal
combined with sharp acceleration and frequent changes in speed, exploiting the
top speed of the car or depressing the accelerator pedal (kickdown function), will
cause the gearbox to switch over to this style of driving and shift down earlier with
frequent changes in gears in comparison to the moderate style of driving.
Selecting the most appropriate driving programme for the particular style of driving
is a continuous process. Irrespective of this it is, however, possible to switch or shift
down into a dynamic shift programme by depressing the accelerator rapidly. The
gearbox shifts down into a lower gear matching the speed of the car and this allows
you to accelerate rapidly (e.g. when overtaking) without having to depress the
accelerator pedal fully into the kickdown range. The original programme will be
reactivated to match your particular style of driving once the gearbox has shifted up
again.
When driving in hilly regions, the gears are selected to match uphill and downhill
sections. This avoids the gearbox frequently shifting up and down when negotiating
an uphill stretch. When driving downhill, it is possible to shift down into the
Tiptronic position, in order to exploit the engine brake torque.
Tiptronic
The Tiptronic allows the driver to also shift gears manually.
Fig. 134 Selector lever:
Manual shifting of gears
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
126
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Automatic gearbox DSG* 127
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The selector lever position you have engaged is indicated in the informa-
tion display of the instrument cluster together with the engaged gear
⇒ fig. 135.
Switching over to manual shifting
– Push the selector lever to the right out of position D. After switching
over, the current engaged gear is indicated in the display.
Shifting up gears
– One-touch forward of the selector lever (in the Tiptronic position)
⇒ page 126, fig. 134 .
Shifting down gears
– One-touch back of the selector lever (in the Tiptronic position) .
It is possible to switch over to manual both when the car is stationary and also when
driving.
When you accelerate, the gearbox shifts up automatically into the higher gear just
before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached.
If you select a lower gear, the automatic gearbox does not shift down until there is
no risk of the engine overrevving.
If you operate the kickdown function, the gearbox shifts into a lower gear in line
with the vehicle speed and engine speed.
Manual shifting on the multifunction steering wheel*
Switching over to manual shifting
– Push the selector lever to the right out of position D. After switching
over, the current engaged gear is indicated in the display.
Shifting up gears
– Press the right rocker switch ⇒ fig. 136 for the multifunction
steering wheel.
Shifting down gears
– Press the left rocker switch ⇒ fig. 136 for the multifunction
steering wheel.
Temporarily switching over to manual shifting
– If the selector lever is in position D or S, press the left rocker switch
or the right rocker switch for the multifunction steering wheel.
Fig. 135 Information
display: Manual shifting of
gears
A
+
A
-
Fig. 136 Multifunction
steering wheel: Manual
shifting of gears
+
+
-
+
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
127
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Automatic gearbox DSG*128
– If the rocker switches or are not pressed for some time, the
manual shifting switches off. You can also switch off the temporary
switch over to manual shifting by pressing the right rocker switch
for more than 1 second.
Emergency programme
An emergency programme exists in the event of a fault in the system.
The gearbox operates in a corresponding emergency programme if there are func-
tional faults in the gearbox electronics. This is indicated by all of the segments in the
display lighting up or going out.
A functional fault can have the following effect:
• The gearbox only shifts into certain gears.
• The reverse gear R cannot be used.
• The manual shift programme (Tiptronic) is switched off in the emergency mode.
If the gearbox has switched over to emergency mode, drive to the nearest
specialist garage in order to have the fault rectified.
Selector lever-emergency unlocking (DSG)
In case of interruption of the power supply (e.g. flat vehicle battery, defec-
tive fuse) or defect of the selector lever lock, the selector lever can no
longer be shifted from the position P in the normal way and the vehicle
can no longer be moved. The selector lever must be unlocked in case of
emergency.
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
– Carefully pull up the front left and right cover.
– Pull up rear cover.
– Press with a narrow object (e.g. ignition key) the yellow plastic hoop
⇒ fig. 137 to the left.
– Simultaneously press the shiftlock button in the handle of the selector
lever in the position N
11)
.
Tow-starting and towing vehicle
Tow-starting a vehicle
It is not possible to tow-start vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox ⇒ page 237.
You can use jump-start cables connected to the battery of another vehicle for
starting your car if the vehicle battery is flat ⇒ page 236.
Towing a vehicle
Please pay attention to the following information if it comes necessary to tow-in
your car ⇒ page 237.
- +
+
Fig. 137 Selector lever-
emergency unlocking
11)
If the selector lever is moved again into the position P, it is once again blocked.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
128
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Automatic gearbox DSG* 129
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
129
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Communication130
Communication
Multifunction steering wheel*
Operate radio und navigation on the multifunction steering wheel
The driver can set the basic functions of the radio and navigation by simply oper-
ating the buttons located on the steering wheel so that he can concentrate on the
traffic situation without being distracted as little as possible by operating the radio
and navigation ⇒ fig. 138.
This applies only if your vehicle has been installed with radio and navigation at the
factory. You can of course operate the radio and navigation at the appliance. You
will find a description in the operating instructions of your radio system.
When the headlights are switched on, the steering wheel pushbuttons are then also
illuminated.
The buttons apply for the respective operating mode of the current radio or naviga-
tion.
By pressing the buttons, you can carry out the following functions:
Fig. 138 Multifunction
steering wheel: control
buttons
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
130
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Communication 131
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Button Action Radio, traffic information CD The CD changer / MP3 Navigation
press briefly Switch off/on tone
press button for long time switch off/on*
turn upwards
Increase volume
turn downwards
Decrease volume
press briefly
Changing to the next stored radio station
Changing to the next stored traffic information
Interrupting the traffic report
Changing to the next title
press button for long time
Interruption of the traffic report Fast forward
press briefly
Changing to the previously stored radio station
Changing to the previously stored traffic information
Interrupting the traffic report
Changing to the previous title
press button for long time
Interruption of the traffic report Fast rewind
Changing between the audio sources
press briefly
Calling up the main menu
press button for long time
press briefly
Interruption of the traffic report Without function
press button for long time
turn upwards
Display of the station list
scroll upwards
Interruption of the traffic reports
Changing to the previous title
Without function
turn downwards
Display of the station list
scroll downwards
Interruption of the traffic report
Changing to the next title
A
1
A
1
A
1
A
1
A
2
A
2
A
3
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
5
A
6
A
6
A
6
A
6
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
131
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Communication132
Universal telephone preinstallation GSM II*
Inserting the mobile phone and adapter
Only one telephone mount is factory-fitted. An adapter for the mobile
phone can be purchased from Škoda original accessories.
Inserting the mobile phone and adapter
– First of all push the adapter in the direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 139 up
to the stop into the mount. Press the adapter slightly downwards, until
it locks securely into position.
– Insert the mobile phone into the adapter (as specified in manufac-
turer's instructions).
Removing the mobile phone and adapter
– Press simultaneouly the side locks of the mount and remove the
mobile phone and adapter ⇒ fig. 139.
This enables you to make full use of the advantages of a normal carphone (“hands-
free system - Hands Free” using a microphone integrated in the vehicle, optimal
transmission of signals using an external aerial, operating via two buttons on the
adapter etc.).
The communication between the telephone and the handsfree system of your
vehicle is established via Bluetooth
®
, the telephone mount serves only for charging
the telephone.
Bluetooth
®
The Bluetooth
®
technology serves as cableless connection of a
mobile phone and multimedia unit, which are equipped with this
technology, to the hands-free system of your vehicle.
In order to connect a mobile phone or multimedia unit with Bluetooth
®
to the hands-free system, it is necessary to adapt the phone or multi-
media unit and the hands-free system to each other. Detailed informa-
tion on this is provided in the operating instructions of your mobile
phone or multimedia unit. The following steps must be carried out for the
connection:
– Switch on the ignition.
– Select the menu on the mobile phone or multimedia unit by finding
further setups which can be connected via Bluetooth
®
.
– If the hands-free system on the display of the mobile phone or multi-
media unit announces SKODA_BT, enter the PIN 1234 within 30
seconds and wait, until the connection is established.
12)
– If you want to connect a multimedia unit of which the PIN cannot be
changed (differing from 1234), do not hesitate to contact your Škoda
Service Partner.
The connection of the mobile phone or multimedia unit and the hands-free system
is only possible 5 minutes after switching on the ignition and up to a speed of 6
km/h. When exceeding these conditions, the connection can be repeated by
continuous pressing of the button PTT (button push to talk) and the button SOS
Fig. 139 Universal prepara-
tion for the mobile phone
A
A
A
A
12)
Some mobile phones have a menu, in which the authorization for establishing a Bluetooth
®
connection is performed via the input of a code. If the input for the authorization is neces-
sary, it must always be performed when re-establishing the Bluetooth connection.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
132
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Communication 133
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
on the adapter with an interval of 2 seconds or pressing the button twice on the
multifunction steering wheel* with an interval of 2 seconds.
While connecting the mobile phone with the hands-free system by means of Blue-
tooth
®
, no other phone can be connected with the hands-free system via Blue-
tooth
®
.
Up to seven mobile phones and four multimedia units can be connected by the
hands-free system via Bluetooth
®
whereby only one mobile phone or multimedia
unit can communicate simultaniously via Bluetooth
®
with the hands-free system.
If an eighth mobile phone is connected to the handsfree-system, then the tele-
phone, which has not been used together with the handsfree system for the longest
period, is disconnected by means of Bluetooth
®
.
Establish Bluetooth
®
connection
After switching on the ignition, the Bluetooth connection is automatically estab-
lished for the already adapted mobile phone
12)
. Check on the mobile unit if the
automatic connection was established.
Disconnect Bluetooth
®
connection
After withdrawing the ignition key, the Bluetooth
®
connection is disonnected.
WARNING
• Pay attention primarily to the traffic situation! As the driver you are fully
responsible for road safety. Use the telephone system only to such an extent,
so that you are in full control of your vehicle at any time - risk of accident!
• In the event of air transport, the Bluetooth
®
function of the handsfree-
system must be switched off by a specialist garage!
Caution
Taking the mobile phone out of the adapter during the call can lead to interruption
of the connection. When taking out the mobile phone, the connection to the
factory-fitted antenna is interrupted, this reduces the quality of the transmitting
and receiving signal. This might result additionally in harmful radiation from the
mobile phone in the interior of the vehicle and the charging of the telephone
battery is interrupted.
Note
• Not valid for all mobile phones which enable a communication via Bluetooth
®
.
• Please operate your mobile phone exclusively with a suitable adapter, in order
to keep a low radiation in the vehicle.
• Inserting the mobile phone into the adapter ensures an optimal sending and
receiving power and offers at the same time the advantage of the battery charging.
• Note that the range of the Bluetooth
®
connection to the handsfree-system is
limited to the vehicle interior. The range is dependent on local factors, e.g. obstacles
between the devices and interferences with other devices. If your mobile phone is
e.g. in a jacket pocket, this can lead to difficulties when establishing the Bluetooth
®
connection with the handsfree-system or the data transfer.
Erase the list of connected units
Erase previously connected mobile or multimedia units
– Switch on the ignition. A connection to a mobile or multimedia unit
must not be established.
– Press the button SOS on the adapter or the button
on the multi-
function steering wheel* for more than 10 seconds.
– Erasing is confirmed with an audible signal.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
133
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Communication134
Operating telephone calls with the aid of the telephone mount
The contol unit reacts to pressing the button PTT and SOS ⇒ fig. 140 as follows:
• PTT - press briefly: see table,
• PTT - press for long time: no reaction,
• SOS - press briefly: no reaction,
• SOS - press for long time: terminates all operations and starts to dial the emer-
gency number (112).
Pressing for a long time means longer than 2 seconds.
Overview of the reactions of the handsfree-system while briefly pressing the
button PTT
B3T-0220H
Fig. 140 Button for switching
on the voice control
Initial condition Reaction
Telephone connected, idle state Voice control of the mobile phone is activated
Telephone connected, voice control active Voice control is deactivated
Incoming call Call is accepted
Active call Call is terminated
Connection is established The process for connecting is terminated
Call on hold Call on hold is activated
Call on hold + active call Active call is terminated and call on hold is activated
Active call and second incoming call Active call is held, incoming call is accepted
Call on hold + process for connecting Process for connecting is terminated, call on hold is kept on hold
Call on hold + incoming call Call on hold is kept on hold, incoming call is accepted
Active call + call on hold + incoming call Active call is terminated, call on hold is activated, incoming call remains an incoming call
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
134
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Communication 135
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Operate telephone call on the multifunction steering wheel
The contol unit reacts to pressing the button PTT ⇒ fig. 141 as follows:
• press briefly: see table,
• press button for long time: reject incoming call; in the other modes, changing
between private modus (call via telephone) and the hands-free modus.
Pressing for a long time means longer than 2 seconds.
Fig. 141 Multifunction
steering wheel: control
buttons
Initial condition Reaction
Telephone connected, idle state.
Voice control of the mobile phone is activated
a)
a)
The voice control is only activated if your mobile phone is equipped with this function.
Telephone connected, voice control active Voice control is deactivated
Incoming call Call is accepted
Active call Call is terminated
Connection is established The process for connecting is terminated
Call on hold Call on hold is activated
Call on hold + active call Active call is terminated and call on hold is activated
Active call and second incoming call Active call is held, incoming call is accepted
Call on hold + process for connecting Process for connecting is terminated, call on hold is kept on hold
Call on hold + incoming call Call on hold is kept on hold, incoming call is accepted
Active call + call on hold + incoming call Active call is terminated, call on hold is activated, incoming call remains an incoming call
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
135
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Communication136
Universal telephone preinstallation GSM III*
Introduction
This enables you to make full use of the advantages of a normal carphone (“hands-
free system” using a microphone integrated in the vehicle, optimal transmission of
signals using an external aerial etc.). The equipment includes also the voice control.
The telephone is connected using the rSAP profile - Remote SIM access profile
(telecommunication of the SIM data) by means of Bluetooth
®
technology, if your
telephone supports this profile. The equipment includes the following functions:
• Display of the SMS text in the information display.
• Free talking in the vehicle interior.
• MUTE signal to the radio.
• Voice control (with the set-up possibility for “short and long dialogue”,
depending on the user's knowledge of the operating structure).
• Convenience mode with the multifunction steering wheel and the display in the
information display.
• Handsfree-system.
The voice control of the telephone is activated by pressing the button PTT on the
multifunction steering wheel ⇒ page 139, fig. 142.
A phone phonebook is part of the universal telephone preinstallation GSM III with
voice control. In the phone phonebook there are 1 000 free memory locations
available. This phone phonebook is independent of the appliance used for the
mobile phone.
Furthermore the volume can be changed individually at any time with the button
for setting the radio or on vehicles fitted with multifunction steering wheel* with
function buttons on the steering wheel.
Dialogue
The period, in which the telephone system is ready to receive voice commands and
carry out the voice commands, is called DIALOGUE. The system gives audible feed-
back and guides you if necessary through the relevant functions. You can start or
end the dialogue at any time by pressing the PTT button.
The dialogue is always automatically ended after carrying out an operation, e.g.
after erasing the name from the phonebook.
The dialogue of the incoming call is immediately interrupted and you can accept
the call by pressing the button .
If a voice command is not detected, the system answers with “Sorry?” and a new
entry can be performed. After the 2nd error the system repeats the aid. After the 3rd
error the answer “Cancel” is given and the dialogue is ended.
Optimum understanding of the voice commands depends on the following
factors:
• Speak with a normal tone of voice without intonation and excessive voice
pauses.
• Avoid insufficient articulation.
• Close the doors, windows and sliding roof, in order to reduce or stop disturbing
exterior noise.
• It is recommended to speak louder at higher speeds, so that the tone of your
voice is louder than the increased surrounding noise.
• During the dialogue avoid additional noise in the vehicle, e.g. simultaneously
talking occupants.
• Do not speak, if the system makes an announcement.
• The microphone for voice control is inserted in the moulded headliner and
directed to the driver and front passenger. Therefore the driver and the front
passenger can operate the equipment.
WARNING
Pay attention primarily to the traffic situation! As the driver you are fully
responsible for road safety. Use the telephone system only to such an extent,
so that you are in full control of your vehicle at any time.
Note
• Please contact your Škoda Service Partner if there are any points which are not
clear.
• Please also refer to the additional instructions ⇒ page 145.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
136
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Communication 137
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Bluetooth
®
The equipment enables the wireless connection to the control unit of a
telephone with Bluetooth
®
function which supports the rSAP profile.
Process of connection
– Switch on the ignition.
– If you have not switched on Bluetooth
®
on your telephone, switch it
on.
– For certain mobile phones it is necessary to switch on first the rSAP
function.
– Press the button
on the multifunction steering wheel and select
device search. The system searches mobile devices and shows these
in the information display*.
– Select your telephone in the information display by turning the hand-
wheel and select it by pressing the handwheel.
– Within 30 seconds enter in your telephone the 30 digit PIN of your
control unit, which is indicated in your information display* and
confirm it according to the instructions on the display of your tele-
phone.
– If your SIM card is blocked by a PIN code, enter the PIN of the SIM card
of your telephone. The telephone connects to the control unit (during
the first connection you can only select in the information display*
and when the vehicle is stationary, if the PIN should be stored).
– For the first storage of a new user follow the instructions in the infor-
mation display.
– To download the telephone book and the indentification data of the
SIM card into the new control unit, confirm again the command rSAP
in your mobile phone. The system reads the telephone book.
If you do not want to confirm the command rSAP during each connection of the
telephone to the control unit, then you must carry out in the menu of the mobile
phone an authorization using the control unit.
The telephone deregisters from the GSM network and only the control unit ensures
the communication with the network. In the telephone only the interface for Blue-
tooth
®
remains active. In this case, you can only select to separate from the device,
switch off the Bluetooth
®
connection or the number of the emergency call 112.
If the PIN was stored, an automatic selection and connection of the telephone take
place the next time the ignition is switched. Check on your mobile phone if the
automatic connection was established.
Connection terminated
The connection of the handsfree-system is terminated by means of Bluetooth
®
:
• When removing the key from the ignition lock (during a telephone call, the
connection is disconnected).
• By switching off the Bluetooth
®
in the mobile phone.
• By selecting “separate telephone” in the menu of the mobile phone.
On vehicles which are fitted out with radio or navigation at the factory, it is possible
to terminate the telephone call after removing the key from the ignition lock by
pressing the icon on the touch-screen of the radio
13)
or the navigation, see oper-
ating instructions for radio or for navigation.
WARNING
• Pay attention primarily to the traffic situation! As the driver you are fully
responsible for road safety. Use the telephone system only to such an extent,
so that you are in full control of your vehicle at any time - risk of accident!
• In the event of air transport, the Bluetooth
®
function of the handsfree-
system must be switched off by a specialist garage!
13)
Does not apply for Radio Swing.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
137
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Communication138
Note
In the memory of the control unit, up to three users can be stored, whereby the
handsfree-system can only communicate actively with one user. In the case of
mutual connection with a fourth mobile phone, you must erase one user.
• If the telephone book of the mobile phone contains more than 1 000 entries,
the system announces a failure while loading the telephone book.
• When connecting to the control unit, follow the instructions on your mobile
phone.
• Note that the range of the Bluetooth
®
connection to the handsfree-system is
optimized in the vehicle interior. The range is dependent on local factors, e.g.
obstacles between the devices and interferences with other devices.
Operation of the telephone on the multifunction steering wheel*
The driver can set the basic functions of the telephone by simply operating the
buttons located on the steering wheel so that he can concentrate on the traffic situ-
ation without being distracted as little as possible by operating the telephone
⇒ fig. 142.
This applies only if your vehicle has been equiped with the telephone preinstalla-
tion at the factory.
If the side lights are switched on, the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel
are illuminated.
Overview of the different functions in contrast to the multifunction steering wheel
without mobile phone operation ⇒ page 130.
Fig. 142 Multifunction
steering wheel: Control
buttons for the telephone
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
138
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Communication 139
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The buttons operate the functions for the operating mode of the current
telephone.
Button Action Operation
press briefly
Activation and deactivation of the voice control
(Button PTT - Push to talk)
press button for long time
turn upwards
Increase volume
turn downwards
Decrease volume
press briefly
Accept call, terminate call, entry in the main menu of the telephone, list of selected numbers
press button for long
time
Reject call, list of the last calls, entry in the main menu of the telephone, list of selected numbers
press briefly
Reach one level higher in the menu (according to the current position in the menu)
press button for long
time
Return in the main menu of the information display
press briefly
Confirm menu selection
press button for long time
turn upwards
The last chosen menu selection, name
turn downwards
The next menu selection, name
quickly turn upwards
To the previous initial letter in the telephone book
quickly turn downwards
To the next initial letter in the telephone book
A
1
A
1
A
1
A
1
A
2
A
2
A
3
A
3
A
4
A
4
A
4
A
4
A
4
A
4
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
139
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Communication140
Operate telephone in the information display*
If you select the menu point Te le p ho ne in the information display with the aid of
the handwheel , you can select the following menu points:
Phone book
Dial number
Call register
Voice mailbox
Messages
Bluetooth
Settings
Back
Phone book
In the menu point Phone book is the list of the loaded contacts from the telephone
memory and the SIM card of the mobile phone. In the phone phonebook there are
1 000 free memory locations available.
Dial number
In the menu point Dial number, you can write any telephone number. Select in
sequence the desired digits with the aid of the handwheel and confirm it by
pressing the handwheel. You can select the numbers 0 - 9, the symbols *, # and the
functions Delete, Call, Cancel.
Call register
In the menu point Call register, you can select the following menu points:
Missed calls
Received calls
Last calls
Delete lists
Voice mailbox
In the menu point Voice mailbox there is a list of messages from the missed calls.
Messages
In the menu point Messages there is a list of received text messages.
Bluetooth
In the menu Bluetooth you can select the following menu points:
User - the overview of the stored users
New user - Search for users who are in the reception range
Visibility - Switching on the visibility of the telephone unit for other devices
Extras
Headset
Modem
Phone name - the possibility to change the name of the telephone unit (pre-
set SKODA-rSAP)
Settings
In the menu Settings you can select the following menu points:
Phone book
Update
Select memory
SIM & phone (SIM & Mobile phone)
SIM card
Mobile phone
Fig. 143 Information
display: Menu telephone
A
4
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
140
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Communication 141
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
List
Surname
First name
Own no. send - the possibility to suppress one's own number on the unit called
Signal settings
Ring tone
Volume
Phone settings
Select operator
Automatic
Manual
Off time
+ 5 Minutes
- 5 Minutes
GPRS - Setting of the access point of the user
Switch off ph. - switching off the telephone unit (telephone remains
connected)
Back
Return in the main menu of the information display.
Voice commands
Voice commands for operating the telephone control unit
Other possible commands
Select number
–Press the button PTT ⇒ page 139, fig. 142.
– Give the command DIAL NUMBER after the signal tone.
After giving this command, the system requests the entry of a telephone number.
The telephone number can be entered as an interconnected spoken row of digits
Voice command Activity
HELP
After this command the system repeats all possible
commands.
LONG DIALOGUE Help is not reduced (suitable for beginners).
SHORT DIALOGUE
Help is clearly reduced (good operating knowledge
provided).
CALL NAME
After this command a name can be entered which
establishes a connection to the requested partner
⇒ page 144.
DIAL NUMBER
After this command a telephone number can be
entered which establishes a connection to the
requested partner ⇒ page 142.
REDIAL
After this command the system selects the last
selected number ⇒ page 143.
Voice command Activity
CALLS (SELECT) The telephone number is selected.
REPEAT
The entered name or the digits are repeated. Then
the system requests with voice response “please
proceed” the entry of further digits or commands.
BACK
The entered name or the last entered order of digits is
erased. Previously entered groups of digits are
repeated. Then the system requests with voice
response “and proceed?” the entry of further digits
or commands.
DELETE All entered digits are erased.
CANCEL The dialogue is ended.
Voice command Activity
A
1
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
141
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Communication142
(complete number), in the form of order of digits (separation through a brief voice
pause) or through individually spoken digits. After each order of digits (separation
through brief voice pause) the detected digits are repeated.
The digits zero to nine are permitted. The system detects no continuous digit
combinations such as twenty-three, but only individually spoken digits (two, three).
You can enter the selected number in random digital blocks or as a whole number
at once. We recommend to enter the selected number in digital blocks to each
three digits.
If you enter more than 20 digits, the system announces: “The number is too long”.
For an international call you can enter the symbol instead of the two zeros at the
beginning of the selected number Plus (+).
Example when entering a telephone number
You can interrupt the dialogue at any time by pressing the PTT button or with the
voice command CANCEL.
Repeat last call
– Press the button PTT ⇒ page 139, fig. 142.
– Give the command REDIAL after the signal tone.
After giving this command, the last number selected via voice input is selected
again.
Example of redial
You can interrupt the dialogue at any time by pressing the PTT button or with the
voice command CANCEL.
Phone voice phonebook*
Store name
– Press the button .
– In the menu telephone, select the menu point Phone book and in this
menu point, select a contact of which you want to record a voice
recording and confirm with the handwheel .
– Select the menu point Record and afterwards Recording.
– The system gives the command “Store name, name please”.
– Pronounce the name, e. g “Name XYZ”, the system repeats the name.
– The system gives the notice “Name stored”.
In the case that the system does not understand the spoken name, it gives the
notice “Pardon?”, “Please repeat the name”, “The name is too short” or “The
name is too long”.
Voice command Announcement
DIAL NUMBER “The number please”
e.g. SIX ZERO THREE “Six zero three”
“And proceed?”
e.g. ONE TWO THREE FOUR “One, two, three, four”
“And proceed?”
z. B. FIVE SIX “Five, six”
CALLS (SELECT) “The number is being dialed”
If no entry is put in, the following announcement is made after about 5 seconds.
“Possible commands are: dial,
repeat, back, or delete”
Voice command Announcement
REDIAL “The number is being dialed”
A
1
A
4
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
142
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Communication 143
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
In the phone voice phonebook up to 15 entries can be stored.
For similar names additional information (e.g. first names) should be stored.
Voice commands for operating the phone voice phone book
Example for storing the recording in the phone voice phonebook
You can interrupt the dialogue at any time by pressing the PTT button or with the
voice command CANCEL.
Select name
– Press the button PTT ⇒ page 139, fig. 142.
– Give the command CALL NAME after the signal tone.
After giving this command, the system requests the entry of the name to be called.
Example for the selection of a name
In the case that the list is empty, the message “The name list is empty.” sounds.
If the system does not recognize the name called, it asks you to repeat using the
command “Pardon?”. If the system has not recognized the name to be called after
repeating, the message sounds “The name does not exist. You receive the curren
name list with LISTEN TO ALL THE NAMES.”.
You can interrupt the dialogue at any time by pressing the PTT button or with the
voice command CANCEL.
Listening-in to the voice phonebook
– Press the PTT button.
– Give the command LISTEN TO ALL THE NAMES after the signal tone.
After giving this command, all voice recordings are replayed from the list of the
control unit. By pressing the PTT button when announcing the desired name, the
corresponding telephone number is being dialed; the system answers: “Call set-
up”.
Example for the selection of a name
In the case that the list is empty, the system announces “The name list is empty.”.
You can interrupt the dialogue at any time by pressing the PTT button or with the
voice command CANCEL.
Voice command Activity
LISTEN TO ALL THE
NAMES
After this command the control unit repeats all stored
names.
DELETE NAME
After this command, you can enter a name which you
would like to erase from the internal phone voice
phonebook.
DELETE ALL NAMES
After this command, you can erase the complete list
of the stored names.
Voice command Announcement
STORE NAME “The name please”
Name XYZ “Please repeat the name”
Name XYZ “The name XYZ is stored”
A
1
Voice command Announcement
CALL NAME “Call name”
Name XYZ “Do you want to call XYZ?”
CALLS (SELECT) “The name is being dialed”
Voice command Announcement
LISTEN TO ALL THE NAMES “Interrupt using the voice button”
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
143
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Communication144
After replaying the complete list, the system announces “End of name list”.
Erase entries out of the phone voice phonebook
– Press the PTT button.
– Give the command ERASE NAME after the signal tone.
After giving this command, there is the possibility to erase a stored entry in the
phone voice phonebook.
Example for erasing an entry out of the phone voice phonebook
You can interrupt the dialogue at any time by pressing the PTT button or with the
voice command CANCEL.
If the user answers with NO, the system answers with “Cancel” and the dialogue is
ended.
Erase the complete phone voice phonebook
– Press the PTT button.
– Give the command DELETE PHONEBOOK after the signal tone.
After giving this command, there is the possibility to erase the complete phone
voice phonebook.
Example for erasing the complete phone voice phonebook
You can interrupt the dialogue at any time by pressing the PTT button or with the
voice command CANCEL.
If the user answers with NO, the system answers with “Cancel” and the dialogue is
ended.
Mobile phones and two-way radio systems
The installation of a mobile phone and two-way radio system in a vehicle should
only be carried out by a Škoda Dealer.
Škoda Auto a.s. permits the operation of mobile phones and two-way radio
systems with a professionally installed external aerial and a maximum transmission
power of up to 10 watts.
Our specialist garage is also happy to inform you about the possibilities available
for installing and operating mobile telephones and radio transmitters which have
an output greater than 10 watts. The Škoda Service Partners can provide you with
details about the technical possibilities for retrofitting of mobile telephones and
radio transmitters.
Operation of mobile phones or two-way radio systems may interfere with func-
tioning of the electronic systems of your vehicle. The reasons for this may be:
• no external aerial
• external aerial incorrectly installed
• transmission power greater than 10 watts.
You should also be aware of the fact that only an external aerial makes it possible
to achieve the optimal range of such equipment.
Voice command Announcement
DELETE NAME “The name please”
Name XYZ “Do you want to erase XYZ?”
YES “The name is deleted”
Voice command Announcement
DELETE ALL NAMES
“Do you want to delete all the
names?”
YES “Are you sure?”
YES “All the names are deleted”
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
144
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Communication 145
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
• If a mobile phone or two-way radio system is operated inside the vehicle
without using an external aerial, or with an external aerial which has been
incorrectly installed, the result can be excessive electromagnetic fields
which may cause harm to your health.
• Please concentrate fully at all times on your driving!
• You must not install two-way radio systems, mobile phones or mounts
on the covers of the airbags or within the immediate deployment range of
airbags. This might result in injuries to the occupants in the event of an acci-
dent.
Note
Please also refer to the operating instructions of the mobile phones and two-way
radio systems.
Input AUX-IN
The input for external audio sources AUX-IN is located below the armrest of the
front seat and is marked with  This input serves for connecting external audio
sources (e.g. portable mp3 player) to the your radio system. The equipment AUX-
IN can only be used in combination with a radio or navigation system installed in
the factory. The description on how to operate AUX-IN can be found in the relevant
operating instructions of the radio or the navigation system.
Note
• If an external audio source is connected via AUX-IN, which has a separate
power supply, this can lead to an interference of the audio signals. It depends on
the properties of the adapter.
• The loudspeakers in the vehicle are matched to a power output of 30 W.
CD changer*
The CD changer for the radio and navigation system is located in the right
side compartment of the luggage compartment.
Loading a CD
– Touch the button and guide the CD (compact disc) into the CD-
case . The CD is automatically loaded onto the next free position in
the CD-changer. The LED in the corresponding button stops
flashing.
Loading all CDs
– Hold the button pressed and guide all CDs one after the other into
the CD-case . The LEDs in the buttons are no longer flashing.
Loading a CD to one definite position
– Touch button . The LEDs in the buttons light up at the memory
spaces, which are already assigned and flash in the case of free
memory spaces.
– Touch the desired button and guide the CD into the CD-case .
Fig. 144 The CD changer
A
C
A
B
A
D
A
C
A
B
A
D
A
C
A
D
A
D
A
B
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
145
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Communication146
Ejecting a CD
– Touch the button , in order to eject a CD. For assigned memory
spaces, now the LEDs light up in the buttons .
– Touch the corresponding button . The CD is ejected.
Ejecting all CDs
– Hold the button pressed for more than 2 seconds, in order to eject
the CDs. All CDs in the CD-changer are ejected consecutively.
Note
• Always guide the CD into the CD-case with the printed side pointing
upwards.
• Never push the CD with force into the CD-case as the insertion is performed
automatically.
• After loading a CD into the CD-changer, you must wait until the LED of the
corresponding button lights up. Then the CD-case is free to load the next
CD.
• If you have selected a position, on which a CD is already located, this CD will be
ejected. Take out the ejected CD and load the desired CD.
A
A
A
D
A
D
A
A
A
B
A
D
A
B
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
146
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Passive Safety 149
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Safety
Passive Safety
Basic information
Driving the safe way
Passive safety measures reduce the risk of injury in accident situa-
tions.
In this section you will find important information, tips and notes on the subject of
passive safety in your vehicle. We have combined everything here which you
should be familiar with, for example, regarding seat belts, airbags, child seats and
safety of children. It is therefore important, in particular, to comply with the notes
and warnings in this section for your own interest and in the interest of those trav-
elling with you.
WARNING
• This chapter contains important information on how to use the vehicle
for the driver and his occupants. You will find further information on safety,
which concerns you and those travelling with you, in the following chapters
of this Owner's Manual.
• The complete on-board literature should always be in the vehicle. This
applies in particular, if you rent out or sell the vehicle.
Safety equipment
The safety equipment is part of the occupant protection and it can
reduce the risk of injuries in accident situations.
“Do not put at risk” your safety and the safety of those travelling with you . In the
event of an accident, the safety equipment can reduce the risk of injuries. The
following list contains part of the safety equipment in your vehicle:
• Three-point seat belts for all the seats,
• belt force limiter for front and outer rear seats*,
• belt tensioner for front and outer rear seats*,
• seat belt height adjuster for front seats,
• front airbag for the driver and front passenger,
• Driver's knee airbag*,
• front side airbags,
• rear side airbags*,
• head airbags*,
• anchoring points for child seat using the “ISOFIX” system,
• anchoring points for child seat using the “Top Tether” system,
• head restraint adjustable for height,
• adjustable steering column.
The specified safety equipment works together, in order to optimally protect you
and those travelling with you in accident situations. The safety equipment does not
protect you or the people travelling with you, if you or your occupants adopt an
incorrect seated position or the equipment is not correctly adjusted or used.
For this reason you will be provided with information on why this equipment is very
important, how it protects you and the occupants, what should be observed when
using the equipment and how you and the people travelling with you can make full
use of the existing safety equipment. This Owner's Manual contains important
warning notes, which you and those travelling with you should pay attention to in
order to reduce a risk of injury.
Safety concerns everybody!
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
149
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Passive Safety150
Before setting off
The driver is always fully responsible for his occupants and for the
operating safety of the vehicle.
For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you, please pay
attention to the following points before setting off.
• Ensure that the lighting and the turn signal system are functioning properly.
• Inspect the tyre inflation pressure.
• Ensure that all the windows offer a good visibility to the outside.
• Safely attach the items of luggage ⇒ page 78, “Loading the luggage compart-
ment”.
• Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedal.
• Adjust the mirror, the front seat and the head restraint to match your body size.
• Point out to your occupants that the head restraints must be adjusted to match
their body size.
• Protect the children in suitable child seats with correctly fastened seat belts
⇒ page 171, “Transporting children safely”.
• Adopt the correct seated position ⇒ page 150, “Correct seated position”. Also
inform your occupants to adopt the correct seated position.
• Fasten the seat belt correctly. Also inform your occupants to properly fasten the
seat belts ⇒ page 156, “How are seat belts correctly fastened?”.
What influences the driving safety?
The driving safety is primarily determined by the style of driving and
the personal behaviour of all the occupants.
The driver is fully responsible for himself and his occupants. If your driving safety is
effected, you place yourself and the oncoming traffic at risk. Please refer to the
following guidelines.
• Do not get distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation, e.g. by your
occupants or mobile phone calls.
• Never drive when your driving ability is impaired, e.g. through medication,
alcohol, drugs.
• Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit.
• Adjust the driving speed at all times to the road condition as well as to the traffic
and weather conditions.
• Take regular breaks on long journeys - at the latest every two hours.
Correct seated position
Correct seated position for the driver
Correct seated position for the driver is important for safe and
relaxed driving.
Fig. 145 The correct distance
of the driver from the
steering wheel
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
150
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Passive Safety 151
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we
recommend the following setting.
• Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance between the steering wheel and
your chest is at least 25 cm ⇒ page 150, fig. 145.
• Position the driver seat in the forward/back direction so that you are able to
press the pedals with your legs at a slight angle .
• Adjust the backrest so that you are able to reach the highest point of the steering
wheel with your arms at a slight angle.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same
level as the upper part of your head ⇒ fig. 146.
• Fasten the seat belt correctly ⇒ page 156, “How are seat belts correctly
fastened?”.
Manual driver seat adjustment ⇒ page 71, “Adjusting the front seats”.
Electrical driver seat adjustment ⇒ page 72, “Adjusting front seats electrically*”.
WARNING
• The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted to match
the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts must always be
correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal protection for you and your
occupants.
• The driver must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the steering
wheel ⇒ page 150, fig. 145. Not maintaining this minimum distance will
mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you -
hazard!
• When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the
outer edge in the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock position. Never hold the steering
wheel firmly in the 12 o'clock position or in another way (e.g. in the middle
of the steering wheel or at the inner steering wheel edge). In such cases,
injuries to the arms, the hands and the head can occur when the driver
airbag is deployed.
• The backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise
this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system -
risk of injury!
• Ensure that there are no objects in the footwell as any objects may get
behind the pedals during a driving or braking manoeuvre. You would then
no longer be able to operate the clutch, to brake or accelerate.
Correct seated position for the front passenger
The front passenger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from
the dash panel so that the airbag offers the greatest possible safety
when an airbag is deployed.
For the safety of the front passenger and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
an accident, we recommend the following setting.
• Adjust the front passenger seat as far as possible to the rear.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same
level as the upper part of your head ⇒ fig. 146.
• Fasten the seat belt correctly ⇒ page 156, “How are seat belts correctly
fastened?”.
In exceptional cases the front passenger airbag can be deactivated ⇒ page 168,
“Deactivating an airbag”.
Fig. 146 The correct head
restraint adjustment for the
driver
WARNING (continued)
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
151
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Passive Safety152
Manual front passenger adjustment ⇒ page 71, “Adjusting the front seats”.
Electrical front passenger seat adjustment ⇒ page 72, “Adjusting front seats electri-
cally*”.
WARNING
• The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted to match
the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts must always be
correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal protection for you and your
occupants.
• The front passenger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the
dash panel. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the
airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard!
• Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven - never
place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the window or on the
surfaces of the seats. You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it
becomes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident. If an
airbag is deployed, you may suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect
seated position!
• The backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise
this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system -
risk of injury!
Correct seated position for the occupants on the rear seats
Occupants on the rear seats must sit upright, keep the feet in the
footwell and must have their seat belts correctly fastened.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an acci-
dent, the occupants on the rear seats must observe the following.
• Adjust the head restraints so that the top edge of the head restraints are at the
same level as the upper part of your head ⇒ page 151, fig. 146.
• Fasten the seat belt correctly ⇒ page 156, “How are seat belts correctly
fastened?”.
• If you are transporting ⇒ page 171, “Transporting children safely” children in
the vehicle, please use a suitable child restraint system.
WARNING
• The head restraints must always be adjusted to match the body size, in
order to offer an optimal protection for you and your occupants.
• Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven - never
put your feet out of the window or on the surfaces of the seats. You will be
exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes necessary to apply the brake
or in the event of an accident. If an airbag is deployed, you may suffer fatal
injuries when adopting an incorrect seated position!
• If the occupants on the rear seats are not sitting upright, the risk of injury
is increased due to incorrect routing of the seat belt.
Examples of an incorrect seated position
An incorrect seated position can lead to severe injuries or death for
the occupants.
Seat belts offer their optimum protection only if the webbing of the seat belts is
properly routed. Incorrect seated positions considerably reduce the protective
functions of the seat belts and therefore increase the risk of injury due to an incor-
rect routing of the seat belt. The driver is fully responsible for himself and the occu-
pants, in particular for the children. Do not permit an occupant to adopt an incor-
rect seated position when the car is moving.
The following list contains the examples of seated positions which are dangerous
for the occupants. This list is not complete, however we would like you to get inter-
ested in this subject.
Therefore, while the car is moving never:
• stand up in the vehicle,
• stand up on the seats,
• kneel onto the seats,
• tilt the backrest fully to the back,
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
152
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Passive Safety 153
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• lean against the dash panel,
• lie on the rear seats,
• only sit on the front area of the seat,
• sit to the side,
• lean out of the window,
• put the feet out of the window,
• put the feet on the dash panel,
• put the feet on the seat upholstery,
• occupy the footwell,
• have the seat belt not fastened,
• occupy the luggage compartment.
WARNING
• If the occupant adopts an incorrect seated position, he is exposed to life-
threatening injuries, in case he is hit by a deployed airbag.
• Before setting off, please adopt the correct seated position and do not
change this seated position while the car is moving. Also advise your occu-
pants to adopt the correct seated position and not to change this seated
position while the car is moving.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
153
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seat belts154
Seat belts
Why seat belts?
It is a proven fact that seat belts offer good protection in accidents ⇒ fig. 147. Thus
wearing a seat belt is a legal requirement in most countries.
Seat belts which have been correctly fastened and adjusted hold the occupants of
the car in the correct seated position ⇒ fig. 147. The belts reduce the kinetic energy
(energy of motion) to a considerable extent. They also prevent uncontrolled move-
ments which, in turn, may well result in severe injuries.
The occupants of a vehicle who have fastened and correctly adjusted their seat belt,
profit to a major extent from the fact that the kinetic energy is optimally absorbed
by the belts. The structure of the front end of the vehicle and other passive safety
measures, such as the airbag system, also contribute to reducing the kinetic energy.
The energy produced is thus absorbed and there is less risk of injury.
Accident statistics prove that seat belts which are fastened and properly adjusted
reduce the risk of an injury and enhance the chance of survival in a major accident
⇒ page 155.
It is important that you pay attention to safety measures, particularly when trans-
porting children in the vehicle ⇒ page 171, “What you should know about trans-
porting children!”.
WARNING
• Fasten your seat belt each time before setting off, also when driving in
town! This also applies to the people seated at the rear - risk of injury!
• Expectant women must also always wear a seat belt. This is the only way
of ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child ⇒ page 156, “Fastening
three-point seat belts”.
• It is important for the belt webbing to be properly routed if the seat belts
are to offer the maximum protection. You can see a description of how safety
belts should be fitted properly on the next pages.
Note
Please comply with any differing legal requirements when using the seat belts.
Fig. 147 Driver wearing seat
belt
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
154
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seat belts 155
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The physical principle of a frontal collision
The physical principle of a frontal accident can be explained quite simply:
Motion energy, so-called kinetic energy, is produced as soon as the vehicle is
moving, both for the vehicle and its occupants. The magnitude of this kinetic energy
depends essentially on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and on the
weight of the vehicle and the occupants. The greater the speed and weight increase,
the greater the amount of energy which has to be absorbed in the event of an acci-
dent.
The speed of the vehicle is, nevertheless, the most important factor. Doubling the
speed of the vehicle from 25 km/h up to 50 km/hour increases the kinetic energy
four times.
The common opinion that it is possible to support your body in a minor accident
with your hands, is incorrect. Even in a collision at only a low speed, the forces
acting on the body are such that it is no longer possible to support your body.
Even if you only drive at a speed within the range from 30 km/hour to 50 km/hour,
the forces which are produced on your body in the event of an accident can easily
exceed 10.000 N (Newton). This equals a weight of one tonne (1 000 kg).
In the event of a frontal collision, occupants of the car not wearing a seat belt, are
thrown forward and strike in an uncontrolled way parts of the interior of the car,
such as steering wheel, dash panel, windscreen,⇒ fig. 148. The occupants of a
vehicle who have not fastened their seat belts may even be thrown out of the
vehicle. This can result in fatal injuries.
It is also important that rear seat occupants fasten their seat belts as they will other-
wise be thrown through the vehicle in an uncontrolled manner in the event of an
accident A rear seat passenger who has not fastened the seat belt is a danger not
only to himself but also for those seated at the front ⇒ fig. 149.
Important safety information regarding the use of
seat belts
The correct use of the seat belts considerably reduces the risk of
injury!
WARNING
• The belt webbing must not be jammed in-between at any point or
twisted, or chafe against any sharp edges.
• It is important that the belt webbing is properly routed if the seat belts
are to offer their maximum protection ⇒ page 156, “How are seat belts
correctly fastened?”.
Fig. 148 The driver is thrown
forward if not wearing a belt
Fig. 149 The rear seat occu-
pant is thrown forward if not
wearing a belt
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
155
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seat belts156
• No two persons (also not children) should ever use a single seat belt
together.
• The maximum protection which seat belts can offer is only achieved if
you are correctly seated ⇒ page 150, “Correct seated position”.
• The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects (e.g. spec-
tacles, ball-point pens, keys etc.) as this may be a cause of injuries.
• Bulky, loose clothing (e.g. a winter coat over a jacket) does not allow you
to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of the seat belts.
• It is prohibited to use clamps or other objects to adjust seat belts (e.g. for
shortening the belts for smaller persons).
• The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct
one for your seat. Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to
protect and the risk of injury increases.
• The backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the rear
otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness.
• The belt webbing must always be kept clean. Soiled belt webbing may
impair proper operation of the inertia reel ⇒ page 203, “Seat belts”.
• The slot of the belt tongue must not be blocked by paper or similar
objects otherwise the belt tongue will not lock in place properly.
• Inspect the seat belts regularly to ensure they are in good condition. If
you find seat belts which have damage to the seat belt webbing, seat belt
connections, to the inertia reels or to the lock, the relevant safety belt must
be replaced by a specialist garage.
• The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way. Do not make
an attempt to repair the seat belts yourself.
• Damaged seat belts which have been subjected to stress in an accident
and were therefore stretched, must be replaced - this is best done by a
specialist garage. The anchorage points of the belts must also be inspected.
The anchorage points for the belts should also be checked.
• In certain countries it is possible to use seat belts which differ in terms of
their operation from the seat belts which are described on the pages which
follow.
How are seat belts correctly fastened?
Fastening three-point seat belts
Fasten your seat belt before starting!
– Correctly adjust the front seat and the head restraint before fastening
your seat belt ⇒ page 75.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 150 Routing of webbing
over the shoulders and the
lap belt
Fig. 151 Routing of belt
webbing for an expectant
mother
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
156
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seat belts 157
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– Slowly pull the belt webbing at the tongue of the lock over your chest
and pelvis ⇒ .
– Insert the tongue of the lock into the seat belt buckle belonging to the
seat until it is heard to lock in place.
– Pull on the belt to check that it has also reliably engaged in the lock.
Each three-point seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel. This inertia reel offers
you complete freedom of movement if the belt is unreeled slowly. If the brakes are
applied suddenly, the inertia reel will block. It also blocks the belts when the car
accelerates, when driving uphill and when cornering.
Expectant mothers must also wear the seat belt ⇒ .
WARNING
• The shoulder part of the seat belt must never run across your neck but
must run approximately over the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly
against the chest. The lap part of the belt must run across the hip and must
never be routed across the stomach. It must always fit snugly ⇒ page 156,
fig. 150. Adjust the belt webbing as required.
• The lap part of the belt should be positioned as low as possible at the
pelvis of an expectant mother in order to avoid exerting any pressure on the
lower abdomen ⇒ page 156, fig. 151.
• Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed. Seat
belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in
minor accidents.
• A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body
is moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then
suddenly held firm by the belt.
• Only insert the lock tongue into the lock which is the correct one for your
seat. This will affect the protection which the belt offers and increase the risk
of an injury.
Seat belt height adjuster
The seat belt height adjuster makes it possible for you to adapt the
routing of the three-point seat belt in the area of the shoulder to match
your body size.
– Move the height adjuster in the desired direction up or down
⇒ fig. 152.
– Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster
has correctly locked in place.
WARNING
Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the belt
is positioned approximately across the middle of your shoulder - on no
account across your neck.
Note
It is also possible to adapt the routing of the belt webbing at the front seats by
adjusting the height of the seat.
Fig. 152 Front seat: Seat belt
height adjuster
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
157
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seat belts158
Taking seat belts off
– Press the red button in the belt lock ⇒ fig. 153. The spring force causes
the tongue of the lock to jump out.
– Guide the belt back with your hand to enable the inertia reel to wind
up the belt webbing more easily.
A plastic knob in the belt webbing holds the belt tongue in a position which is easy
to get hold of.
Three-point safety belt for the middle rear seat
Your car is equipped as standard with the three-point seat belt in the middle rear
seat. It is used in the same way as the three-point seat belts on the left and right (at
front and rear).
WARNING
The three-point safety belt for the rear middle seat can only fulfil its function
reliably when the backrests are correctly locked into position ⇒ page 76.
Belt tensioners
Safety for the driver and passengers wearing their seat belts, is enhanced by the
belt tensioners fitted to the inertia reels of the front and rear side three-point seat
belts, in addition to the protection afforded by the airbag system.
The three-point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal colli-
sion of a certain severity. The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the seat belts
are not fastened.
The belt tensioner is deployed in the event of a frontal collision of major severity. A
powder charge is ignited in the inertia reels during deployment. The belt webbing
is pulled into the inertia reels by a mechanical system and the belt is tensioned.
The airbag system is not activated in case of minor frontal and rear-end collisions,
in the case of vehicle rollover or an accident, through which only minor negative
acceleration forces are excerted onto the vehicle. In the case of a side collision, only
the belt tensioner of the front seat on the side on which the collision takes place is
deployed.
WARNING
• Any work on the system including removal and installation of system
components because of other repair work, must only be carried out by a
specialist garage.
• The protective function of the system is only adequate for a single acci-
dent. If the belt tensioners have been deployed, it is then necessary to
replace the entire system.
• The Owner's Manual must also be handed over to the new owner if the
vehicle is sold.
Note
• Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed. This is not an indi-
cation of a fire in the vehicle.
• It is essential to pay attention to relevant safety regulations if the vehicle or indi-
vidual parts of the system are scrapped. Specialist garages are familiar with these
regulations and will be able to provide you with detailed information in this respect.
Fig. 153 Releasing lock
tongue from belt lock
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
158
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Seat belts 159
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• When disposing of vehicle or parts of the system, it is important to comply with
the national legal requirements.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
159
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Airbag system160
Airbag system
Description of the airbag system
General information on the airbag system
The front airbag system is complementary to the three-point seat belts and offers
additional protection for the head and chest area of the driver and passenger in the
event of a frontal collision.
In the case of a violent side crash, the side* and head* airbags reduce the risk of
injuries to the occupants on the part of the body facing the side of the accident
⇒ .
The airbag system is only functional after the ignition has been switched on.
The operational readiness of the airbag system is monitored electronically. The
airbag warning light comes on for a few seconds each time the ignition is switched
on.
The airbag system (according to vehicle equipment) essentially consists of:
• an electronic control unit,
• front airbag for the driver and front passenger,
• Driver's knee airbag*,
• front side airbags,
• Rear side airbags*,
• head airbags*,
• an airbag warning light in the instrument cluster,
• a front passenger airbag switch*,
• an indicator light for a switched off front seat passenger airbag* in the middle
of the dash panel.
A fault in the airbag system exists if:
• the airbag indicator light does not light up when the ignition is switched on,
• the warning light does not go out after about 4 seconds after the ignition is
switched on,
• the airbag indicator light goes out and comes on again after the ignition is
switched on,
• the airbag indicator light comes on or flickers when driving,
• an airbag indicator light showing a switched-off front passenger airbag* in the
middle of the dash panel flashes.
WARNING
• To enable the occupants of a car to be protected with the greatest
possible effect when the airbag is deployed, the front seats must be
⇒ page 150, “Correct seated position” correctly adjusted to match the body
size of the occupant.
• If you do not fasten the seat belts when driving, lean too far forward or
adopt an incorrect seated position, you are exposing yourself to increased
risk of injury in the event of an accident.
• Have the airbag system checked immediately by a specialist garage if a
fault exists. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the
event of an accident.
• No modifications of any kind may be made to parts of the airbag system.
• It is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag system as this
might result in the airbag being deployed.
• The protective function of the airbag system is sufficient for only one
accident. The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been
deployed.
• The airbag system needs no maintenance during its working life.
• If you sell your car, please hand over the complete vehicle documenta-
tion to the new owener. Please note that the documents relating to the
possibility of deactivating the front passenger airbag are also part of the
vehicle documents!
• If the vehicle or individual parts of the airbag system are scrapped, it is
essential to observe the relevant safety precautions. Škoda Service Partners
are familiar with these regulations.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
160
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Airbag system 161
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• When disposing of vehicle or parts of the airbag system, it is important
to comply with the national legal requirements.
When are the airbags deployed?
The airbag system is designed in such a way that the driver and front passenger
airbag are deployed in the event of a frontal collision of major severity.
In the case of a violent side crash, the front side airbag* on the side of the car at
which the collision occurs, is deployed together with the rear side airbag and the
head airbag*.
In certain accident situations, the front airbags as well as the side and head airbag
may be deployed together.
The airbags are not deployed in the case of minor frontal and side collisions, in the
case of rear-end collisions and vehicle rollover.
Deployment factors
It is not possible to state globally which deployment conditions apply to the airbag
system in every situation as the circumstances which exist in the case of accidents
vary greatly. An important role in this case, for example, is played by factors such as
the type of object (hard, soft) against which the vehicle impacts or the type of object
against which the vehicle impacts, the angle of impact, the relative vehicle speed
during the accident etc.
A decisive factor for the deployment of the airbags is the deceleration which occurs
during a collision. The control unit analyses the nature of the collision and activates
the relevant restraint system. If the vehicle deceleration which occurs and is meas-
ured during the collision remains below the prescribed reference values specified
in the control unit, the airbags are not deployed although the vehicle may well
suffer severe damage to the bodywork as a consequence of the accident.
The airbags are not deployed if:
• ignition off,
• a minor frontal collision,
• a minor side collision,
• a rear-end collision,
• rollover of the vehicle
Note
• a grey white, non harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated. This is perfectly
normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.
• the dash panel must be replaced after the front passenger airbag has been
deployed.
• in the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed:
− the interior lighting comes on (if the switch for the interior light is in the door
contact position),
− the hazard warning light is switched on,
− all the doors are unlocked,
− the battery in the luggage compartment* is switched off;
− the fuel supply to the engine is interrupted.
Front airbag
Description of the front airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belt!
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 154 Driver airbag in the
steering wheel
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
161
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Airbag system162
The front airbag for the driver is housed in the steering wheel ⇒ page 161, fig. 154.
The front airbag for the front passenger is housed in the dash panel above the
storage compartment ⇒ fig. 155. The installation positions are each marked with
the “AIRBAG” logo.
The front airbag system, in combination with three-point safety belts, offers addi-
tional protection for the head and chest area of the driver and front passenger in
the event of a frontal collision of major severity ⇒ in “Important safety informa-
tion regarding the front airbag system” on page 163.
The airbag is not a substitute for the seat belt, but is part of the complete passive
vehicle safety concept. Please note that an airbag can only offer you optimal
protection in combination with a seat belt which is fastened.
Apart from their normal protective function, a further task of the seat belts is to
also hold the driver and front passenger in a correct seated position in the event of
a frontal collision so as to enable the front airbags to offer the maximum protection.
You should therefore always fasten the seat belts, not only because this is required
by law, but also for safety reasons and for your own protection ⇒ page 154, “Why
seat belts?”.
Note
The dash panel must be replaced after the front passenger airbag has been
deployed.
Function of the front airbags
Risk of injury to the head and chest area is reduced by fully inflated
airbags.
The airbag system is designed in such a way that the driver and the front passenger
airbag* are deployed in the event of a frontal collision of major severity.
In certain accident situations, the front, side and head airbag are simultaneously
deployed.
If the airbags are deployed, the airbags are filled with a propellant gas and inflated
in front of the driver and front passenger ⇒ fig. 156. The airbags inflate in fractions
of a second and at a high speed in order to be able to offer that additional protec-
tion in the event of an accident. The forward movement of the driver and of the
front passenger is cushioned when they make contact with the fully inflated airbag
and the risk of injury to head and chest is thus reduced.
The specially developed airbag allows the gas to flow out of the inflated airbag in a
controlled manner (depending on the load of the particular car occupant) in order
to cushion head and chest areas. The airbag then deflates subsequently to such an
extent, after an accident, to again provide a clear view forward.
A grey white, non harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated. This is perfectly
normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.
The airbag develops enormous forces when triggered, which can lead to injuries if
the sitting position or seated position is not correct ⇒ in “Important safety
information regarding the front airbag system” on page 163.
Fig. 155 Front passenger
airbag in the dash panel
Fig. 156 Inflated airbags
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
162
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Airbag system 163
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Important safety information regarding the front airbag system
Correct use of the airbag system considerably reduces the risk of
injury!
WARNING
• Never transport children on the front seat of a vehicle without using a
proper restraint system. If airbags are deployed in the event of an accident,
the child might suffer severe or even fatal injuries!
• For the driver and front passenger it is important to maintain a distance
of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel ⇒ fig. 157. Not main-
taining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be
able to properly protect you - hazard! The front seats and the head restraints
must always also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occu-
pant.
• It is essential to always switch off ⇒ page 168, “Deactivating an airbag”
the front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat on the front
passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of
travel (in some countries also when the child is facing the direction of travel).
If this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal
injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed. In certain countries
national legal provisions also require that the side or head passenger
airbags be deactivated. When transporting a child on the front passenger
seat, please comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the
use of child safety seats.
• There must not by any further persons, animals or objects positioned
between the front seated occupants and the deployment area of the airbag.
• The steering wheel and the surface of the airbag module in the dash
panel on the passenger side must not be stuck onto, covered or modified in
any other way. These parts should only be cleaned with a dry cloth or a cloth
moistened with water. No objects such as cup holders, mobile phone
mounts, etc. may be attached to the covers of the airbag modules or be
located within the immediate area.
• No modifications of any kind may be made to parts of the airbag system.
Any work on the airbag system including installing and removing system
components because of other repair work (e.g. removing the steering
wheel) must only be carried out by a specialist garage.
• Never carry out changes on the front bumper or on the body.
• Never place any objects on the surface of the front passenger airbag in
the dash panel.
Fig. 157 Safe distance to
steering wheel
WARNING (continued)
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
163
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Airbag system164
Driver's knee airbag*
Description of the driver's knee airbags,
The knee airbag reduces the risk of injury to the legs.
The driver's knee airbag is located in the lower part of the dash panel below the
steering column ⇒ page 164, fig. 158. The installation position is marked with the
“AIRBAG” logo.
The driver's knee airbag is complementary to the three-point seat belt and offers
adequate protection to the knees of the driver. Please note that an airbag can
only offer you optimal protection in combination with a seat belt which is
fastened.
Apart from their normal protective function, a further task of the seat belt is to also
hold the driver in a correct seated position in the event of a frontal collision so as to
enable the knee airbag to offer the maximum protection.
You should therefore always fasten the seat belts, not only because this is required
by law, but also for safety reasons and for your own protection ⇒ page 154, “Why
seat belts?”.
Function of the driver's knee airbags
The airbag system is designed in such a way that the driver's knee airbag is
deployed together with the belt tensioner in the event of a frontal collision of major
severity.
If an airbag is deployed, the airbag is filled with propellant gas. The airbags inflate
in fractions of a second and at a high speed in order to be able to offer that addi-
tional protection in the event of an accident.
A grey white, non harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated. This is perfectly
normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.
The forward movement of the body is cushioned when it makes contact with the
fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to the legs of the driver is thus reduced.
Important safety information on the driver's knee airbag
WARNING
• The surface of the airbag module in the lower part of the dash panel
below the steering column must not be stuck onto, covered or modified in
any other way. These parts should only be cleaned with a dry cloth or a cloth
moistened with water. No objects must be attached to the cover of the
airbag module or be located within the immediate area.
• No modifications of any kind may be made to parts of the airbag system.
Any work on the airbag system including installing and removing system
components because of other repair work (e.g. removing the steering
wheel) must only be carried out by a specialist garage.
• Never carry out changes on the front bumper or on the body.
Fig. 158 Driver's knee airbag
below the steering column
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
164
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Airbag system 165
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Side airbags*
Description of side airbags
The side airbag together with the head airbag offers enhanced occu-
pant protection in the event of a side collision.
The front side airbags are housed in the upholstery of the backrests of the front
seats ⇒ fig. 159.
The rear side airbags* are located between the entrance area and the seat backrest.
The side airbag system in combination with the three-point seat belts, offers addi-
tional protection for the upper area of the body (chest, stomach and pelvis) of the
occupants of the car in the event of a side collision of major severity.
Apart from their normal protective function, a further task of the seat belts is to
also hold the occupents of the front or rear exterior seats in a correct seated posi-
tion in the event of a side collision so as to enable the side airbag to offer the
maximum protection.
You should therefore always fasten the seat belts, not only because this is required
by law, but also for safety reasons and for your own protection.
Each time the side airbags are deployed, the head airbag* and the front belt
tensioner on the side of the car at which the collision occures, are automatically
deployed at the same time in order to provide the occupant with enhanced
protection.
Function of the side airbags
Risk of injury to the upper part of the body is reduced by fully inflated
side airbags.
When the side airbags are deployed, the head airbag and the belt tensioner are also
automatically deployed on the relevant side ⇒ fig. 160.
If an airbag is deployed, the airbag is filled with propellant gas. The airbags inflate
in fractions of a second and at a high speed in order to be able to offer that addi-
tional protection in the event of an accident.
A grey white, non harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated. This is perfectly
normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.
The load of the occupants is cushioned when plunging into the fully inflated airbag
and the risk of injury to the entire upper body (chest, stomach and pelvis) is
reduced on the side facing the door.
Fig. 159 Installation position
of side airbag in driver seat
Fig. 160 Inflated side airbag
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
165
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Airbag system166
Important safety information on the side airbag
Correct use of the airbag system considerably reduces the risk of
injury!
WARNING
• It is essential to always switch off ⇒ page 168, “Deactivating an airbag”
the front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat on the front
passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of
travel (in some countries also when the child is facing the direction of travel).
If this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal
injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed. In certain countries
national legal provisions also require that the side or head passenger
airbags be deactivated. When transporting a child on the front passenger
seat, please comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the
use of child safety seats.
• Your head should never be positioned in the deployment area of the side
airbag. You might suffer severe injuries in the event of an accident. This
applies in particular to children who are transported without using a suit-
able child safety seat ⇒ page 173, “Child safety and side airbag*”.
• If children adopt an incorrect seated position when travelling, they may
be exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. This can
result in serious injuries ⇒ page 171, “What you should know about trans-
porting children!”.
• There must not be any further persons, animals as well as objects posi-
tioned between the occupants and the deployment area of the airbag. There
must also be no accessories such as cup holders, attached to the doors to
enable the side airbags to activate properly.
• The airbag control unit operates together with the pressure sensors,
which are attached in the front doors. For this reason no adjustments must
be carried out at the doors as well as at the door panels (for example addi-
tional installation of loudspeakers). Resulting damages can have a negative
affect on the operation of the airbag system. All work on the front doors and
their panels must only be carried out by a specialist garage.
• In the event of a side collision, the side airbags will not function properly,
if the sensors cannot measure the increasing air pressure inside the doors,
because the air can escape through large, non-sealed openings in the door
panel.
− Never drive with removed inner door panels.
− Never drive, if parts of the inner door panel have been removed and
the remaining openings have not been properly sealed.
− Never drive, if the loudspeakers in the doors have been removed, only
if the loudspeaker openings have been properly sealed.
− Always make sure that the openings are covered or filled, if additional
loudspeakers or other equipment parts are installed in the inner door
panels.
− Always work with a Škoda dealer or have it carried out by a competent
specialist workshop.
• Only hang light items of clothing on the clothes hooks to the vehicle.
Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items of
clothing.
• Ensure that there are no excessive forces, such as violent knocks, kicks
etc., impact on the backrests of the seats otherwise the system may be
damaged. The side airbags would not be deployed in such a case!
• Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front
passenger seats must only be of the type expressly authorized by Škoda
Auto. In view of the fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the
seat, use of non-approved seat or protective covers would considerably
impair the protective function of the side airbag.
• Any damage to the original seat covers in the area of the side airbag
module must be repaired without delay by your specialist garage.
• The airbag modules in the front seats must not display any damage,
cracks or deep scratches. It is not permissible to use force in order to open
the modules.
WARNING (continued)
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
166
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Airbag system 167
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• Any work on the side airbag system including removing and installing
system components because of other repair work (e.g. removing seats) must
only be carried out by a specialist garage.
Head airbags*
Description of the head airbags
The head airbag together with the side airbag offers enhanced occu-
pant protection in the event of a side collision.
The head airbags are positioned above the doors on both sides in the interior of the
car ⇒ fig. 161. The installation positions are each marked with the “AIRBAG” logo.
The head airbag together with the three-point seat belts and the side airbags, offers
additional protection for the head and neck area of the occupants in the event of a
side collision of major severity ⇒ page 168, “Important safety information on the
head airbag”.
Apart from their normal protective function, a further task of the seat belts is to
also hold the driver and the occupants in a correct seated position in the event of a
side collision so as to enable the head airbags to offer the maximum protection.
You should therefore always fasten the seat belts, not only because this is required
by law, but also for safety reasons and for your own protection ⇒ page 154, “Why
seat belts?”.
Together with other elements (such as cross bars in the seats, stable vehicle struc-
ture) the head airbags are the consequent further development of occupant
protection in the case of side collisions.
Function of the head airbags
The risk of injury to the head and neck area is reduced in the event of
a side collision by fully inflated head airbags.
In the case of a side collision the head airbag is deployed together with the rele-
vant side airbag and the belt tensioner on the side of the car on which the accident
occurs ⇒ fig. 162.
If the system is deployed, the airbag is filled with propellant gas and extends over
the entire area of the side window including the door pillars ⇒ fig. 162.
The protection offered by the head airbags is thus available simultaneously both to
the front occupants of the car seated on the side on which the accident occurs, as
well as to the rear occupants. Any impact of the head against parts of the interior or
objects outside of the car, is cushioned by the inflated head airbag. The reduction
in any impact to the head and the resultant minimizing of any movements of the
head additionally reduce the risk of injuries to the neck area. The head airbag also
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 161 Installation position
of the head airbags
Fig. 162 Inflated head airbag
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
167
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Airbag system168
offers additional protection in the case of an offset impact by covering the front
door pillar.
In certain accident situations, the front, side and head airbag are simultaneously
deployed.
The airbags inflate in fractions of a second and at a high speed in order to be able
to offer that additional protection in the event of an accident. A grey white, non
harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated. This is perfectly normal and is not
an indication of a fire in the vehicle.
Important safety information on the head airbag
Correct use of the airbag system considerably reduces the risk of
injury!
WARNING
• It is essential to always switch off ⇒ page 168, “Deactivating an airbag”
the front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat on the front
passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of
travel (in some countries also when the child is facing the direction of travel).
If this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal
injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed. In certain countries
national legal provisions also require that the side or head passenger
airbags be deactivated. When transporting a child on the front passenger
seat, please comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the
use of child safety seats.
• There must not be any objects in the deployment area of the head
airbags which might prevent the airbags from inflating properly.
• Only hang light items of clothing on the clothes hooks to the vehicle.
Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items of
clothing. In addition, it is not permitted to use clothes hangers for hanging
up items of clothing.
• The airbag control unit operates together with the sensors, which are
attached in the front doors. For this reason no adjustments must be carried
out at the doors as well as at the door panels (for example additional instal-
lation of loudspeakers). Resulting damages can have a negative affect on the
operation of the airbag system. All work on the front doors and their panels
must only be carried out by a specialist garage.
• There must not be any other persons (e.g. children) or animals between
the car occupant and the deployment area of the head airbag. In addition,
none of the occupants should lean their head out of the window when
driving, or extend their arms and hands out of the window.
• The sun visors must not be swivelled to the side windows into the
deployment area of the head airbags if any objects, such as ball-point pens
etc. are attached to them. This might result in injuries to the occupants if the
head airbag is deployed.
• Installing impermissible accessories in the area of the head airbags may
considerably impair the protection offered by the head airbag in the event of
it being deployed. When the deployed head airbag is inflated, parts of the
accessories fitted may in certain circumstances be thrown into the interior
of the car and cause injuries to the occupants ⇒ page 228, “Accessories,
changes and replacement of parts”.
• Any work on the head airbag system including installing and removing
system components because of other repair work (e.g. removing headliner)
must only be carried out by a specialist garage.
Deactivating an airbag
Deactivating airbags
If any airbags have been deactivated, switch them on again as soon
as possible so that they are able to again provide their proper protec-
tion.
There is the technical means installed within your vehicle to switch off the front,
side or head* airbag (take out of commission).
This is why you should have the deactivation of the airbags carried out by a
specialist garage.
WARNING (continued)
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
168
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Airbag system 169
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
On vehicles equipped with the switch for deactivation of the airbags, you can deac-
tivate the front and side passenger airbag by means of this switch ⇒ page 169.
Deactivation of airbags is envisaged only for particular instances, such as if:
• you must in exceptional cases use a child seat on the front passenger seat
where the child has its back to the direction of travel of the vehicle (in some coun-
tries this must be in the direction of travel due to other legal regulations applying)
⇒ page 171, “Important safety information regarding the use of child safety seats”
• you are not able to maintain the distance of at least 25 cm between middle of
steering wheel and chest, despite the driver seat being correctly adjusted,
• special attachments are required in the area of the steering wheel because of a
physical disability,
• you have installed other seats (e.g. orthopaedic seats without side airbags).
Monitoring the airbag system
The functionality of the airbag system is also monitored electronically, when one
airbag has been switched off
If the airbag was switched off using diagnostic equipment:
• The warning light for the airbag system lights up for 4 seconds after switching
on the ignition and then flashes for 12 seconds afterwards in 2 second intervals.
Front passenger airbags switched off using the switch for front passenger
airbags* in stowage compartment on the front passenger side:
• The airbag warning light comes on in the instrument cluster for about 4 seconds
each time the ignition is switched on.
• Switching off airbags is indicated in the middle of the dash panel by the lighting
up of the indicator light  in display     ⇒ page 169, fig. 163.
Note
Your Škoda Service Partner will be able to advise you whether national legislation in
your country allows airbags in your vehicle to be deactivated, and which ones.
Switch for the front passenger airbag*
The front passenger airbag is deactivated with the switch.
Deactivating an airbag
– Switch off the ignition.
– Turn the slot of the airbag switch using the key in the position (OFF)
⇒ fig. 163.
– Check whether the airbag indicator light
 in display  
  in the middle of the dash panel lights up when the ignition is
turned on ⇒ fig. 164.
Fig. 163 Storage compart-
ment: Switch for the front
passenger airbag
Fig. 164 Indicator light for
the front passenger airbag
A
2
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
169
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Airbag system170
Switching on an airbag
– Switch off the ignition.
– Turn the slot of the airbag switch using the key in the position (ON)
⇒ fig. 163.
– Check whether the airbag indicator light
 in display  
  in the middle of the dash panel does not light up when the
ignition is turned on ⇒ fig. 164.
The airbags should only be switched off under exceptional circumstances.
Indicator light  in display     (airbag switched off)
The airbag indicator light is located in the middle of the dash panel ⇒ fig. 164.
If the front passenger airbag is switched off, the airbag warning light comes on
about 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on.
There is a system fault present in the airbag switch off ⇒ if the indicator light
flashes. Please have the car inspected immediately by a specialist garage.
WARNING
• The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or
switched off.
• Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off! Otherwise a
fault can occur in the system for the airbag deactivation.
• If the indicator light  in display     (airbag switched
off) flashes:
− Front passenger airbag is not deployed in the event of an accident!
− It is also important to have the system inspected without delay by a
specialist garage.
A
1
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
170
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Transporting children safely 171
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Transporting children safely
What you should know about transporting children!
An introduction to the subject
Accident statistics have revealed that children are generally more
safely transported on the rear seats than on the front passenger seat.
Children younger than 12 years of age should normally travel on the rear seat of the
vehicle (take note of any national legal provisions which differ from this). They
should be secured there by means of a child restraint system or by using the existing
seat belts depending on their age, body size and weight. The child seat should be
mounted behind the front passenger seat for safety reasons.
The physical principle of an accident does, of course, also apply to children
⇒ page 155, “The physical principle of a frontal collision”. They differ from adults in
that their muscles and bone structure of children are not yet fully developed. Thus
children are exposed to increased risk of injury.
Children should be transported by using special child safety seats in order to
reduce this risk of injury.
Use only child safety seats which are officially approved and are suitable for chil-
dren and which comply with the ECE-R 44 Standard, which classifies child safety
seats into 5 groups ⇒ page 174, “Classification of child seats into groups”. Child
restraint systems which have been tested for conformity with ECE-R 44 have a non-
detachable test seal (a large E within a circle and below this the test number)
attached to the seat.
We recommend that you use child safety seats from the Škoda genuine accessories.
These child seats were developed and also tested for use in Škoda vehicles. They
fulfil the standard ECE-R 44.
WARNING
Always comply with legal provisions and instructions from the relevant child
safety seat manufacturer when installing and using the child seat
⇒ page 171, “Important safety information regarding the use of child safety
seats”.
Note
Any varying national legal regulations take priority over the information provided in
these instructions for use, or stated in this chapter.
Important safety information regarding the use of child safety
seats
Correct use of child safety seats considerably reduces the risk of
injury!
WARNING
• All the occupants of the car - in particular children - must wear a seat belt
when the car is moving.
• Children less than 1.50 m in height or younger than 12 years must not use
a normal seat belt without a child restraint system otherwise this may result
in injuries to the stomach and neck areas. Comply with the national legal
requirements.
• One should never carry children, and also not babies! - on one's lap.
• You can transport a child safely in a suitable child safety seat ⇒ page 174,
“Child seat”!
• Only one child may be fastened with a seat belt into a child safety seat.
• Never leave the child sitting unattended in the seat.
• Certain outside climatic conditions can cause life-threatening tempera-
tures in the vehicle.
WARNING (continued)
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
171
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Transporting children safely172
• Never allow your child to be transported in a vehicle without the use of a
suitable restraint system.
• Children should also never stand up in a vehicle or kneel on the seats
when the vehicle is moving. In the event of an accident the child will be
thrown through the vehicle and may as a result suffer fatal injuries, and also
injure other occupants.
• Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an acci-
dent if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the
vehicle is moving. This particularly applies to children who are transported
on the front passenger seat if the airbag system deploys in the event of an
accident. This can result in severe or even fatal injuries.
• It is important that the belt webbing is properly routed if the seat belts
are to offer their maximum protection ⇒ page 156, “How are seat belts
correctly fastened?”. Pay particular attention to the information provided by
the manufacturer of the child safety seat regarding correct routing of the
belt. Seat belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause inju-
ries even in minor accidents.
• Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly.
One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp-edged fittings.
• It is essential to always switch off ⇒ page 169 the front passenger airbag
when attaching a child safety seat on the front passenger seat where the
child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel (in some countries
also when the child is facing the direction of travel). If this is not done, there
is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front
passenger airbag is deployed. In certain countries national legal provisions
also require that the side and head airbags be deactivated. When trans-
porting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply with the appro-
priate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.
Use of child safety seats on the front passenger seat
Child safety seats should always be attached to the rear seats.
We recommend, for safety reasons, that you always mount a child restraint systems
on the rear seats whenever possible. If you still decide, however, to use a child
safety seat on the front passenger seat then you must pay attention to the following
warnings in connection with the use of the airbag system on the front passenger
seat.
WARNING
• Warning - particular hazard! Never use a child safety seat on the front
passenger seat in which the child is seated with its back facing the direction
of travel. This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of the
front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child severe, or even fatal
injuries, in the event of it being deployed.
• This is also clearly stated on the sticker which is located on the centre
column of the body on the front passenger side ⇒ fig. 165. The sticker is
visible upon opening the front passenger door. For some countries, the
sticker is also affixed to the sun visor of the front passenger.
• It is essential to always switch off ⇒ page 168, “Deactivating an airbag”
the front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat on the front
passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of
travel (in some countries also when the child is facing the direction of travel).
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 165 Sticker on the centre
column of the body on the
front passenger side.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
172
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Transporting children safely 173
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
If this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal
injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed. In certain countries
national legal provisions also require that the side or head passenger
airbags be deactivated. When transporting a child on the front passenger
seat, please comply with the appropriate national regulations regarding the
use of child safety seats.
• If the front passenger airbag has been switched off by a specialist garage
using the vehicle system tester, the front side airbag and head passenger
airbag* remains switched on. In certain countries national legal provisions
require that besides the front passenger airbag also the side or head
passenger airbags are deactivated. Please comply with any differing
national legal regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.
• If a child safety seat in which the child faces in the direction of travel is
used on the front passenger seat, the front passenger seat must be moved
back and to the top fully in the highest position.
• If this is not done, a child seated on the front passenger seat may suffer
severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag or airbags are
deployed. Have the airbag (or airbags) deactivated if necessary ⇒ page 168,
“Deactivating an airbag”.
• You should have the front passenger airbag (or airbags) reactivated just
as soon as you no longer use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat.
Child safety and side airbag*
Children must never be seated in the deployment area of the side
airbags and head airbags.
In the event of a side collision, the side airbags offer the vehicle occupants
enhanced protection.
The side airbags are inflated in fractions of a second in order to be able to provide
this protection ⇒ page 165, “Function of the side airbags”.
An airbag inflating develops such a strong force that an occupant who has not
adopted an upright seated position may suffer injuries from the airbag or as a result
of objects which are located within the deployment area of the side airbag.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 166 Seated position of
an unprotected child at risk
from side airbag
Fig. 167 Child properly
protected by safety seat
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
173
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Transporting children safely174
This applies particularly to children if they are not transported in accordance
with legal requirements.
The child is protected when seated in a child safety seat matching its age. Adequate
room is available between the child and the deployment area of the side airbag and
head airbag. The airbag offers optimal protection.
WARNING
• It is essential to always switch off ⇒ page 168 the front passenger airbag
when attaching a child safety seat on the front passenger seat where the
child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel (in some countries
also when the child is facing the direction of travel). If this is not done, there
is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front
passenger airbag is deployed. In certain countries national legal provisions
also require that the side and head airbags be deactivated. When trans-
porting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply with the appro-
priate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.
• When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply
with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety
seats.
• Children must never be seated with their head in the deployment area of
the side airbag - risk of injury!
• Do not place any objects within the deployment area of the side airbag -
risk of injury!
Child seat
Classification of child seats into groups
Only child safety seats which have an official approval and are suit-
able for the child, may be used.
ECE-R 44 standard applies to child safety seats. ECE means: Economic Commission
for Europe.
Child safety seats which have been tested for conformity with ECE-R 44 have a non-
detachable test seal (a large E within a circle and below this the test number)
attached to the seat.
Child safety seats are classified in 5 groups:
Children of more than 150 cm in height may use the seat belts fitted to the vehicle
without a seat bolster.
Use of child safety seats
An overview of the usefulness of child seats on each of the seats according to the
ECE-R 44 standard:
Universal category - seat is suitable for all approved types of child safety seats.
The seat can be fitted with fixing eyes for the “ISOFIX*”system.
The divided rear seat - seat can be fitted with fixing eyes for the system “To p
Te t h er *” ⇒ page 178, “Attaching child seat using the “Top Tether” system”.
Group Weight
0 0 - 10 kg ⇒ page 175
0+ up to 13 kg ⇒ page 175
1 9 - 18 kg ⇒ page 175
2 15 - 25 kg ⇒ page 176
3 22 - 36 kg ⇒ page 176
Child seat
groups
Front passenger
seat
Rear seat
outside
Rear seat
middle
0
0+
1
2 and 3
A
U
A
+
A
U
A
+
A
T
A
U
A
U
A
+
A
U
A
+
A
T
A
U
A
U
A
+
A
U
A
+
A
T
A
U
A
U
A
U
A
U
A
U
A
+
A
T
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
174
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Transporting children safely 175
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Child seats of group 0/0+
The optimal solution for babies of up to about 9 months old weighing up to 10 kg
or babies up to about 18 months old weighing up to 13 kg is a child safety seat
which can be adjusted into the reclining position ⇒ fig. 168.
In view of the fact that such child seats are installed that the child is seated with its
back facing the direction of travel, they must not be used on the front passenger
seat⇒ page 172, “Use of child safety seats on the front passenger seat”.
WARNING
• It is essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag (airbags)
when attaching in exceptional circumstances a child safety seat on the front
passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of
travel (in some countries also when the child is facing the direction of travel),
− in a specialist garage
− or by using the switch for the front passenger airbag* ⇒ page 169,
“Switch for the front passenger airbag*”.
• In certain countries national legal provisions require that besides the
front airbag also the side or head airbags are deactivated. Please comply
with any differing national legal regulations regarding the use of child safety
seats.
• If this is not done, a child seated on the front passenger seat may suffer
severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag or airbags are
deployed.
• You should have the front passenger airbag (or airbags) reactivated just
as soon as you no longer use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat.
Child safety seats in Group 1
Child seats in Group 1 are for babies and small children up to 4 years of age with a
weight of between 9 and 18 kilograms. It is best for children in the lower range of
this group, to use a child seat which allows the child to sit with its back to the direc-
tion of travel. It is best for children in the upper range of the Group 0+, to use a child
seat which allows the child to sit ⇒ fig. 169 in the direction of travel.
Child safety seats in which the child is seated with its back facing the direction of
travel, must not be used on the front passenger seat ⇒ page 172, “Use of child
safety seats on the front passenger seat”.
WARNING
• It is essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag (airbags)
when attaching in exceptional circumstances a child safety seat on the front
Fig. 168 Child seats of group
0/0+
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 169 Child seat with
padded table in Group 1
installed on rear seat bench
facing the direction of travel
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
175
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Transporting children safely176
passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of
travel (in some countries also when the child is facing the direction of travel),
− in a specialist garage
− or by using the switch for the front passenger airbag* ⇒ page 169,
“Switch for the front passenger airbag*”.
• In certain countries national legal provisions require that besides the
front airbag also the side or head airbags are deactivated. Please comply
with any differing national legal regulations regarding the use of child safety
seats.
• If this is not done, a child seated on the front passenger seat may suffer
severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag or airbags are
deployed.
• You should have the front passenger airbag (or airbags) reactivated just
as soon as you no longer use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat.
Child safety seats in Group 2
For children up to about 7 years of age weighing between 15 and 25 kg the optimal
solution is a child safety seat in combination with the three-point seat belt
⇒ fig. 170.
WARNING
• When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply
with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety
seats. If required, the airbag has to be deactivated,
− in a specialist garage
− or by using the switch for the front passenger airbag* ⇒ page 169,
“Switch for the front passenger airbag*”.
• The shoulder part of the seat belt must run approximately across the
middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest. It must on no account
run across the neck. The lap part of the seat belt must run across the pelvis
and fits snugly; it must not run over the belly. Tighten the belt webbing over
your hip if necessary.
• Please comply with any differing national legal regulations regarding the
use of child safety seats.
Child safety seats in Group 3
For children of about 7 years of age weighing between 22 and 36 kg and of a height
of less than 150 cm, the optimal solution is a child safety seat (seat bolster) in
combination with the three-point seat belt ⇒ fig. 171.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 170 Child seat in Group
2 installed on the rear seat
facing the direction of travel
Fig. 171 Child seat in Group
3 installed on the rear seat
facing the direction of travel
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
176
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Transporting children safely 177
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Children of more than 150 cm in height may use the seat belts fitted to the vehicle
without a seat bolster.
WARNING
• When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply
with the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety
seats. If required, the airbag has to be deactivated,
− in a specialist garage
− or by using the switch for the front passenger airbag* ⇒ page 169,
“Switch for the front passenger airbag*”.
• The shoulder part of the seat belt must run approximately across the
middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest. It must on no account
run across the neck. The lap part of the seat belt must run across the pelvis
and fits snugly; it must not run over the belly. Tighten the belt webbing over
your hip if necessary.
• Please comply with any differing national legal regulations regarding the
use of child safety seats.
Attaching a child seat using the “ISOFIX” system
There are two fixing eyes* between the backrest and the seat of the front
passenger as well as on the rear exterior seats for fixing the “ISOFIX”
system child seat in place. The places are marked with -ISOFIX-.
Install child seat
– Insert the mounting funnels onto the locking eyes between the
backrest and seat cushion ⇒ fig. 172.
– Push the notched arms of the child seat over the mounting funnels
into the locking eyes, until it is heard to lock ⇒ fig. 173.
– Pull on both sides of the child seat!
One can mount a child safety seat using the “ISOFIX” system quickly, easily and reli-
ably. Please pay close attention to instructions from the manufacturer of the child
safety seat when installing and removing the seat.
Child seats fitted with the “ISOFIX” clamping system can only be mounted and fixed
in a vehicle fitted with an “ISOFIX system” when these child seats have been
released for this type of vehicle according to the ECE-R 44 standard.
You can obtain child seats with the “ISOFIX” attachment system from specialist
garages who will also installed it as well.
Fig. 172 Locking eyes
(ISOFIX system)
Fig. 173 The ISOFIX child
seat is pushed into the
mounting funnels
A
A
A
B
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
177
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Transporting children safely178
Complete installation instructions are enclosed with the child safety seat.
WARNING
• The locking eyes have just been developed for child safety seats which
use the “ISOFIX” system. You should therefore never attach other child
safety seats, seat belts or objects to the locking eyes - hazard!
• Ask a Škoda Service Partner whether a child seat which you bought for
another vehicle is recommended for use in a Škoda before using an “ISOFIX”
system.
• Certain child seats which use the “ISOFIX” system can be attached with
standard three-point seat belts. Please pay close attention to instructions
from the manufacturer of the child safety seat when installing and removing
the seat.
Note
• Child seats which use the “ISOFIX” system are currently available for children
weighing from 9 up to 18 kg. This corresponds to an age range of from 9 months to
4 years.
• The child seats can also be fitted with the “Top Tether” system ⇒ page 178.
Attaching child seat using the “Top Tether” system
IIn certain countries national legal provisions also require the equipment of the rear
seat with fixing eyes for child seat using the “Top Tether” system ⇒ fig. 174.
Always perform the installation and removal of the child seat using the “Top Tether”
system as stated in the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat.
WARNING
• Attach the child seats with the “Top Tether” system only to the points
provided for this purpose ⇒ fig. 174.
• On no account should you equip your vehicle, e.g. mount screws or other
anchorage points.
• Pay attention to the important safety information regarding the use of
child seats.
Note
Store the remaining part of the belt for the “Top Tether” system in a textile pocket,
which is located at the child seat.
Fig. 174 Rear seat: Top
Te t he r
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
178
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Intelligent Technology 179
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Driving Tips
Intelligent Technology
Electronic stability programme (ESP)*
General
General
The ESP aids you maintain control of your vehicle in situations in borderline driving
situations such as when negotiating a curve too fast. The risk of skidding is reduced
and your car thus offers greater driving stability depending on the conditions of the
road surface. This occurs at all speeds.
The following systems are integrated into the electronic stability programme:
• Electronic Differential Lock (EDL),
• Traction control system (TCS),
• Driver-steering recommendation,
• Antilock brake system (ABS),
• Brake Assist,
• Uphill-Start off-Assist.
Operating principle
The ESP switches on automatically when the engine is started and then conducts a
self-test. The ESP control unit processes data from the individual systems. It also
processes additional measurement data which are supplied by highly sensitive
sensors: the rotational velocity of the vehicle about its vertical axis, the lateral accel-
eration of the vehicle, the braking pressure and the steering angle.
The direction which the driver wishes to take is determined based on the steering
angle and the speed of the vehicle and is constantly compared with the actual
behaviour of the vehicle. If differences exist, such as the car beginning to skid, the
ESP will automatically brake the appropriate wheel.
The car is stabilised again by the forces which take effect when the wheel is braked.
Intervention into the brake system takes place primarily on the outer front wheel of
a vehicle which tends to oversteer (tendency for the rear of the vehicle to break
away) while occurs this is on the inner rear wheel of a vehicle which tends to under-
steer (tendency to shift out of the curve). This braking control cycle is accompanied
by noises.
The ESP operates in combination with the ABS ⇒ page 183. If there is a fault in the
ABS system, the ESP also does not operate.
The ESP warning light ⇒ page 32 lights up in the instrument cluster when there is a
fault on the ESP.
Switching off
You can switch the ESP off and on again as you wish, by pressing the button
⇒ fig. 175. The ESP warning light ⇒ page 32 lights up in the instrument cluster
when the ESP is switched off.
The ESP should normally always be switched on. It may be good practice in certain
exceptional cases, such as when you wish to have wheel slip, to switch off the
system.
Examples:
Fig. 175 ESP switch
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
179
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Intelligent Technology180
• when driving with snow chains
• when driving in deep snow or on a loose surface
• when it is necessary to rock a car free when it has become stuck.
then you should switch on the ESP again.
WARNING
It is also not possible for the ESP to overcome the physical limits of the
vehicle. Even if a vehicle fitted with ESP you should still always adapt your
style of driving to the condition of the road surface and the traffic situation.
This particularly applies when driving on slippery and wet roads. The
increased safety offered must not tempt you to take greater risks than other-
wise - risk of an accident!
Note
• All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres in order to achieve problem-
free operation of the ESP. Differing rolling circumferences of the tyres can lead to an
undesirable reduction in the engine output.
• Changes to vehicle (e.g. on engine, on the brakes, on chassis or other assign-
ment of tyres and wheels) can influence the function of the ESP ⇒ page 228,
“Accessories, changes and replacement of parts”.
Electronic Differential Lock (EDS)*
The electronic differential lock prevents an individual wheel from
slipping.
Models fitted with ESP are equipped with electronic differential lock (EDL).
General
The EDL makes it much easier, and sometimes at all possible, to start off, accelerate
and climb a steep hill when the conditions of the road surface are unfavourable.
Operating principle
The EDL is activated automatically, that is without any action on the part of the
driver. It monitors the speeds of the driven wheels with the aid of the ABS sensors.
Should only one drive wheel begin spinning on a slippery surface there will be an
appreciable difference in the speed of the driven wheels. The EDL function brakes
the slipping wheel and the differential transmits a greater driving force to the other
driven wheel. This control process is also accompanied by noises.
Overheating of the brakes
The EDL switches off automatically if unusually severe stresses exist in order to
avoid excessive heat generation in the disc brake on the wheel which is being
braked. The vehicle can continue to be driven and has the same characteristics as a
vehicle not fitted with EDL.
The EDL switches on again automatically as soon as the brake has cooled down.
WARNING
• Depress the accelerator carefully when accelerating on uniformly slip-
pery road surfaces, such as ice and snow. The driven wheels might still spin
despite the EDL and affect the stability of the vehicle - risk of an accident!
• You should always adapt your style of driving to the condition of road
surface and to the traffic situation even when your vehicle is fitted with EDL.
The increased safety offered must not tempt you to take greater risks than
otherwise - risk of an accident!
Note
• If the ABS or ESP warning light comes on, this may also indicate a fault in the
EDL. Please have the car inspected as soon as possible by a specialist garage.
• Changes to vehicle (e.g. on engine, on the brakes, on chassis or other assign-
ment of tyres and wheels) can influence the function of the EDL ⇒ page 228,
“Accessories, changes and replacement of parts”.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
180
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Intelligent Technology 181
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Traction control system (TCS)
The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from spinning
when accelerating.
General
The TCS makes it much easier, and sometimes at all possible, to start off, accelerate
and climb a steep hill when the conditions of the road surface are unfavourable.
Operating principle
The TCS switches on automatically when the engine is started and then conducts a
self-test. The system monitors the speeds of the driven wheels with the aid of the
ABS sensors. If the wheels are spinning, the force transmitted to the road surface is
automatically adapted by reducing the engine speed. This occurs at all speeds.
The TCS operates in combination with the ABS ⇒ page 183. The TCS will not func-
tion if a fault exists in the ABS system.
The TCS warning light ⇒ page 31 lights up in the instrument cluster when there is a
fault on the TCS.
Switching off
You can switch the TCS off and on again as you wish by pressing the button
⇒ fig. 176. The TCS warning light ⇒ page 31 lights up in the instrument cluster
when the TCS is switched off.
The TCS should normally always be switched on. It may be good practice in certain
exceptional cases, such as when you wish to have wheel slip, to switch off the
system.
Examples:
• when driving with snow chains
• when driving in deep snow or on a loose surface
• when it is necessary to rock a car free when it has become stuck.
then you should switch on the TCS again.
WARNING
You should always adjust your style of driving to the conditions of the road
surface and the traffic situation. The increased safety offered must not tempt
you to take greater risks than otherwise - risk of an accident!
Note
• All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres in order to achieve problem-
free operation of the TCS. Differing rolling circumferences of the tyres can lead to
an undesirable reduction in the engine output.
• Changes to vehicle (e.g. on engine, on the brakes, on chassis or other assign-
ment of tyres and wheels) can influence the function of the TCS ⇒ page 228,
“Accessories, changes and replacement of parts”.
Driver-steering recommendation*
The driver-steering recommendation is an additional function of the electronic
stability programme (ESP). This function indicates to the driver in critical situations
by means of slight steering wheel impulses the direction evaluated by the system,
in which the vehicle must be steered, so that it stabilizes. The driver-steering
recommendation is active when braking sharply on different road surfaces and on
the right and left vehicle side.
Fig. 176 TCS switch
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
181
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Intelligent Technology182
WARNING
Even with this additional function the vehicle cannot be steered automati-
cally! The driver is furthermore fully reponsible for the steering of the
vehicle!
Brakes
What has a negative effect on braking efficiency?
Wear-and-tear
Wear-and-tear to the brake pads is greatly dependent on the operating conditions
of the vehicle and your style of driving. Particularly if you drive a great deal in towns
and over short distances or if you adopt a sporty style of driving, it may be neces-
sary to have the thickness of the brake pads inspected at a specialist garage
between the service inspections.
Wet roads or road salt
There may be a certain delay before the brakes take full effect under certain condi-
tions such as when driving through water, during heavy rain showers or after the
vehicle has been washed in an automatic vehicle wash, since the brake discs and
brake pads may be moist or even have a coating of ice on them in winter. You
should dry the brakes as soon as possible (by applying and releasing the brakes
several times, if the road conditions and the traffic situation allows it).
There also may be a certain delay before the full braking efficiency is available when
driving on roads which have been treated with road salt if you have not used the
brakes for some considerable time beforehand. The layer of salt on the brake discs
and brake pads must first be rubbed off when you apply the brakes.
Corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the bake pads occur if the vehicle has been
parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the braking system.
We recommend cleaning the brake discs by firmly applying the brakes at a fairly
high speed if you do not make much use of the braking system or if surface corro-
sion is present ⇒ .
Faults in the brake surface
If you notice that the braking distance has suddenly become longer and that the
brake pedal can be depressed further, it is possible that a brake circuit of the dual-
circuit brake system has failed. Drive, in such cases, to the nearest specialist garage
without delay in order to have the problem rectified. Drive at a reduced speed while
on your way to the dealer and adapt your style of driving to the higher brake pedal
pressure required.
Low brake fluid level
An insufficient level of brake fluid may result in problems in the brake system. The
level of the brake fluid is monitored electronically ⇒ page 34, “Brake system ”.
WARNING
• Only apply the brakes for the purpose of drying and cleaning the brake
discs if the traffic conditions permit this. Do not place any other road users
in jeopardy.
• When retrospectively mounting a front spoiler, solid wheel hubs etc. one
must ensure that the air supply to the front wheel brakes is not reduced
otherwise the braking system could run too hot.
• Allow for the fact that new brake pads do not achieve their full braking
efficiency until approximately 200 kilometres. New brake pads must be first
“run in” before they develop their optimal friction force. You can, however,
compensate for this slightly reduced braking force by increasing the pres-
sure on the brake pedal. This guideline also applies to any new brake pads
installed at a future date.
Caution
• Never allow the brakes to rub by applying slight pressure if you do not wish to
brake the vehicle. This causes the brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer
braking distance and excessive wear.
• Before negotiating a steep downhill section, please reduce your speed, shift
down into the next lower gear (manual gearbox) or select a lower driving stage
(automatic gearbox). This enables you to make full use of the braking power of the
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
182
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Intelligent Technology 183
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
vehicle and reduces the strain on the brakes. Any additional braking should be done
intermittently, not continuously.
Note
The hazard warning light system is switched on automatically in case of an emer-
gency braking at speeds greater than 60 km/h. The hazard warning light system is
switched off automatically after accelerating or driving off again.
Brake booster
The brake booster boosts the pressure which you generate with the brake pedal.
The necessary pressure is only generated when the engine is running.
WARNING
• Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary.
• The brake booster only operates when the engine is running. Greater
physical effort for braking is required when engine is switched off. Because
if you do not stop as normal, this can cause an accident and severe injuries.
Antilock brake system (ABS)
ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking.
General
The ABS contributes significantly to enhancing the active safety of your vehicle.
Compared to a car not fitted with the ABS brake system, you are able to retain
optimal steering ability even during a full brake application on a slippery road
surface because the wheels do not lock up.
You must not expect, however, that the braking distance will be shorter under all
circumstances as a result of the ABS. The braking distance for example on gravel
and fresh snow, when you should anyway be driving slowly and cautiously, will be
longer.
Operating principle
The brake pressure will be reduced on a wheel which is rotating at a speed which is
too low for the speed of the vehicle and tending to lock. This control cycle is notice-
able from a pulsating movement of the brake pedal which is accompanied by
noises. This is consciously intended to provide the driver with the information that
the wheels are tending to lock (ABS control range). You must always keep the brake
pedal depressed to enable the ABS to optimally control the brake application in this
braking range. Never interrupt the application of the brakes!
WARNING
• The ABS can also not overcome the physical limits of your vehicle. Please
do not forget this, particularly when driving on icy or wet road surfaces. If the
ABS is operating within the control range, adapt your speed immediately to
the conditions of the road surface and the traffic situation. The increased
safety offered by the ABS must not tempt you to take greater risks than
otherwise - risk of an accident!
• The normal braking system is still fully functional if there is an ABS fault.
Visit a specialist garage as quickly as possible and adjust your style of driving
to take account of the ABS fault in the meantime since you will not know how
great the damage is.
Note
• A warning light comes on if a fault occurs in the ABS system ⇒ page 32.
• Changes to vehicle (e.g. on engine, on the brakes, on chassis or other assign-
ment of tyres and wheels) can influence the function of the ABS ⇒ page 228,
“Accessories, changes and replacement of parts”.
Brake Assist*
During a severe brake application (e.g. if a hazard exists), the Brake Assist increases
the braking force and thus makes it possible to rapidly produce the pressure
required in the brake system.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
183
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Intelligent Technology184
The majority of drivers do apply the brakes in good time in dangerous situations,
but do not depress the brake pedal with sufficient pressure. Consequently, it is not
possible for the car to achieve its maximum deceleration and the car covers a
greater distance than necessary.
The Brake Assist is activated by the very quick operation of the brake pedal. In such
cases, a much greater braking pressure exists than during a normal brake applica-
tion. This makes it possible, even with a relatively low resistance of the brake pedal,
to produce an adequate pressure in the brake system in the shortest possible time,
which is required for maximum deceleration of the car. You must apply the brake
pedal firmly and hold it in this position in order to achieve the shortest possible
braking distance.
The Brake Assist is able to help you achieve a shorter braking distance in emergency
situations by rapidly producing the pressure required in the brake system. It fully
exploits the attributes of the ABS. After you release the brake pedal, the function of
the Brake Assist is automatically switched off and the brakes operate in the normal
way.
The Brake Assist is part of the ESP system. If a fault occurs in the ESP, the Brake Assist
function is also not available. Further information on the ESP ⇒ page 179.
WARNING
• The Brake Assist is also not able to overcome the physical limits of your
car in terms of the braking distance required.
• Adapt your speed to the conditions of the road surface and to the traffic
situation.
• The increased safety offered by the Brake Assist must not tempt you to
take a greater safety risk than otherwise.
Uphill-Start off-Assist*
The uphill-start off-assist makes it much easier to start off on steep hills. The system
assists a start off by holding the brake pressure produced by the brake pedal actu-
ation for approx. 2 seconds after releasing the brake pedal. The driver can therefore
move his foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and start off on the
slope, without having to actuate the handbrake. The brake pressure drops gradually
the more you operate the accelerator pedal. If the vehicle does not start off within
2 seconds, it starts to roll back.
The uphill-start off-assist is active in the event of a 5% slope, if the vehicle door is
closed. It is always active on slopes when in forward or reverse start off. When
driving downhill, it is inactive.
Electromechanical power steering
The power steering enables you to steer the vehicle with less physical force.
With the electromechanical power steering, the steering assist is automatically
adapted to the speed and to the steering angle.
It is still possible to fully steer the vehicle if the power steering fails or if the engine
is not running (vehicle being towed in). The only difference is that greater physical
effort is required.
If there is a fault in the power steering, a red or yellow warning light lights up in
the instrument cluster ⇒ page 29.
WARNING
Contact your specialist garage if the power steering is defective.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
184
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Intelligent Technology 185
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Tyre inflation pressure-control system*
The tyre inflation pressure-control system compares with the aid of the ABS sensors
the speed and also the rolling circumference of the individual wheels. If the rolling
circumference of a wheel is changed, the warning light lights up in the dash
panel insert ⇒ page 32. The rolling circumference of the tyre can change if:
• the tyre inflation pressure is too low,
• the structure of the tyre is damaged,
• the vehicle is loaded on one side,
• the wheels of an axle are loaded heavily (e.g. when towing a trailer or when
driving uphill or downhill),
• snow chains are mounted,
• the temporary spare wheel is mounted,
• one wheel per axle was changed.
Basic setting of tyre inflation pressure-control system
After changing the tyre inflation pressures or after changing one or several wheels,
a basic setting of the system must be carried out as follows.
• Inflate all tyres to the specified inflation pressure ⇒ page 222.
• Switch on the ignition.
• Press button  ⇒ fig. 177 for more than 2 seconds. While pressing the
button, the warning light lights up. At the same time the memory of the system
is erased and the new calibration is started, which is confirmed with an audible
signal and then the warning light goes out.
• If the warning light does not go out after the basic setting, there is a fault in
the system. Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest specialist garage.
Warning light lights up
If the tyre inflation pressure of at least one wheel is insufficiently inflated in compar-
ison to the stored basic value, the warning light ⇒ lights up.
Warning light flashes
If the warning light flashes, there is a system fault. Have the vehicle inspected by
your nearest specialist garage.
WARNING
• When the warning light lights up, immediately reduce the speed and
avoid sudden steering and brake manoeuvres. Please stop the vehicle
without delay at the nearest possible stop and inspect the tyres and their
inflation pressures.
• The driver is responsible for the correct tyre inflation pressures. For this
reason, the tyre inflation pressures must be checked regularly.
• Under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty style of driving, wintry or
unpaved roads) the warning light can be delayed or does not light up at
all.
• The tyre inflation pressure-control system does not take away the
responsability from the driver for the correct tyre inflation pressure.
Note
The tyre inflation pressure-control system:
• does not replace the regular tyre inflation pressure control, because the system
cannot detect an even pressure loss,
• cannot warn in case of very rapid tyre inflation pressure loss, e.g. in case of
sudden tyre damage. In this case carefully bring the vehicle to a standstill without
sudden steering movements and without sharp braking.
Fig. 177 Button for setting
the tyre inflation pressure
control value
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
185
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Intelligent Technology186
Diesel particle filter* (diesel engine)
In the diesel particle filter the resulting soot particles are collected
and burnt during the combustion of diesel fuel.
Code 7GG on the vehicle data sticker ⇒ fig. 178 indicates that your
vehicle is equipped with a diesel particle filter. The vehicle data sticker is
located on the floor of the luggage compartment and is also stated in the
Service schedule.
The diesel particle filter filters the soot particles completely from the exhaust. The
soot is collected in the diesel particle filter and burnt regularly. To assist this proce-
dure, we recommend not to drive regularly over short distances.
If the diesel particle filter is clogged or there is a fault, it is indicated by the warning
light .
WARNING
• The diesel particle filter achieves very high temperatures. Therefore do
not park at points where the hot filter comes into direct contact with dry
grass or other combustible materials - risk of fire!
• Never use additional underbody protection or corrosion-protection
agents for the exhaust pipes, catalytic converters, diesel particle filter or
heat shields. When the engine reaches its operating temperature, these
substances might ignite - risk of fire.
Note
When using diesel fuel with high sulphur content the life of the diesel particle filter
is clearly reduced. A specialist garage will be able to tell you which countries use
only diesel fuel with high sulphur content.
Fig. 178 Vehicle data sticker
WARNING (continued)
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
186
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Driving and the Environment 187
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Driving and the Environment
A new engine
The engine has to be run in during the first 1 500 kilometres.
Up to 1 000 kilometres
– Do not drive faster than 3/4 of the mamimum speed of the gear in use,
that is 3/4 of the maximum permissible engine speed.
– Do not use full throttle.
– Avoid high engine revolutions.
– Do not tow a trailer.
From 1 000 up to 1 500 kilometres
– Increase the power output of the engine gradually up to the full
speed of the gear engaged, that is up to the maximum permissible
engine revolutions.
During the first operating hours the engine has higher internal friction than later
until all of the moving parts have harmonized. The driving style which you adopt
during the first approx.1 500 kilometres plays a decisive part in the success of
running in your car.
You should not drive at unnecessarily high engine revolutions even after the
running-in period is complete. The maximum permissible engine speed is marked
by the beginning of the red zone on the scale of the revolutions counter. Shift up
into the next higher gear on a vehicle fitted with manual gearbox before the red
zone is reached. Extremely high engine revolutions are automatically governed, by
the way.
For a vehicle fitted with a manual gearbox the converse situation also applies: Do
not drive at engine revolutions which are too low. Shift down as soon as the engine
is no longer running smoothly.
Caution
All the speed and engine revolution figures apply only when the engine is at its
normal operating temperature. Never rev up an engine which is cold, neither when
the vehicle is stationary nor when driving in individual gears.
For the sake of the environment
Not driving at unnecessarily high engine revolutions and shifting to a higher gear as
early as possible are ways to minimise fuel consumption and operating noise levels
and protects the environment.
New tyres
New tyres have to be “run in” since they do not offer optimal grip at first. You should
take account of this fact for the first 500 kilometres and drive particularly carefully.
New brake pads
Allow for the fact that new brake pads do not achieve their full braking efficiency
until approximately 200 kilometres. New brake pads must be first “run in” before
they develop their optimal friction force. You can, however, compensate for this
slightly reduced braking force by increasing the pressure on the brake pedal.
This guideline also applies to any new brake pads installed at a future date.
During the running-in period, you should avoid excessive stresses on the brakes.
This includes, for example, violent braking, particularly from very high speeds, and
also when crossing mountain passes.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
187
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Driving and the Environment188
Catalytic converter
Proper operation of the emission control system (catalytic converter)
is of major significance for driving your vehicle in an environmen-
tally conscious way.
Please refer to the following guidelines.
– For vehicles with petrol engine only refuel with unleaded petrol
⇒ page 205, “Grades of petrol”.
– Never run the fuel tank completely empty.
– Do not switch off the ignition while you are driving the vehicle.
– Do not pour too much oil into the engine ⇒ page 212, “Replenishing
engine oil”.
– Do not tow-start the vehicle over a distance of more than 50 metres
⇒ page 237, “Tow-starting and towing vehicle”.
If you drive your vehicle in a country in which unleaded petrol is not available, you
must have the catalytic converter replaced later when driving the vehicle into a
country in which use of a catalytic converter is mandatory.
WARNING
• In view of the high temperatures which may be produced in the catalytic
converter, one should always park a vehicle in such a way that the catalytic
converter cannot come into contact with easily flammable materials below
the vehicle - a risk of fire!
• Never use additional underbody protection or corrosion-protection
agents for the exhaust pipes, catalytic converters or heat shields. Such
substances might ignite when driving - risk of fire!
Caution
• Vehicles fitted with catalytic converter should never be allowed to let the fuel
tank to run completely empty. An irregular fuel supply can result in poor ignition or
misfiring. Unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system and damage the catalytic
converter.
• Filling the tank even only once with leaded petrol will result in the catalytic
converter being destroyed.
• If you detect misfiring, a drop in performance or irregular engine running when
driving, reduce your speed immediately and have the vehicle inspected by the
nearest specialist garage. The symptoms described may be caused by a fault in the
ignition system. Unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system and damage the
catalytic converter.
For the sake of the environment
Even if the exhaust system is operating properly, a sulphur-like exhaust odour may
be produced under certain operating conditions of the engine. This depends on the
sulphur content of the fuel. It is often sufficient to refuel with unleaded premium-
grade petrol of a different brand or at a different filling station.
Driving in an economical and environmentally
conscious manner
General
Your personal style of driving is a major factor.
Your fuel consumption, any pollution of the environmental and the wear-and-tear
to the engine, brakes and tyres, depend essentially on three factors:
• your personal style of driving,
• the conditions under which your vehicle is operated,
• technical aspects.
You can easily improve your fuel economy by 10 - 15 percent by driving in an
economical way with foresight. This section is intended to provide you with a
number of tips on how to protect the environment and at the same time save
money.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
188
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Driving and the Environment 189
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The fuel consumption can naturally also be influenced by factors which are beyond
the driver's control. It is, for example, normal for the fuel consumption to increase
in winter and under worsened conditions such as poor road conditions, towing a
trailer, etc.
The technical requirements for low fuel usage and economic efficiency of the
vehicle have already been built into the vehicle at the works. Special attention has
been given to minimising negative effects on the environment. It is necessary to
take note of the guidelines given in this chapter in order to make best use of these
characteristics and to maintain their effectiveness.
The optimal engine speed should be obtained when accelerating, in order to avoid
a high fuel consumption and resonance of the vehicle.
Looking ahead when driving
A vehicle's highest fuel consumption occurs it accelerates.
Avoid accelerating and braking unnecessarily. If you drive with forsight you will not
need to brake so often and will also then not have to accelerate so much. Let your
vehicle coast to a stop, for example, if this is possible, when you see that the next
set of traffic lights is at red.
Shifting gears and saving energy
Shifting up early saves on fuel.
Manual gearbox
– Drive no more than about one length of your vehicle in first gear.
– Always shift up into the next higher gear at approx. 2 000 to 2 500 revs.
Automatic gearbox
– Depress the accelerator pedal slowly. Do not depress it beyond the
kickdown position, however.
An effective way of achieving good fuel economy is to shift up early. You will
consume more fuel if you drive at unnecessarily high revolutions in any given gear.
The ⇒ fig. 179 shows the ratio of fuel consumption to the speed of your vehicle in
the relevant gears. Fuel consumption in 1st gear is the highest, while that in 5th or
the 6th gear is the lowest.
Only depress the accelerator pedal slowly if your vehicle is fitted with an automatic
gearbox in order to automatically select an economic driving programme. You will
achieve good fuel economy by shifting up early and shifting down late.
Note
Also use the information supplied by the multi-functional indicator* ⇒ page 14.
Fig. 179 Fuel consumption
in litres/100 km. and speed in
km/h.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
189
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Driving and the Environment190
Avoiding full throttle
Driving more slowly means saving fuel.
Sensitive use of the accelerator will not only significantly reduce fuel consumption
but also positively influence environmental pollution and wear of your vehicle.
You should avoid fully exploiting the top speed of your vehicle wherever possible.
Fuel consumption, pollutant emissions and vehicle noises increase disproportion-
ally at high speeds.
The ⇒ fig. 180 shows the ratio of fuel consumption to the speed of your vehicle.
You will cut your fuel consumption by half if you only make use three-quarters of
the possible top speed of your vehicle.
Reducing idling
Idling also costs fuel.
It is worthwhile switching off the engine in a traffic jam or when waiting at a level
crossing or at traffic lights with a lengthy red phase. Even after just 30 - 40 seconds
you will have saved more fuel than that is needed when you start the engine up
again.
If an engine is only idling it takes much longer for it to reach its normal operating
temperature. Wear-and-tear and pollutant emissions, though, are particularly high
in the warming-up phase. This is why you should drive off right after starting the
engine. Do avoid high engine revolutions at this time, however.
Regular servicing
A poorly tuned engine consumes an unnecessarily high amount of
fuel.
Having your vehicle serviced regularly at a specialist garge enables you to satisfy
one of the requirements for economical motoring even before you set off on your
journey. Keeping your vehicle properly serviced not only has a positive effect on the
safety of your vehicle and maintaining its value, but also saves on fuel.
A poorly tuned engine can result in a fuel consumption which is 10% higher than
normal.
The foreseen maintenance work should be undertaken exactly according to the
Service schedule by a specialist garage.
Also check the oil level after refueling. Oil consumption is dependent to a consid-
erable extent on the load and speed of the engine. Oil consumption could be as
high as 0.5 litres/1 000 km depending on your style of driving.
It is quite normal that a new engine has a higher oil consumption at first, and
reaches its lowest level only after a certain running in time. It is therefore not
possible to correctly assess the oil consumption of a new vehicle until after you
have driven about 5 000 km.
For the sake of the environment
• You can achieve additional improvements in your fuel economy by using high-
lubricity oils.
• Check the ground below your car at regular intervals to detect any leakages in
good time. Please have your vehicle inspected by a specialist garge if you find any
stains caused by oil or other fluids on the floor.
Fig. 180 Fuel consumption
in litres/100 km. and speed in
km/h.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
190
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Driving and the Environment 191
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Avoid driving short distances
Short distances result in an above-average high fuel consumption.
– Avoid driving a distance of no more than 4 km if the engine is cold.
The engine and catalytic converter must first have reached their optimal operating
temperature in order to effectively reduce fuel consumption and pollutant emis-
sions.
The cold engine vehicle consumes approx. 15 - 20 litres/100 km of fuel immediately
after starting. Fuel consumption drops to 10 litres/100 km after just 1 kilometre. The
engine reaches its operating temperature (outside temperature and engine
dependent) only after about 4 to 10 kilometres and the fuel consumption then
stabilizes. You should therefore avoid driving short distances whenever possible.
An important factor in this connection is also the ambient temperature. The
⇒ fig. 181 shows the different fuel consumptions for the same distance, on the one
hand at +20°C and on the other hand at -10°C. Your vehicle has a higher fuel
consumption in winter than in summer.
Checking tyre inflation pressures
Tyres which are correctly inflated save fuel.
Always ensure that your tyres are inflated to the correct pressure at all times. The
rolling resistance will be increased if the tyre filling pressure is too low. This will not
only increase fuel consumption but also tyre wear and the driving behaviour will
worsen.
Always check the inflation pressure of the tyres when cold.
Do not drive with winter tyres all year round for this costs about 10 % more fuel.
Winter tyres are also louder.
No unnecessary ballast
Transporting ballast costs fuel.
The fact that every kilogram of extra weight increases your fuel consumption
means that it is worth taking a look in the luggage compartment to avoid trans-
porting any unnecessary ballast.
It is particularly in town traffic, when one is accelerating quite often, that the vehicle
weight will have a significant effect upon the fuel consumption. A rule of thumb
here is that an increase in weight of 100 kilograms will cause an increase in fuel
consumption of about 1 litre/100 kilometres.
You may frequently also leave a roof rack fitted on just out of convenience,
although you no longer need it. The increased aerodynamic drag of your vehicle
causes it to use about 10% more fuel than normal at a speed of 100 - 120 km/h,
even when you are not carrying a load on the roof.
Saving electricity
Generating electricity costs fuel.
– Switch off electrical components as soon as you no longer need them.
When the engine is running, the alternator generates and supplies electrical power.
The greater the load on the alternator as a result of having a large number of elec-
trical components switched on, the more fuel will be consumed for operating the
alternator.
Fig. 181 Fuel consumption
in litres/100 km at different
temperatures
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
191
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Driving and the Environment192
Keeping a log of your fuel consumption
If you really wish to keep a close check on your fuel consumption, it is best to enter
the figures in a logbook. This does not take much time but is a very worthwhile exer-
cise. It enables you to detect any change (positive and negative) at an early stage
and to take any appropriate action.
If you find that your fuel consumption is too high, you should reflect on how, where
and in what conditions you have driven the vehicle since you last refuelled.
Environmental compatibility
Environmental protection has played a major role in the design, selection of mate-
rials and manufacture of your new Škoda. Particular emphasis has been paid to a
number of aspects, including:
Design measures
• joints designed to be easily detached,
• simplified disassembly due to the modular structure system,
• improved purity of different classes of materials,
• identification of all plastic parts in accordance with VDA Recommendation 260,
• reduced fuel consumption and exhaust emission CO
2
,
• minimum fuel leakage during accidents,
• reduced noise.
Choice of materials
• extensive use of recyclable material,
• air conditioning filled with CFC-free refrigerant,
• no cadmium,
• no asbestos,
• reduction in the “vaporisation” of plastics.
Manufacture
• solvent-free cavity protection,
• solvent-free protection of the vehicle for transportation from the production
plant to the customer,
• the use of solvent-free adhesives,
• no CFCs used in the production process,
• without use of mercury,
• use of water-soluble paints.
Motoring abroad
General
Other circumstances may exist abroad.
It is also possible, in certain countries, that the Škoda Service Partner network is
limited or has not been established yet. This is the reason why obtaining certain
spare parts may be somewhat complicated and specialist garage personnel may
only be able to make limited repairs. Škoda Auto a.s. in the Czech Republic and rele-
vant importers are happy to provide information about technical aspects of the
vehicle, required maintenance work and possibilities for getting repairs done.
Unleaded petrol
A vehicle fitted with a petrol engine must always be refuelled with unleaded petrol
⇒ page 188. The automobile associations can provide you with information
regarding the locations of filling stations which offer unleaded petrol.
Headlight
The low beam of your headlights is set asymmetrically. It illuminates the side of the
road on which you are driving to a greater extent. If you drive abroad on the other
side of the road, you will dazzle oncoming traffic.
In order to prevent the dazzling of oncoming traffic, it is necessary that an adjust-
ment of the headlights is carried out by your Škoda Service Partner.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
192
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Driving and the Environment 193
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The adaptation of the headlight with Xenon lights* (applies only to vehicles which
are designed for driving right and left) is performed in the menu Automatic light
(Automat. Lights) in main menu of the Information Display* ⇒ page 19.
Avoiding damage to your vehicle
When driving on poor roads and lanes or when driving over kerbstones, steep
ramps etc., you must pay particular attention to ensuring that any low-slung parts
of the vehicle, such as spoiler and exhaust, do not touch the ground and get
damaged.
This particularly applies to models with a lowered suspension (sport suspension)
and also when your vehicle is fully laden.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
193
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Towing a trailer194
Towing a trailer
Towing a trailer
Technical requirements
The towing device must satisfy certain technical requirements.
Your vehicle is designed primarily for transporting persons and luggage. It can,
however, also be used for towing a trailer - provided certain technical equipment is
fitted.
If your vehicle has already been supplied with a factory-fitted towing device then
everything that is necessary for towing a trailer in technical terms, and in terms of
the law, has already been taken into account.
Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin power socket for the electrical connection
between the vehicle and trailer. If the trailer which you wish to tow has a 7-pin
connector, you can use a suitable adapter
14)
from Škoda original accessories.
This work must be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications
if a towing device is retrofitted.
Škoda Service Partners are familiar with details relating to retrofitting a towing
device and for any necessary modifications to the cooling system.
WARNING
We recommend that you have the towing device from Škoda original acces-
sories installed by a Škoda Service Partner. He is familiar with all the relevant
details relating to retrofitting such equipment. There is a risk of an accident
if the towing device is not properly fitted!
General Maintenance
There are a number of points to pay attention to when towing a
trailer.
Trailer load
The permissible trailer load must on no account be exceeded.
You can negotiate appropriately steeper inclines and descents if you do not make
full use of the permissible trailer load.
The trailer loads specified only apply for altitudes up to 1 000 metres above mean
sea level. The fact that the engine power output drops with increasing height due to
a lowering of air pressure and thus the ability to climb, means that the towed weight
must be reduced by 10% for every further increase of 1 000 metres in height above
sea level. The towed weight is the weight of the (laden) vehicle and the (laden)
trailer together. One should take this into account before driving up to higher alti-
tudes.
The trailer and drawbar load information on the type plate of the towing
device are merely test data for the towing device The data relating to your
vehicle, which is often less than this test data, can be found in your vehicle
registration documents.
Distribution of the load
Distribute the load in the trailer in such a way that any heavy items are located as
close as possible to the axle. Secure the items to prevent them slipping.
Tyre inflation pressure
Select the tyre inflation pressure on your vehicle for that of “fully laden”,
⇒ page 222. The inflation pressure of the tyres fitted to the trailer adjust in accord-
ance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
Exterior mirrors
You have to have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see the
traffic behind the trailer with the standard rear-view mirrors. Both exterior mirrors
14)
In some countries the adapter is supplied with the towing device.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
194
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Towing a trailer 195
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
should be attached to folding arms. Adjust the mirrors so that they provide you with
an adequate field of view to the rear.
Headlights
Before starting off with a hitched trailer, also check the setting of the headlights.
Alter the setting as necessary with the aid of the headlight beam adjuster
⇒ page 59, “Headlamp range adjustment* ”.
Detachable ball head
The ball rod is detachable on vehicles which feature a factory-fitted towing device.
It is stowed together with separate fitting instructions in the spare wheel well in the
luggage compartment of the vehicle.
Further information on the towing device ⇒ page 196.
Note
• We recommend that you also have your vehicle inspected between service
intervals if you tow a trailer frequently.
• The handbrake on the towing vehicle must be put on when coupling and
decoupling the trailer.
Driving Tips
Particular caution is required when towing a trailer.
– Do not, as far as possible, drive with your vehicle unladen and the
trailer laden.
– Do not make full use of the legal maximum speeds. This applies in
particular to downhill sections.
– Apply the brakes in good time.
– Keep a check on the coolant temperature gauge if the outside temper-
ature is high.
Distribution of weight
The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the trailer
is laden. Maintain a particularly low speed if you cannot avoid driving with this
combination.
Driving speed
Do not drive faster than 80 km/hour for safety reasons. This also applies for coun-
tries in which higher speeds are allowed.
The fact that the driving stability of the vehicle + trailer combination reduces with
increasing speed means that the legally allowed speed should not be used when
there are unfavourable road, weather or wind conditions, particularly near accident
black spots.
You must always reduce your speed immediately as soon as you detect even just
the slightest swaying of the trailer. On no account attempt to stop the trailer from
“swaying” by accelerating.
Apply the brakes in good time! If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake, apply the
brakes gently at first and then brake firmly. This will avoid brake jolts resulting from
the trailer wheels locking. Shift down gears in good time before negotiating a down-
hill section to allow the engine to also act as a brake.
Engine overheating
Please keep a check on the coolant temperature gauge if you have to negotiate a
lengthy slope in a low gear at a high engine speed when the outside temperature is
very high ⇒ page 11, “Coolant temperature gauge”.
If the needle of the coolant temperature gauge moves into the right-hand area or
even the red area of the scale, reduce your speed immediately. Stop and switch off
the engine if the warning light in the instrument cluster begins flashing. Wait a
few minutes and check the level of coolant in the coolant expansion bottle
⇒ page 214, “Inspecting the coolant level”.
Please refer to the following guidelines ⇒ page 31, “Coolant temperature/ Coolant
quantity ”.
The coolant temperature can be reduced by switching on the heating.
Any increase in the cooling effect of the coolant fan through shifting down a gear
and increasing the engine speed is not possible since the fan speed is independent
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
195
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Towing a trailer196
of the engine speed. One should also not drop a gear for this reason when towing
a trailer as long as the engine can manage the slope without any drop in speed.
Detachable towing device*
The detachable ball head of the towing device is stowed in a box for the car tool kit
in the spare wheel well in the luggage compartment.
An instruction for correct installation and removal of the ball head of the towing
device is supplied with the ball head
Inspect the ball head to ensure that it is properly locked each time before setting off.
The inspection is performed by turning the closed locking lever downwards. If the
locking lever can only be turned around a small angle (approx. 5°), the locking
mechanism is O.K. After the inspection pull the locking lever back again to its stop.
The towing device must not be used, if it does not wish to close or the locking lever
turns slightly in the closed position.
WARNING
Do not use any aids or tools for installing or removing the ball head. This
might result in damage to the locking mechanism to the extent that the
safety of the towing device is no longer assured - risk of an accident.
Note
• Do not carry out any modifications or repairs to the ball head or to any other
components on the towing device.
• Contact a specialist garage if you encounter any problems using the device.
• Never unlock the ball head with a trailer coupled to it.
• You should take off the ball head if you drive without towing a trailer. Inspect
whether the end cover properly seals off the mounting shaft.
• Remove the ball head beforehand if you wish to clean your vehicle using a
steam jet. Ensure that the end cover properly seals the mounting shaft.
• It is recommended to wear gloves when installing and removing.
Fig. 182 Detachable ball
head
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
196
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle 197
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
General Maintenance
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle
General
Proper care retains the value of your vehicle.
Regular and proper care retains the value of your vehicle. It may also be one of the
requirements for the acceptance of warranty claims relating to corrosion damage
and paint defects on the bodywork.
We recommend using a preservative from Škoda genuine accessories offered by
your Škoda dealer. Please follow the instructions for use on the package.
WARNING
• Care products may be harmful to your health if not used according to the
instructions.
• Always store care products in a safe place, out of the reach of children -
risk of poisoning!
For the sake of the environment
• Always select environmentally-friendly products when purchasing vehicle care
products.
• Do not dispose of the packages with residues of care products in domestic
waste.
Care of the exterior of vehicle
Washing the vehicle
Frequent washing protects your vehicle.
The best protection for your vehicle against harmful environmental influences is
frequent washing and wax treatment. How often you should wash your vehicle
depends on a wide range of factors, such as:
• Frequency of use,
• The parking situation (garage, below trees etc.),
• Season of the year,
• Weather conditions,
• Environmental influences.
The longer insect residues, bird droppings, tree sap, road and industrial dust, tar,
soot particles, road salt and other aggressive deposits remain adhering to the paint-
work of your vehicle, the more detrimental their destructive effect can be. High
temperatures, such as those caused by intensive sun's rays, accentuate this caustic
effect.
It may therefore be necessary, in certain circumstances, to wash the car once a
week. It may also be sufficient, however, to wash the car once a month followed
by appropriate wax treatment.
It is essential to also thoroughly wash the underside of your vehicle at the end of
the winter road salting and gritting period.
WARNING
When washing your vehicle in the winter: Water and ice in the brake system
can affect the braking efficiency - risk of accident!
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
197
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle198
Automatic vehicle wash systems
The paintwork of the vehicle is sufficiently resistant that the vehicle can be washed
normally in automatic vehicle wash plants without any problem. The actual stress
to which the paintwork is subjected, however, depends greatly on the design of the
vehicle wash system, the filtering of the water and the type of washing and care
products used. If the paintwork of your vehicle appears mat after being washed or
even has scratches, point this out to the operator of the vehicle wash plant. Use a
different vehicle wash plant, if necessary.
There are no particular points to note before washing your vehicle in such a plant
other than the usual precautionary measures (closing windows and sliding/tilting
roof, moving any factory-fitted aerials down flat against the bodywork, etc.).
If you have any particular attached parts fitted to your car - such as spoiler, roof rack
system, two-way radio aerial - it is best to first of all consult the operator of the car
wash plant.
It is important to degrease the lips of the windscreen wiper rubbers after passing
through the automatic vehicle wash system.
Caution
Do not screw the swivelling down roof aerial tight before washing the vehicle in an
automatic vehicle wash system - risk of damage!
Washing vehicle by hand
It is important to first soften the dirt with plenty of water and rinse it off as thor-
oughly as possible before washing your vehicle by hand.
One should then clean the vehicle using a soft washing sponge, washing glove or
a washing brush and only slight pressure. Work from the top to the bottom -
beginning with the roof. Only place slight pressure on the vehicle paintwork during
cleaning Only use a car shampoo for stubborn dirt.
Wash out the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals.
Clean wheels, door sills and similar parts last. Use a second sponge for such areas.
Rinse off the vehicle well after giving it a wash and dry it off using a chamois leather.
WARNING
• The ignition should always be switched off when you wash your vehicle -
risk of accident!
• Protect your hands and arms from sharp-edged metal parts when you
are cleaning the underfloor, the inside of the wheel housings or the wheel
trims - risk of cuts.
Caution
• Do not wash your vehicle in bright sunlight - risk of paint damage.
• Ensure that the jet of water is not aimed directly at the locks or at the door and
panel joints if you spray your vehicle in winter down with a hose - risk of freezing.
• Do not use any insect sponges, rough kitchen sponges or similar cleaning prod-
ucts - risk of damage to the surface of paintwork.
For the sake of the environment
Only wash your vehicle at washing bays specifically reserved for this purpose. This
ensures that no water which may be contaminated by oil flows into the sewage
system. It is not even permitted to wash your vehicle in certain areas except at such
specific washing bays.
Washing with a high-pressure cleaner
When you wash your vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, it is essential to comply
with the instructions for use of the cleaning equipment. This applies in particular to
the pressure used and to the spraying distance. Maintain a sufficiently large
distance to soft materials such as rubber hoses or insulation material.
On no account use circular spray nozzles or so-called dirt cutters!
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
198
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle 199
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
It is particularly important that you do not clean tyres with circular spray
jets. Visible but also invisible damage to tyres may occur even at a relatively
large spraying distance and if sprayed only for a short time - risk of accident!
Caution
The water containing wax must be no hotter than 60°C, otherwise the vehicle can
be damaged.
Wax treatment
Good wax treatment is an effective way of protecting the paintwork from harmful
environmental influences and minor mechanical damage.
The vehicle must be treated with a high-quality hard wax polish at the latest, when
no more drops form on the clean paintwork.
A new layer of a high-quality hard wax polish can be applied to the clean bodywork
after it has dried thoroughly. Even if you use a wax preserver regularly we still
recommend that you treat the paintwork of the vehicle at least twice a year with
hard wax.
Caution
Never apply wax to the windows.
Polishing
Polishing is only necessary if the paintwork of your vehicle has become unattractive
and if it is no longer possible to achieve a gloss with wax preservers.
You must treat the paintwork with a wax preserver if the polish you use does not
contain any preserving elements ⇒ page 199.
We recommend using a preservative from Škoda genuine accessories offered by
your Škoda dealer.
Caution
• You must not treat mat painted parts or plastic with polishing products or hard
wax.
• Do not polish the paintwork of the vehicle in a dusty environment, otherwise
the paintwork can be scratched.
Chrome parts
First clean the chrome parts with a damp clotch and then polish them with a soft,
dry cloth. If it does not prove to be adequate, use a chrome care product from
Škoda original accessories.
Caution
Do not polish the chrome parts in a dusty environment, otherwise they can be
scratched.
Paint damage
Slight damage to paintwork such as scratches, scuffs or traces of chip damage must
be touched up immediately with paint (Škoda painting pen) before any corrosion
can result. You can of course have this work carried out by a Škoda Service Partner.
Škoda Service Partners have a range of matching touch-up pens or spray cans
available in the colour of your vehicle.
The paint number of the original paintwork of your vehicle is indicated on the
vehicle data sticker ⇒ page 255.
Any corrosion which has already have formed must be removed thoroughly. Apply
a corrosion protection primer and then the paint to the affected point. You can of
course have this work carried out by a Škoda Service Partner.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
199
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle200
Plastic parts
External plastic parts are cleaned by normal washing. Plastic parts and synthetic
leather can also be treated with special solvent-free plastic cleaning agents if a
damp cloth is not sufficient. Paint care products are not suitable for plastic parts.
Caution
Solvent-free cleaners attack the material and can damage it.
Windows
Only use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the windows and
mirrors. You should not move the ice scraper forward and backward but in one
direction on the window which you are cleaning in order to avoid any damage to
the surface of the glass.
You can best remove residues of rubber, oil, grease, wax or silicone by using a
special window cleaner or a special silicone remover.
You should also clean the windows regularly from the inside.
Do not use window leathers which you have used to polish the vehicle body to dry
off the windows. Residues of preservatives in the window leather can dirty the
window and reduce visibility.
Do not affix any stickers over the inside of the rear window to avoid damage to the
heating elements of the rear window heater.
We recommend using a preservative from Škoda genuine accessories offered by
your Škoda dealer.
Caution
Never remove snow or ice from the glass parts with warm or hot water - risk of
formation of cracks in the glass!
The headlight lenses
Please do not use any aggressive cleaning or chemical solvent products - risk of
damage to the plastic lenses Please use soap and clean warm water.
Caution
Never wipe the headlights dry and do not use any sharp objects for cleaning the
plastic lenses, this may result in damage to the protective paintwork and conse-
quently in formation of cracks on the headlight lenses, e.g through effect of chem-
ical products.
Door and window seals
The rubber seals on the doors, boot lid, bonnet and windows remain supple and
last longer if you treat them from time to time with a rubber care product (e.g. with
a spray with silicone-free oil). You also avoid premature wear of the seals and
prevent leakages in this way. It is also easier to open the doors. Rubber seals which
are well cared for also do not stick together in cold winter weather.
Locks
We recommend that you use the spray from Škoda original accessories with
regreasing and anticorrosive effect for de-icing locks.
Note
When washing your vehicle, ensure that as little water as possible gets into the
locks.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
200
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle 201
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Wheels
Steel wheels
You should also thoroughly wash the wheels and wheel trims when giving your
vehicle its regular wash. This prevents any brake dust, dirt and road salt from
sticking to the wheel hubs. You can remove stubborn brake abrasion adhering to
the wheels with an industrial cleaner. Touch up any damage to the paintwork on the
wheels before rust is able to form.
Light alloy wheels
Regular care of light alloy wheels is necessary in order to retain their decorative
appearance over long periods. It is particularly important to remove any road salt
and brake abrasion from light alloy wheels every two weeks, otherwise the surface
will suffer. Wash thoroughly and then treat the wheels with a protective product for
light alloy wheels which does not contain any acidic components. You should
provide the wheel hubs with a hard wax layer every three months. You must not use
any products which cause abrasion when treating the wheel hubs. Any damage to
the paint layer on the wheel hubs must be touched up immediately.
We recommend using a preservative from Škoda genuine accessories offered by
your Škoda dealer.
WARNING
One should remember when cleaning the wheels that moisture, ice and road
salt may adversely affect braking efficiency - risk of an accident!
Note
Severe layers of dirt on the wheels can also result in wheel imbalance. This may
show itself in the form of a wheel vibration which is transmitted to the steering
wheel which, in certain circumstances, can cause premature wear of the steering.
This means it is necessary to remove the dirt.
Underbody protection
The underside of your vehicle is protected for life against chemical and mechanical
influences.
One cannot, however, completely rule out damage to the protective layer when
driving so we recommend that you inspect the protective layer on the underside of
your vehicle and on the chassis at certain intervals - this is best done at the begin-
ning and end of the winter - and to touch up any damaged areas.
Škoda Service Partners have suitable spray products available as well as the neces-
sary equipment and are familiar with the instructions for use. It is therefore best to
have such touch-up work or additional corrosion protection measures carried out
by a Škoda Service Partner.
WARNING
Never use additional underbody protection or corrosion-protection agents
for the exhaust pipes, catalytic converters, diesel particle filter or heat
shields. When the engine reaches its operating temperature, these
substances might ignite - risk of fire!
Protection of hollow spaces
All the cavities of your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are protected for life
by a layer of protective wax applied in the factory.
This wax protection does not require to be inspected or re-treated. Please remove
any small amount of wax which flows out of the cavities at high temperatures with
a plastic scraper and clean the spot using petroleum cleaner.
WARNING
Safety and environmental protection regulations should observed when
using petroleum cleaner to remove wax - a risk of fire!
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
201
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle202
Engine compartment
Good corrosion protection is very important, particularly in winter when one often
drives over its salt-strewn roads. One should therefore clean the whole engine
compartment before and after the salt spreading period and treat with preservative
in order to prevent the salt from being destructive.
Škoda Service Partners have the cleaning agents and preservatives recommended
by the manufacturer and also the required equipment.
WARNING
• It is necessary to observe the guidelines given in the chapter before
working on the engine compartment ⇒ page 209, “Working in the engine
compartment”.
• Let the engine cool down before cleaning the engine compartment.
Caution
• Engine cleaning may be only be undertaken when the ignition is off.
• It is recommended to cover the generator before washing the engine compart-
ment.
For the sake of the environment
The dirty water produced by washing the engine has washed away petrol, and resi-
dues of grease and oil and should therefore be cleaned by an oil separator. This is
why engine washing should only be undertaken in a specialist garage or at a fueling
station (when these are fitted with the required equipment).
Care of the interior of vehicle
Plastic parts, artificial leather and cloths
You can clean plastic parts and artificial leather with a moist cloth. You should only
treat such parts with special solvent-free plastic cleaning and care products it
does prove to be adequate.
Upholstery cloth and cloth trim on the doors, luggage compartment cover, head-
liner etc. are best treated with special cleaning products, using if necessary a dry
foam and a soft sponge or brush.
We recommend using a cleaning product from Škoda genuine accessories offered
by your Škoda dealer.
Caution
Solvent-free cleaners attack the material and can damage it.
Fabric covers of electrically heated seats
Do not clean the seat covers moist as this may result in damage to the seat heating
system.
Clean such covers using special agents, for example dry foam.
Natural leather
Natural leather requires quite particular care and attention.
Leather should be treated from time to time according the following
guidelines depending on how much it is used.
Normal cleaning
– Clean soiled areas of the leather with slightly moistened cotton or
woollen cloth.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
202
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle 203
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Severe soiling
– Clean severely soiled areas with a cloth dipped in a mild soapy solu-
tion (2 spoonfuls of natural soap to 1 litre of water).
– Ensure that the leather is not soaked through at any point and that no
water gets into the stitching of the seams.
– Dry off the leather with a soft, dry cloth.
Removing stains
– Remove fresh stains which are water-based (e.g. coffee, tea, juices,
blood etc.) with an absorbent cloth or household paper or use the
cleaner from the care set for a stain which has already dried in.
– Remove fresh stains on a fat base (e.g. butter, mayonnaise, chocolate
etc.) with an absorbent cloth or household cleaning paper or with the
cleaner from the care set if the stain has not yet penetrated into the
surface.
– Use a grease dissolver for grease stains which have dried in.
–Eliminate special stains (e.g. ball-point pens, felt pen, nail varnish,
dispersion paint, shoe cream etc.) with a special stain remover suit-
able for leather.
Leather care
– Treat the leather every six months with the leather care product avail-
able from Škoda Service Partners.
– Apply only a small amount of the care product.
– Dry the leather off with a soft cloth
It is best to consult your Škoda Service Partner if you have any questions regarding
cleaning and care of the leather interior.
Caution
• You must on no account treat the leather with solvents (e.g. gasoline, turpen-
tine), floor wax, shoe cream or such like.
• Avoid leaving your vehicle for lengthy periods in bright sunlight in order to
avoid bleaching the leather. If you leave your vehicle parked in the open for lengthy
periods, protect the leather from the direct rays of the sun by covering it over.
• Sharp-edged objects on items of clothing such as zip fasteners, rivets, sharp-
edged belts may leave permanent scratches or signs of rubbing on the surface.
Note
• Use a care cream with light blocker and impregnation effect regularly and each
time after cleaning the leather. The cream nourishes the leather, allows it to breathe
and keeps it supple and also provides moisture. It also creates surface protection.
• Clean the leather every 2 to 3 months, remove fresh soiling each time this
occurs.
• Remove fresh stains such as those from ball-point pens, ink, lipstick, shoe
cream etc., as quickly as possible.
• Care also for the leather dye. Refreshen areas which have lost their colour with
a special coloured leather cream as required.
• The leather is a natural material with specific properties. During the use of the
vehicle, small optical changes can occur on the leather parts of the covers (e. g
wrinkles as a result of the stress of the covers).
Seat belts
– Keep the seat belts clean!
– Wash seat belts which have become soiled using a mild soapy solu-
tion.
– Inspect the seat belts regularly to ensure they are in good condition.
Belt webbing which has become severely soiled may prevent the inertia reel from
reeling up the belt properly.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
203
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle204
WARNING
• The seat belts must not be removed for cleaning.
• Never clean the seat belts chemically as dry cleaning may destroy the
fabric. The seat belts must also not be allowed to come into contact with
corrosive liquids (such as acids etc.).
• Seat belts which have damage to the webbing, the connections, the
inertia reel or the lock should be replaced by a Škoda Service Partner.
• Inertia reel belts must be completely dried before being reeled up.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
204
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Fuel 205
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Fuel
Petrol
Grades of petrol
There are various grades of petrol. Please read ⇒ page 255, “Technical Data” in
order to know which grade of petrol your vehicle requires. You will also find the
same information affixed to the inside of the fuel filler flap of your vehicle
⇒ page 206, fig. 184.
A distinction is made between unleaded and leaded petrol. All Škoda vehicles with
petrol engines are equipped with a catalytic converter and must therefore be only
driven with unleaded petrol. Unleaded petrol complies with the standard
DINEN228.
The individual grades of petrol are distinguished by their octane number (RON).
Please adopt the following procedure if the grade of petrol which you normally use
is not be available in exceptional circumstances.
• Engines which need unleaded premium petrol 95 RON can also be run on
unleaded regular petrol 91 RON. This does, however, result in a slight loss in
performance.
If, in an emergency, the only fuel available is one which has a lower octane number
than that required by the engine then only drive at medium engine speeds and
lower engine loadings.
You can make unlimited use of fuel which has a higher octane number than that
required by the engine. There will, however, be no advantages gained by this in
terms of engine performance and fuel consumption!
The handling, performance and life of your engine are determined to a significant
extent by the quality of the fuel. Do not use any petrol additives. Use a fuel
complying with the standard.
You can find further information on refuelling ⇒ page 206, “Refuelling”.
Caution
• Filling the tank even only once with leaded petrol will result in the catalytic
converter being destroyed.
• Operating the engine with petrol of a low octane number can result in engine
damage at high revolutions or severe engine loading.
Diesel
Diesel fuel
Your vehicle can be operated with diesel fuel, which complies with the standard
DIN EN 590.
Fuel additives
You must not use fuel additives, so-called “flow improvers” (petrol and similar
products) in diesel fuel.
If the quality of the diesel fuel is poor, it is then necessary to drain the fuel filter
more often than stated in the Service schedule.
You can find information on refuelling ⇒ page 206, “Refuelling”.
Caution
• Use a fuel which complies with the standard DINEN590. Filling the tank even
only once, which does not comply with the standard, can result in damage to the
fuel system.
• Water which has collected in the fuel filter can result in engine problems.
• Your vehicle is not adapted for use of biofuel (RME), therefore this fuel must not
be refuelled and driven. Using this fuel (RME) can lead to damage to the engine or
the fuel system.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
205
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Fuel206
Operation in winter
Winter-grade diesel fuel
A different grade of diesel fuel is available at filling stations in winter than during the
summer. Using “summer-grade diesel fuel” at temperatures below 0°C can result in
operational problems because the diesel becomes viscous as a result of paraffin
separation.
It is therefore the case that DIN EN 590 prescribes diesel fuel class for certain
periods of the year which can also be purchased at the corresponding time during
the year. “Winter-grade diesel fuel” will still operate properly even at a temperature
of -20°C.
It is often the case in countries with different climatic conditions that diesel fuels
available have a different temperature characteristic. Škoda Service Partners and
filling stations in the country concerned will be able to provide you with informa-
tion regarding the diesel fuels available.
Prewarming fuel
The vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter prewarming system. This secures operation of
a vehicle using diesel fuel down to an environmental temperature of -25°C.
Caution
It is not permitted to add the various fuel additives on the market, including petrol,
to diesel fuel in order to improve its flow properties.
Refuelling
The filler flap is automatically unlocked or locked with the central locking.
Opening the fuel filler cap
– Press onto the left side of the fuel filler flap ⇒ fig. 183.
– Unscrew the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and place the fuel filler cap
from above on the fuel filler flap ⇒ fig. 184.
Closing fuel filler cap
– Screw on the cap by turning it to the right until it is heard to lock.
Fig. 183 Right rear side of
the vehicle: Fuel filler flap
Fig. 184 Filler flap with cap
unscrewed
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
206
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Fuel 207
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– Press the fuel tank flap closed.
The correct grade of fuel for your vehicle as well as the tyre size and inflation pres-
sures are stated on a sticker affixed to the inside of the fuel filler flap. Further infor-
mation on fuel ⇒ page 205.
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 60 litres.
WARNING
Pay attention to any legal requirements if you do carry a spare canister in the
vehicle. We do not recommend carrying any fuel canisters in your vehicle for
safety reasons. The canister can be damaged in the event of an accident and
fuel may leak out.
Caution
• Before refuelling it is necessary to switch off the auxiliary heating system (auxil-
iary heating and ventilation) *.
• Remove any fuel which has spilled onto the paintwork of your vehicle immedi-
ately - risk of paint damage!
• Vehicles fitted with catalytic converter should never be allowed to let the fuel
tank to run completely empty. An irregular supply of fuel to the engine can result in
misfiring and unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system, which may result in
overheating and damage to the catalytic converter.
• Make sure that the valve is not pressed into the filler tube when inserting the
pump nozzle into the filler tube. Otherwise you are unintentionally filling up the
volume, which in case of heat can cause an expansion of the fuel. This can lead to
an overflow of fuel or damage to parts of the fuel reservoir.
• The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first time,
provided the nozzle has been operated properly. Do not continue refuelling -
otherwise the expansion volume is filled up.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
207
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing208
Inspecting and Replenishing
Engine compartment
Bonnet remote release
Bonnet remote release
– Pull the unlocking lever below the dash panel on the driver's side
⇒ fig. 185.
The bonnet jumps out of its lock as a result of the spring force.
Opening and closing the bonnet.
Opening the bonnet
– Unlock the bonnet ⇒ fig. 185.
– Ensure that the arms of the windscreen wipers are correctly in place
against the windscreen before opening the bonnet otherwise
damage could occur to the paintwork.
– Press the locking button ⇒ fig. 186, the bonnet unlocks itself.
– Grasp the bonnet at the bottom part of the radiator grille and lift it
towards the top so that it is held opened by the gas pressure support.
Closing the bonnet
– You can overcome the force of the gas pressure support by pulling the
bonnet towards the bottom.
– Allow the bonnet to drop from a height of about 30 cm into the lock -
bonnet do not press down on it!
Fig. 185 Bonnet release
lever
Fig. 186 Radiator grille:
handle
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
208
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing 209
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
• Never open the bonnet if you see that steam or coolant is flowing out of
the engine compartment - risk of scalding! Wait long enough until the steam
or coolant has stopped escaping.
• For safety reasons, the bonnet must always be properly closed when
driving. One should therefore check that the lock has in fact engaged prop-
erly after closing the bonnet.
• Stop your vehicle immediately while driving if you notice that the lock is
not properly engaged and close the bonnet properly - risk of an accident!
Caution
Ensure that the arms of the windscreen wipers are correctly in place against the
windscreen before opening the bonnet otherwise damage could occur to the
paintwork.
Working in the engine compartment
Particular care is required when carrying out any work in the engine
compartment!
There is a risk of injuries, scalding, accidents and fire when working in the
engine compartment, e.g. inspecting and replenishing oil and other fluids. For
this reason, it is essential to comply with the warning instructions stated
below and with the general applicable rules of safety. The engine compart-
ment of your car is a hazardous area ⇒ .
WARNING
• Never open the bonnet if you see that steam or coolant is flowing out of
the engine compartment - risk of scalding! Wait long enough until the steam
or coolant has stopped escaping.
• Switch off the engine and pull out the ignition key.
• Apply the handbrake firmly.
• If your vehicle is fitted with a manual gearbox, move the gearshift lever
into Neutral, or if it is fitted with automatic gearbox, move the selector lever
into position P.
• Allow the engine to cool down.
• Keep children clear of the engine compartment.
• Never spill oil and other fluids over the hot engine. Such fluids (e.g. the
antifreeze contained in the coolant) may ignite!
• Avoid short circuits in the electrical system - particularly on the battery.
• Never place your hand into the radiator fan as long as the engine is still
warm. The fan might suddenly start running!
• Never open the cap of the coolant expansion bottle as long as the engine
is still warm. The cooling system is pressurized!
• Cover over the cap of the coolant expansion reservoir with a large cloth
when opening it as protection for your face, hands and arms from hot steam
or hot coolant.
• Do not let objects, such as e.g cleaning cloth or tools lie in the engine
compartment.
• If you wish to work under the vehicle, you must secure the vehicle from
rolling away and support it with suitable supporting blocks: the car jack is
not sufficient for this - risk of injury!
• In cases where it be necessary to carry out inspection work when the
engine is running there is an additional risk from rotating parts (e.g. the V-
ribbed belt, alternator, radiator fan) and from the high-voltage ignition
system. Please observe in addition the following.
− Never touch the electrical cables of the ignition system.
− Absolutely avoid any jewellery, loose items of clothing or long hair
from getting into the rotating parts of the engine - Hazard! Therefore
remove any jewellery beforehand, tie up your hair and wear tight fitting
clothing.
• Please also comply with the warning instructions stated below when
carrying out any essential work on the fuel system or on the electrical
system.
WARNING (continued)
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
209
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing210
− Always separate the car battery from the electrical system.
− Do not smoke.
− Never carry out any work close to naked flames.
− Always keep a working fire extinguisher at hand.
Caution
When replenishing fluids in the engine, always ensure that the fluids are on no
account mixed up. This may result in major operating problems and also vehicle
damage!
Overview of the engine compartment
The main inspection points
Fig. 187 Diesel engine 1.9 litre/77 kW
Coolant expansion bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil filler opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery (below a cover) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Note
The location of the inspection points in the engine compartment of petrol and
diesel engines is practically identical.
Engine oil
Engine oil specifications
The grade of engine oil should be selected in accordance with
precise specifications.
The engine of your vehicle has been factory-filled with a high-grade oil which you
can use throughout the year - except in extreme climatic regions.
You can mix various oils together with each other when refilling with oil. This does
not, however, apply for models with flexible service intervals (QG1).
Engine oils are, of course, undergoing continuous further development. Thus the
information stated in this Owner's Manual is only correct at the time of publication.
Škoda Service Partners are informed by Škoda Auto a.s. about current changes. This
why you should always have engine oil changed by your Škoda Service Partner.
The specifications (VW standards) stated in the following must be indicated sepa-
rately or together with other specifications on the bottle.
WARNING (continued)
A
1
214
A
2
220
A
3
212
A
4
211
A
5
215
A
6
216
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
210
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing 211
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Engine oil specifications for vehicles with fixed service intervals (QG2)
Engine oil specifications for models with flexible service intervals (QG1)
Caution
Only the above-mentioned oils may be used on vehicles with flexible service inter-
vals (QG1). We recommend always refilling with oil of the same specification since
this will maintain the properties of the oil. In exceptional cases, you must top up
only once engine oil complying with Specification VW 502 00 (only for petrol
engines) or Specification VW 505 01 (only for diesel engines) to maximum 0.5 litres.
You must not use other engine oils - risk of engine damage!
Note
• Before a long drive we recommend that you purchase and carry with you
engine oil which complies with the specification for your vehicle. Consequently,
you will always have the correct engine oil for refilling.
• We recommend using a preservative from the Škoda original accessories
offered by your Škoda dealer.
• For further information - see Service shedule.
Check engine oil level
The dipstick indicates the level of oil in the engine.
Checking the oil level
– Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface.
– Switch the engine off.
– Open the bonnet ⇒ page 209.
– Wait a few minutes and pull out the oil dipstick.
– Wipe off the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again fully.
– Then withdraw the dipstick again and read off the oil level.
Engine oil specifications
Petrol engines
VW 502 00
VW 504 00
ACEA A2
a)
, or A3
a)
a)
Only to be used in exceptional cases if the oils specified above are not available.
Diesel engines
VW 505 00
b)
VW 505 01
c)
VW 507 00
d)
ACEA B3
d)
, or B4
a)
b)
Only for the engine 2.0 l/125 kW TDI CR
c)
Only for engines without diesel particle filter ⇒ page 28.
d)
Only for engines diesel particle filter ⇒ page 28 and for the engine 2.0 l/125 kW TDI CR.
Engine oil specifications
Petrol engines
VW 503 00
a)
VW 504 00
a)
Only for the engine 1.4 l/92 kW TSI
Diesel engines
VW 506 01
b)
VW 507 00
b)
Only for engines without diesel particle filter ⇒ page 28.
Fig. 188 Dipstick
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
211
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing212
Oil level within range
–You must not top up the oil.
Oil level within range
–You may top up the oil. It is possible that the oil level may then be
within range after doing this.
Oil level within range
–You must top up the oil ⇒ page 212. It is sufficient, once this is done,
to keep the oil level is within range .
It is normal for the engine to consume oil. The oil consumption may be as much as
0.5 l/1 000 km depending on your style of driving and the conditions under which
you operate your vehicle. The oil consumption may be slightly higher than this
during the first 5 000 kilometres.
One should therefore check the oil level at regular intervals, preferably every time
after the fuel tank is filled or after driving for long stretches.
We recommend maintaining the oil level within the range if the engine has been
operating at high loads, for example during a lengthy motorway trip during the
summer months, towing a trailer or negotiating a high mountain pass, but not
above this.
The warning light in the instrument cluster* will indicate ⇒ page 35, “Engine oil
level* ” whether the oil level is too low. In this case, check the oil level as soon as
possible. Top up with an appropriate quantity of oil.
Caution
• The oil level must on no account extend beyond the range . Danger of
damaging the catalytic converter.
• Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under the
conditions prevailing to top up with oil. Switch of the engine and contact and
obtain professional assistance from a specialist garage.
Replenishing engine oil
– Inspecting the engine oil level ⇒ page 211.
– Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening.
– Pour in a suitable grade of oil in portions of 0.5 litres ⇒ page 210.
– Inspect the oil level ⇒ page 211, “Check engine oil level”.
– Carefully screw on the cap of the filler opening and push the dipstick
in fully.
WARNING
• Avoid dripping oil onto hot parts of the engine when topping up will oil -
a risk of fire!
• Read and observe the warning notes ⇒ page 209, “Working in the engine
compartment” before working in the engine compartment.
For the sake of the environment
The oil level must on no account be above the range ⇒ page 211. Oil will other-
wise be drawn in through the crankcase ventilation and may pass through the
exhaust system to atmosphere. The oil may combust in the catalytic converter and
damage it.
Changing engine oil
The engine oil must be changed at the intervals stated in the Service schedule or
according to the service interval indicator ⇒ page 12, “Service Interval Display”.
WARNING
• Only carry out the engine oil change, if you have the required profes-
sional knowledge!
A
a
A
b
A
a
A
c
A
b
A
a
A
a
A
a
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
212
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing 213
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
• Read and observe the warning notes ⇒ page 209, “Working in the engine
compartment” before working in the engine compartment.
• Let the engine cool down - risk of burning from hot oil.
• Wear an eye protection - risk of caustic burns due to oil splashes.
• Oil is toxic! Store old oil in a safe place out of the reach of children and
unauthorized persons until you dispose of it properly.
Caution
You must not pour any additives into the engine oil - risk of engine damage!
Damage, which results from such product, are excluded from the warranty.
For the sake of the environment
• You must on no account pour oil into the ground or into the sewage system.
• In view of the problems involved in properly disposing of old oil, the material,
equipment and the knowledge required for such work, we recommend that you
have the oil and oil filter change carried out by your Škoda Service Partner.
Note
After your skin has come in contact with the oil, you must thoroughly wash your
skin.
Cooling system
Coolant
The job of the coolant is to cool the engine.
The cooling system does not require any maintenance under normal operating
conditions. The coolant consists of water with a concentration of coolant additive
of 40 %. This mixture not only provides antifreeze protection down to -25°C but
also protects the cooling and heating system from corrosion. It also prevents the
formation of scale and significantly increases the boiling point of the coolant.
You must therefore not reduce the concentration of antifreeze agent in the coolant
by adding water, also not during the summer months or in countries with a warm
climate. The concentration of coolant additive in the coolant must be at least
40%.
You can increase the amount of antifreeze in the coolant if a higher concentration
of antifreeze is necessary for climatic reasons but only up to 60% (antifreeze
protection down to approx. -40°C). The antifreeze protection tails off above that
concentration.
Vehicles exported to countries with a cold climate (e.g. Sweden, Norway, Finland)
are already factory-filled with a coolant which offers antifreeze protection down to
about -35°C. In these countries the concentration of coolant additive should be at
least 50 %.
Coolant
The cooling system is filled at the works with coolant (purple in colour), which
complies with the specification TL-VW 774 F.
We recommend that you use the same coolant additive - G12 PLUS (purple in
colour).
Please contact your Škoda Service Partner if you have any questions regarding the
coolant or if you wish to fill up with a different coolant.
Your Škoda Service Partner can also supply you with the correct coolant additives.
Caution
• Other coolant additives may cause operational problems which, in partic-
ular, involves significantly reducing the anticorrosion effect.
• Any faults or problems resulting from corrosion may cause a loss of
coolant and, as a consequence of this, result in major engine damage.
WARNING (continued)
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
213
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing214
Inspecting the coolant level
The coolant expansion bottle is located in the engine compartment on
the right.
– Switch the engine off.
– Open the bonnet ⇒ page 209, “Working in the engine compartment”.
– Check the level of coolant in the coolant expansion bottle ⇒ fig. 189.
The coolant level when the engine is cold must lie between the
(MIN) and (MAX) markings. The level may also rise slightly above
the (MAX) marking when the engine is warm.
If the coolant level in the reservoir is too low, this is indicated by the warning light
in the instrument cluster ⇒ page 31. We nevertheless recommend inspecting
the coolant level directly at the reservoir from time to time.
Loss of coolant
A loss of coolant is first and foremost an indication of a leak in the system. You
should not merely top up the coolant in the reservoir. It is also important to have
the cooling system inspected without delay by a specialist garage.
Losses can only occur through the pressure relief in the cap of the coolant expan-
sion bottle which is completely free of leaks if the coolant boils as a result of over-
heating and is forced out of the cooling system.
WARNING
Read and observe the warning notes ⇒ page 209, “Working in the engine
compartment” before working in the engine compartment.
Caution
One should contact a specialist garage as soon as possible if the source of over-
heating itself cannot be determined and removed, since there may be grave
damage to the engine.
Replenishing the coolant
– Switch the engine off.
– Allow the engine to cool down.
– Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion reservoir
⇒ fig. 189 and unscrew the cap carefully by turning it to the left
⇒ .
– Top up the coolant.
– Screw the cap tight until it is heard to lock.
The coolant which you use for replenishing the system, must comply with one
specific specification ⇒ page 213, “Coolant”. Do not use an alternative additive if
the coolant additive G12 PLUS is not available in exceptional cases. Just top up the
system with water and as soon as possible arrange adjustment to correct the mixing
ratio of water and coolant additive again by a specialist garage.
Only use fresh coolant for topping up the system.
Do not fill up over the “MAX” marking! Excess coolant which is heated up is forced
out of the cooling system through the pressure relief valve in the cap of the coolant
compensation bottle.
Wait until the engine has cooled down for a system which has suffered a major loss
of coolant before pouring in coolant. This is necessary to avoid engine damage.
Fig. 189 Engine compart-
ment: Coolant expansion
bottle
A
b
A
a
A
a
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
214
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing 215
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
• The cooling system is pressurized! Do not open the cap of the coolant
expansion bottle if the engine is still hot - risk of scalding!
• The coolant additive and thus all of the coolant is harmful to your health.
Avoid contact with the coolant. Coolant vapours are also harmful to the
health. It is important, therefore, to always safely store any coolant additive
in its original container out of the reach of children - risk of poisoning!
• If any splashes of coolant get into your eyes, rinse out your eyes immedi-
ately with clear water and contact a doctor as soon as possible.
• You should also consult a doctor without delay if you have inadvertently
swallowed coolant.
Caution
Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under the
conditions prevailing to top up with coolant. Switch of the engine and contact
and obtain professional assistance from a specialist garage.
For the sake of the environment
Do not re-use coolant if it is necessary to drain the coolant in the system. It should
be collected and disposed of in compliance with environmental protection
regulations.
Radiator fan
The radiator fan may switch on suddenly.
The radiator fan is driven by an electric motor and controlled according to the
coolant temperature.
The radiator fan may continue running for up to 10 minutes after the engine has
been switched off - even if the ignition is also off. It may also switch on suddenly
after a certain time, if
• the coolant temperature has risen because of an accumulation of heat or
• the warm engine compartment is heated up additionally by strong sunlight.
WARNING
You must therefore be aware when working in the engine compartment that
the fan may switch on suddenly - risk of injury!
Brake fluid
Inspecting the brake fluid level
The brake fluid reservoir is located on the left of the engine compartment.
The brake fluid reservoir on right-hand steering models is positioned on
the other side of the engine compartment.
– Switch the engine off.
– Open the bonnet ⇒ page 209, “Working in the engine compartment”.
– Inspect the brake fluid level in the reservoir ⇒ fig. 190. The level must
be between the “MIN” and “MAX” markings.
A slight drop in the fluid level results when driving due to normal wear-and-tear
and automatic adjustment of the brake pads, and is perfectly normal.
Fig. 190 Engine compart-
ment: Brake fluid reservoir
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
215
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing216
There may be an indication of a leak in the brake system, however, if the fluid level
drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below the “MIN” marking. A situ-
ation where the brake fluid level is too low is indicated by the warning light
lighting up in the instrument cluster ⇒ page 34. In this case stop immediately and
do not drive any further! Obtain professional assistance.
WARNING
• Read and observe the warning notes ⇒ page 209 before working in the
engine compartment.
• If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN marking, do not drive any
further - risk of accident! Contact a Škoda dealer to obtain professional
assistance.
Replacing brake fluid
Brake fluid absorbs moisture. This causes the fluid to absorb moisture from the
surrounding air over a period of time. Excessive water in the brake fluid may be the
cause of corrosion in the brake system. The water content also lowers the boiling
point of the brake fluid. This is why brake fluid must be replaced every two
years.
One may only use new genuine brake fluid from Škoda Auto a.s. The specification
for the brake fluid is “FMVSS 116 DOT 4”.
We recommend that you have the brake fluid replaced by a Škoda Service Partner
as part of an Inspection Service.
WARNING
• Using old brake fluid can result in severe stress on the brakes because of
the formation of vapour bubbles in the brake system. This greatly impairs
the braking efficiency and thus also the safety of your vehicle.
• Brake fluid is toxic! It must therefore be kept safely in closed original
containers and well away from children and unauthorized persons.
Caution
Brake fluid damages the paintwork of the vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
In view of the problems involved with proper disposal of brake fluid, the special
tools and the professional knowledge required, you should have the brake fluid
replaced by a Škoda Service Partner.
Battery
Working on the battery
Fig. 191 Engine compart-
ment: The battery
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
216
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing 217
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The battery is located in a plastic housing in the engine compartment or
in the left side of the luggage compartment.
Battery in the engine compartment
– Press the interlock on the side of the battery cover ⇒ page 216,
fig. 191, fold the battery cover out and pull it out.
– The installation of the battery cover takes place in the reverse order.
Battery in the luggage compartment
– You can open the compartment with the symbol
by turning the
securing pins e. g with a coin or using a flat screwdriver in direction of
arrow ⇒ fig. 192.
Removal and installation of the battery is not recommended since it can, under
certain circumstances, lead to major damage. Contact a specialist garage.
There is a risk of injuries, scalding, accidents and burns when carrying out any work
on the battery and on the electrical system. For this reason, it is essential to comply
with the warning instructions ⇒ stated below and with the general applicable
rules of safety.
WARNING
• The battery acid is strongly corrosive and must, therefore, be handled
with the greatest of care. Always wear protective gloves, eye and skin
protection when handling batteries. Corrosive fumes in the air irritate the
air passages and lead to conjunctivitis and inflammation of the air passages
in the lungs. Battery acid corrodes dental enamel and creates deep wounds
after contact with the skin which take a long time to heal. Repeated contact
with diluted acids causes skin diseases (inflammations, ulcers, slin cracks).
Acids coming into contact with water are diluted accompanied by significant
development of heat.
• Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the
battery vent openings. Protect the eyes with safety glasses or a shield! There
is the danger of suffering blindness! If any battery electrolyte gets into your
eye, rinse out your eye immediately with clear water for several minutes.
Contact a doctor without delay.
• Splashes of acid on your skin or clothes should be neutralised as soon as
possible using soap suds and then rinsed with plenty of water. Contact a
doctor immediately if you swallow battery electrolyte.
• Keep batteries out of the reach of children.
• Hydrogen is released when you charge a battery and a highly explosive
gas mixture is produced. An explosion can be caused through sparkling over
during unclamping or loosening of the cable plug while the ignition is on.
• Bridging of the poles will create a short circuit (e.g. through metal
objects, cables). Possible consequences of a short circuit: Melting of lead
struts, explosion and burning of the battery, jets of acid spurting out.
• It is prohibited to work with a naked flame and light, to smoke or to carry
out any activities which produce sparks. Avoid creating sparks when
working with cables and electrical devices. Strong sparking represents a risk
of injury.
• Before carrying out any work on the electrical system, switch off the
engine, the ignition as well as all electrical components and disconnect the
negative cable (-) on the battery. If you wish to replace a bulb it is sufficient
to switch off the appropriate light.
Fig. 192 Luggage compart-
ment: Battery behind the
cover
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
217
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing218
• Never charge a frozen or thawed battery - risk of explosion and caustic
burns! Replace a frozen battery.
• Never use a battery which is damaged - risk of explosion! Immediately
replace a damaged battery.
Caution
• You must only disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched off, otherwise
the electrical system (electronic components) of the vehicle may be damaged.
When disconnecting the battery from the electrical system of the vehicle, first
disconnect the negative terminal (-) of the battery. Then disconnect the positive
terminal (+).
• When reconnecting the battery, first connect the positive terminal (+) and only
then the negative terminal (-) of the battery. You must on no account connect the
cables wrongly - risk of a cable fire.
• Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the vehicle body
otherwise damage could occur to the paintwork.
• Do not place the battery in direct daylight in order to protect the battery
housing from the effects of ultra-violet light.
For the sake of the environment
A removed battery is a special type of waste which is harmful to the environment -
contact your specialist garage regarding disposing of the battery.
Note
Please also refer to the guidelines ⇒ page 220, also after connecting the battery.
Battery with a charge level indicator, the so-called magic eye
There is a so-called magic eye ⇒ fig. 193 located on the top of the battery. The
“magic eye” changes its colour in line with the charge state of and electrolyte level
in the battery.
Air bubbles can influence the colour of the “magic eye”. For this reason carefully
knock on the “magic eye” before carrying out the check.
• Green colour - the battery is adequately charged.
• Dark colour - the battery has to be charged
• Colourless or yellow colour - have the battery checked by a Škoda dealer.
Batteries, which are more than 5 years old, must be replaced. We recommend you
have the electrolyte level inspected and adjusted to the correct level or the battery
replaced if necessary by a Škoda Service Partner.
Caution
If the vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 to 4 weeks, the battery will
discharge because certain electrical components consume electricity (e.g. control
units) also in idle state. You can prevent the discharging of the battery by discon-
necting the negative terminal or charging the battery constantly with a very low
charging current. Please also refer to the notes when working on the battery
⇒ page 216, “Working on the battery”.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 193 Battery with a
charge level indicator
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
218
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing 219
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Inspecting the electrolyte level
The battery is practically maintenance-free under normal operating conditions.
We do, however, recommend that you have the electrolyte level inspected from
time to time by a Škoda Service Partner when outside temperatures are high or
when driving on long trips. You should also check the electrolyte level ⇒ page 219
each time the battery is charged.
The battery acid level will also be checked as part of the Inspection Service.
Operation in winter
The battery has to provide greater amounts of electricity during the winter. It also
has only part of the initial power output at low temperatures that it has at normal
temperatures.
A discharged battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0°C.
We therefore recommend that you have the battery checked by a Škoda dealer
before the start of the winter, and recharged if necessary.
WARNING
Never charge a frozen or thawed battery - risk of explosion and caustic
burns. Replace a frozen battery.
Charging the battery
A properly charged battery is essential for reliably starting the
engine.
–Read the warning notes ⇒ in “Working on the battery” on
page 216 and ⇒ .
– Switch the ignition and all electrical components off.
– Only for “quick-charging”: Disconnect both battery cables (first of all
“negative”, then “positive”).
– Carefully attach the terminal clamps of the charger to the battery
terminals (red = “positive”, black = “negative”).
– You can now plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket
and switch on the charger.
– When charging is completed: switch the charger off and unplug the
mains cable from the power socket.
– Only then should you disconnect the terminal clamps of the charger.
– Reconnect the cables to the battery (first of all “positive”, then “nega-
tive”).
It is not normally necessary to disconnect the cables of the battery if you recharge
the battery using low amperages (as for example from a mini-charger). Please also
refer to the instructions from the charger manufacturer.
A charging current of 0.1 of the total battery capacity (or lower) is that which should
be used until full charging is achieved.
It is, however, necessary to disconnect both cables before charging the battery with
high amperages, so-called “quick-charging”.
“Quick-charging” a battery is dangerous ⇒ in “Working on the battery” on
page 216. It requires a special charger and appropriate knowledge. We therefore
recommend that you have your battery quick-charged only by your Škoda Service
Partner.
A discharged battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0°C ⇒ . We
recommend that you no longer use a battery which has thawed out because the
casing of the battery may be cracked through the formation of ice and this would
allow battery electrolyte to flow out.
The vent plugs of the battery should not be opened for charging.
WARNING
Never charge a frozen or thawed battery - risk of explosion and caustic
burns. Replace a frozen battery.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
219
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing220
Disconnecting and reconnecting the battery
On disconnecting and reconnecting the battery the following functions are initially
deactivated or are no longer able to operate fault-free.
We recommend having the vehicle checked by a Škoda Service Partner to ensure
full functionality of all electrical systems.
Replacing the battery
You should only replace a battery with a new battery of the same capacity, voltage
(12 V), amperage and of the same size. Škoda Service Partners have a range of suit-
able batteries available.
We recommend that you only have an old battery disposed of by your Škoda dealer
since it does require special disposal.
For the sake of the environment
Batteries contain poisonous substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They must
be disposed of in accordance with local environmental protection regulations and
on no account as domestic waste.
Windshield washer system
The windshield washer reservoir contains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen or
rear window and for the headlamp cleaning system*. The reservoir is located at the
front right of the engine compartment ⇒ fig. 194.
The filling level of the container is 3 litres, 5.5 litres on vehicles which also have a
headlight washing system.
Clear water is not sufficient to intensively clean the windscreen and headlights. We
therefore recommend using clean washing water together with the screen cleaner
from Škoda genuine accessories (in winter additionally with antifreeze) which is
capable of removing stubborn dirt. Follow the instructions for use on the packaging
when using screen cleaning products.
You should always add antifreeze to the cleaning water in winter even if your
vehicle is fitted with heated windscreen washer nozzles*.
It is also possible in exceptional cases to use methylated spirits when no screen
cleaner with antifreeze is available. The concentration of methylated spirits must
not be more than 15 %. Please note, however, that the antifreeze protection at this
concentration is only adequate down to -5°C.
WARNING
Read and observe the warning notes ⇒ page 209, “Working in the engine
compartment” before working in the engine compartment.
Operation Operating measure
Electrical power window (operational faults) ⇒ page 49
Enter radio code number see Radio Operating Instructions
Set hours ⇒ page 14
Data in the multi-functional indicator* are
deleted.
⇒ page 14
Fig. 194 Engine compart-
ment: Windshield washer
fluid reservoir
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
220
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Inspecting and Replenishing 221
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Caution
• On no account should you add radiator antifreeze or other additives to the
windscreen washer fluid.
• If the vehicle is fitted with headlight cleaning system, you should only add
cleaning products which do not attack the polycarbonate coating of the headlights
to the windscreen washer fluid. Please contact your Škoda Service Partner, who will
tell you which cleaning agent you can use.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
221
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Wheels and Tyres222
Wheels and Tyres
Wheels
General information
• New tyres do not offer optimal grip at first and should therefore be run in for
about 500 km at a moderate speed and an appropriately cautious style of driving.
You will also profit from longer tyre life.
• The tread depth of new tyres may differ because of design features and the
configuration of the tread (depending on the type of tyre and the manufacturer).
• Drive over curbs on the side of the road and other such obstacles slowly and,
where possible, at a right angles in order to avoid damage to tyres and wheel trims.
• Inspect your tyres from time to time for damage (punctures, cuts, splits and
bulges). Remove foreign bodies from the tyre profile.
• Damage to tyres and wheels is frequently not visible. Unusual vibrations or
pulling of the vehicle to one side could be a sign of tyre damage. Please reduce
your speed immediately and stop if you suspect that a wheel is damaged.
Inspect the tyres for signs of damage (bulges, splits, etc.) If no visible damage is
present, please drive at an appropriately slow speed and carefully to the nearest
specialist garage in order to have your vehicle inspected.
• Also protect your tyres from contact with oil, grease and fuel.
• Immediately replace any dust caps of the valves which have got lost.
• Mark wheels before removing them so that their previous direction of running
can be maintained when mounted them again.
• Always store wheels or tyres which been removed in a cool, dry and, where
possible, dark place. Tyres which are not fixed to a wheel trim should be stored
upright.
Unidirectional tyres*
The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the tyre. This
indicates the direction of rotation of the tyre, and it is essential that the tyres are
fitted on to run in this direction. Only then are the tyres able to provide the optimal
properties in terms of grip, low noise, wear-and-tear and aquaplaning.
Further information concerning the use of unidirectional tyres ⇒ page 226.
WARNING
• New tyres during the first 500 km do not offer optimal grip and should
therefore be run appropriately - risk of accident!
• Never drive with damaged tyres - risk of accident!
Note
Please observe the various differing legal requirements regarding tyres.
Tyre life
The life of your tyres very much depends on the following points:
Tyre pressure
The working life of tyres will be shortened considerably if the tyres are insufficiently
or over-inflated and this will have an adverse effect on the handling of your vehicle.
Correctly inflated tyres are of particular importance when travelling at high speeds.
It is therefore good to check the pressure at least once a month and also before
Fig. 195 An opened fuel filler
flap with the tyre inflation
pressure table
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
222
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Wheels and Tyres 223
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
setting off on a long trip. Please do not forget the spare wheel when checking the
tyres.
The tyre inflation pressures for summer tyres are indicated on the inside of the fuel
filler flap ⇒ page 222, fig. 195. The inflation pressures for winter tyres are 20 kPa
(0.2 bar) higher than those for summer tyres ⇒ page 226.
The tyre pressure should be at the highest pressure specified for your vehicle at all
times.
The tyre inflation pressure of the emergency spare wheel R 18 is 420 kPa (4.2 bar).
Always check the inflation pressure of tyres when cold. Do not reduce the higher
pressure of warm tyres. Adapt the inflation pressure of the tyres accordingly if your
vehicle is carrying a significantly higher payload.
Driving style
Fast cornering, sharp acceleration and braking (squealing tyres) increase wear-and-
tear on your tyres.
Balancing wheels
The wheels of a new vehicle are balanced. There are a wide range of influences
when driving which may result in an imbalance and which makes themselves felt
through vibration in the steering.
You should have the wheels rebalanced since any imbalance increases wear-and-
tear on the steering, the suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced
when a new tyre is fitted and each time a tyre is repaired.
Wheel alignment errors
Incorrect wheel alignment at the front and rear will not only increase wear-and-tear
on the tyres but will also has an adverse effect on vehicle safety. Contact your
specialist garage if you notice any unusual tyre wear.
WARNING
• If the inflation pressure is too low, the tyre must perform a greater flexing
work. At higher speeds the tyre will warm up as a result of this. This can
result in tread separation and even a tyre blowout.
• Immediately replace the damaged rims or tyres.
For the sake of the environment
Tyres which are insufficiently inflated increase your fuel consumption.
Wear indicators
The base of the tread of the original tyres has wear indicators 1.6 mm high, installed
at right angles to the direction of travel. These wear indicators are located at 6 - 8
points depending on the make and are evenly spaced around the circumference of
the tyre ⇒ fig. 196. Markings on the walls of the tyres through the letters “TWI”,
triangular symbols or other symbols identify the position of the wear indicators.
A remaining tread of just 1.6 mm, measured in the grooves of the tread next to the
wear indicators, means that your tyres have reached their legally permissible
minimum tread depth.
WARNING
• You must have your tyres replaced with new ones at the latest when the
wear indicators have been worn down. The legally permissible minimum
tread depth should be observed.
• Worn tyres do not provide the necessary adhesion to the road surface at
high speeds on wet roads. One could experience “aquaplaning” (uncon-
trolled movements of the vehicle - “swimming” on a wet road surface).
Fig. 196 Tyre tread with wear
indicators
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
223
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Wheels and Tyres224
Changing wheels around
If significantly greater wear is present on the front tyres, we recommend changing
the front wheels around with the rear wheels as shown in the diagram ⇒ fig. 197.
You will then obtain approximately the same life for all the tyres.
It may be advantageous to swap the tyres over “crosswise” when certain types of
wear characteristic arise on the running surface of the tyres (but not in the case of
unidirectional tyres). Škoda Service Partners can provide you with details.
We recommend that you change the wheels around every 10 000 km in order to
achieve even wear on all wheels and to obtain optimal tyre life.
New tyres and wheels
Tyres and wheel rims are important design elements. One should therefore use the
tyres and wheel rims which have been released for use by Škoda Auto. They are
exactly matched to the vehicle type and therefore contribute significantly to good
road holding and safe driving characteristics ⇒ .
Only fit radial tyres of the same type on all 4 wheels, size (rolling circumference)
and, if possible, the same tread pattern on one axle.
The Škoda Service Partners have access to the most current information about
which tyres we have released for use on your vehicle.
We recommend that you have any work relating to tyres or wheels carried out by
your Škoda Service Partner. Your dealer has all of the necessary special tools and
replacement parts available plus the required specialist knowledge and is also in a
position to properly dispose of the old tyres. A large number of Škoda Service Part-
ners also have an attractive range of tyres and wheels available.
The tyre/wheel combinations which are approved for your vehicle are indicated in
your vehicle documents. Approval and licensing may differ according to the legis-
lation prevailing in individual countries.
Proper knowledge of the tyre data makes it easier for you to select the correct type
of tyre. Tyres do, for example, have the following inscription on their walls:
205 / 55 R 16 94 V
What this means is:
The following speed restrictions apply to tyres.
Fig. 197 Changing wheels
around
205 Tyre width in mm
55 Height/width ratio in %
R Code letter for the type of tyre - R adial
16 Diameter of wheel in inches
94 Load index
V Speed symbol
Speed symbol Permissible maximum speed
S 180 km/h
T 190 km/h
H 210 km/h
V 240 km/h
W 270 km/h
Y 300 km/h
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
224
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Wheels and Tyres 225
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The date of manufacture is also stated on the tyre wall (possibly only on the inside
of wheel):
DOT ... 20 08...
means, for example, that the tyre was manufactured in the 20th week of the year
2008.
Any spare wheel which differs from the tyres fitted to the vehicle (e.g. winter tyres
or low-profile tyres) should only be used only for a short time in the event of a
puncture and when adopting an appropriately cautious style of driving. It should be
replaced as quickly as possible by a normal wheel.
WARNING
• Only use those tyres or wheel rims which have been approved for your
model of Škoda Auto a.s. vehicle. Failure to observe this instruction will
adversely affect the road safety of your vehicle - risk of accident! Approval
and licencing of your vehicle on public roads may also become void as a
result.
• You must on no account drive at a higher speed than is permissible for
your tyres - risk of an accident resulting from tyre damage and loss of control
over your vehicle.
• Tyres which are 6 years old or more should only be fitted in exceptional
cases and when adopting an appropriately cautious style of driving.
• Never fit tyres which have already been used without having adequate
knowledge of their previous history. Tyres age even if they have not been
used at all or only very little. A spare tyre must only be used in exceptional
cases and only then when adopting an appropriately cautious style of
driving.
• Do not, where possible, replace individual tyres but at least replace them
on both wheels of a given axle at the same time. Always fit the tyres with the
deeper tread depth to the front wheels.
For the sake of the environment
Old tyres must be disposed of in conformity with the appropriate regulations.
Note
It is not normally possible to fit wheels from other models of cars for technical
reasons. This may also apply in certain circumstances to the wheels of the same
type of vehicle.
Wheel bolts
Wheels and wheel bolts are matched to each other in terms of design. Each time
you fit other wheels - e.g. light alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres - you must
therefore also use the matching wheel bolts of the correct length and shape of
spherical cap. This is essential to ensure that the wheels are tightly fitted and that
the brake system operates properly.
If you retrofit wheel trims (or have this done), please also ensure that an adequate
flow of air remains assured for cooling the brake system.
The Škoda Service Partners are instructed in the technical possibilities which exist
regarding converting or retrofitting wheels, tyres and wheel trim.
WARNING
• In case of incorrect treatment of the wheel bolts, the wheel can loosen
when the car is moving - risk of accident!
• The wheel bolts must be clean and must turn easily. However, they must
never be treated with grease or oil.
• If the wheel bolts are tightened to a too low tightening torque, the rim
can lossen when the car is moving - risk of accident! A tightening torque
which is too high can damage the bolts and threads and this can result in
permanent deformation of the contact surfaces on the rims.
Caution
The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts for steel and light alloy wheels
is 120 Nm.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
225
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Wheels and Tyres226
Winter tyres
The handling of your vehicle will be significantly improved when driving on wintry
roads if you fit winter tyres. Summer tyres do not offer the same grip on ice, snow
and at temperatures below 7 °C because of their construction (width, rubber blend,
tread pattern). This particularly applies to vehicles which are equipped with low-
profile tyres or high-speed tyres (code index H or V on wall of tyre).
Winter tyres must be mounted on all four wheels to obtain the best handling char-
acteristics.
You must only fit those types of winter tyre which are approved for your vehicle. The
permissible sizes of winter tyres are stated in your vehicle documents. Approvals
may differ because of national legislation.
Please remember that the tyres should be inflated to 20 kPa (0.2 bar) more than is
the case for summer tyres ⇒ page 222, fig. 195.
Winter tyres no longer offer the same winter performance once the tyre tread has
worn down to a depth of about 4 mm.
Ageing also causes winter tyres to lose most of their winter performance properties
- even in cases where the remaining tread depth is still clearly more than 4 mm.
Speed restrictions apply to winter tyres as well as to summer tyres ⇒ page 224,
⇒ .
You can fit winter tyres of a lower speed category to your vehicle provided that you
also do not drive faster than the permissible maximum speed for such tyres, even
if the possible maximum speed of your vehicle is higher. The corresponding tyre
category can damage the tyres when exceeding the permissible maximum speed.
Please pay attention to the notes if you decide to fit winter tyres ⇒ page 222.
You can also fit so-called “all-year tyres” instead of winter tyres.
Please contact your specialist garage if there are any points which are not clear who
will be able to provide you with information regarding the maximum speed for your
tyres.
WARNING
You must on no account drive your car at more than the permissible
maximum speed for your winter tyres - risk of an accident resulting from
tyre damage and loss of control over your car.
For the sake of the environment
Fit your summer tyres on again in good time since summer tyres offer you better
grip and handling on roads which are free of snow and ice as well as ar tempera-
tures below 7 °C - the braking distance is shorter, there is less tyre noise, tyre wear
is reduced and fuel consumption is reduced.
Note
Please observe the various differing legal requirements regarding tyres.
Unidirectional tyres*
The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the tyre.
This indicates the direction of rotation of the tyre, and it is essential that the tyres
are fitted on to run in this direction. Only then are the tyres able to provide the
optimal properties in terms of grip, low noise, wear-and-tear and aquaplaning.
Should it be necessary to fit on a spare wheel in exceptional cases with a tyre not
dedicated to the running direction or in opposite running direction, please adopt a
cautious style of driving as the tyre is no longer able to provide optimal grip and
handling in such a situation. This particularly important on wet roads. Please refer
to the notes ⇒ page 231, “Spare wheel”.
You should have the defective tyre replaced as soon as possible and restore the
correct direction of rotation on all tyres
Snow chains
Snow chains must only be mounted on the front wheels.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
226
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Wheels and Tyres 227
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
When driving on wintry roads, snow chains improve not only traction, but also the
braking performance.
For technical reasons, it is only permissible to fit snow chains with the following
wheel/tyre combinations:
Only use fine-link snow chains. They must not project more than 9 mm -
including the chain lock.
Remove the full wheel trims if you wish to fit snow chains to the wheels.
Observe the national legal requirements relating to the maximum vehicle speed
with snow chains.
WARNING
Please pay attention to the information in the supplied fitting instructions of
the snow chain manufacturer.
Caution
You must take the chains off as soon as you drive on roads which are free of snow.
They adversely affect the handling of your vehicle, damage the tyres and are rapidly
destroyed.
Note
We recommend that you use snow chains from the Škoda genuine accessories.
Wheel size Depth (D) Tyre size
7J x 16 45 mm 205/55
6J x 17 45 mm 205/50
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
227
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Accessories, changes and replacement of parts228
Accessories, changes and replacement of parts
Accessories and replacement parts
Škoda vehicles have been built according to the latest discoveries in safety engi-
neering. Thus one should not change the condition in which the vehicle was deliv-
ered from the manufacturer without some thought.
The following guidelines should be observed when a vehicle is to be retrofitted with
accessories, have technical changes made to it or a part has to be replaced at some
time in the future.
• Advise should always be obtained from a Škoda Service Partner before buying
any accessories and before making any technical changes ⇒ .
• This is particularly the case when accessories are bought in a foreign country.
• Škoda Genuine Accessories which have been released for use and Skoda orig-
inal parts can be obtained from Škoda Service Partners. They will install them
professionally and correctly.
• All Škoda original accessory which is listed in the catalogue such as transport
systems, child seats, light alloy wheels etc., are homologized.
• Radios, aerials and other electrical accessories should only be installed by an
authorised workshop.
• The guidelines issued by Škoda Auto a.s. must be observed when making tech-
nical changes.
• This is to ensure that no technical damage occurs to the vehicle, that travelling
and operating safety are maintained and that the chnages are permissible. Škoda
Service Partners undertake this work professionally or refer it to an specialist
company in special cases.
Any damage which is done caused by technical changes made without
consulting a Skoda a.s. dealer is excluded from the guarantee.
WARNING
• We advise you, in your own interest, to only use Škoda Genuine Accesso-
ries and Škoda original parts which have been expressly approved for use on
your Škoda. Reliability, safety and suitabiliity have been established for
these Škoda original parts.
• We cannot guarantee suitability of installation into your vehicle of other
products despite keeping a constant eye on market developments (also not
in the case where there is an attestation or permission can be produced).
Technical changes
Interference on the electronic components and their software can lead to opera-
tional faults. This interference can also impair not directly affected systems because
of the networking of the electronic components. This means that the operating
safety of your vehicle can be considerably jeopardized, a greater wear of vehicle
parts can occur and finally the vehicle registration documents expire.
We trust that you will understand that your Škoda Service Partner cannot be liable
for damage resulting from unprofessional work.
We therefore recommend that you have all work carried out with Škoda original
parts at your authorised Škoda Service Partners.
WARNING
Work or modifications on your vehicle, which have been carried out unpro-
fessionally, can cause operational faults - risk of accident!
WARNING (continued)
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
228
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Breakdown assistance 229
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
First-aid box*
First-aid box
The compartment for stowing the first-aid box is located in the right of the luggage
compartment ⇒ fig. 198.
Note
Pay attention to the use-by-date of the contents of the first-aid box.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle can be attached to the trim panel of the rear wall with rubber
straps ⇒ fig. 199.
Fire extinguisher*
The fire extinguisher is attached with straps in a holder under the driver seat.
Please read carefully the instructions which are attached to the fire extin-
guisher.
The fire extinguisher must be checked by an authorised person or company annu-
ally (please observe the differing legal requirements).
Fig. 198 Compartment for
stowing first-aid box
Fig. 199 Placing of the
warning triangle
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
229
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Breakdown assistance230
WARNING
If the fire extinguisher is not correctly attached, in case of sudden manoeu-
vres or an accident it can be “thrown” through the interior compartment and
cause injuries.
Note
• The fire extinguisher must comply with the relevant and valid legal require-
ments.
• Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher. If the fire extin-
guisher is used after the expiration date, its proper function is no longer assured.
• The fire extinguisher is only supplied in certain countries within the scope of
delivery.
Vehicle tool kit
The vehicle tool kit and the lifting jack are stored in a locable box in the spare wheel
⇒ fig. 200. There is also space here for the removable ball for the trailer towing
device*. The box is attached with a strap on the spare wheel.
The vehicle tool kit contains the following parts (depending on equipment fitted):
• Hook for pulling off a full wheel trim,
• Plastic clip for a wheel bolt cover,
• Wheel wrench,
• Towing eye,
• Adapter for the wheel bolts lock*,
• Replacement lamp,
• Torx wrench.
After using the lifting jack, screw in the arm of the lifting jack fully before placing it
back in its stowage area.
WARNING
• The factory-supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model of
vehicle. On no account attempt to lift a heavier vehicle or other loads - risk
of injury!
• Ensure that the vehicle tool kit is safely attached in the luggage compart-
ment.
Note
Ensure that the box is always secured with the strap.
Tyre repair kit*
The tyre repair kit is intended for the repair of minor tyre defects. The tyre repair kit
contains a compressor, inflation bottle, operating instructions and accessories.
The repair with the tyre repair kit is not at all intended to replace a permanent
repair on the tyre, this repair only serves to reach the next specialist garage. The
repair can be undertaken on the vehicle immediately. Please read the attached
instructions carefully before the repair.
The tyre repair kit is located in a textile bag. There is a velcro fastener on the under-
side of the bag, with which the bag is attached to the floor covering of the luggage
compartment in such a way that the side of the bag rests on the right side of the
luggage compartment and on the seat backrest.
Fig. 200 Luggage compart-
ment: Storage compartment
for vehicle too kit
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
230
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Breakdown assistance 231
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Spare wheel
The spare wheel lies in a well under the floor covering of the luggage compartment
and is fixed in place using special screws ⇒ fig. 201.
Before removing the spare wheel, you must take out the box with the vehicle tool
kit box ⇒ page 230, fig. 200.
One should check the inflation pressure in the spare wheel (at best when generally
checking the tyre air pressures - see sign on the fuel filler flap ⇒ page 222) to
ensure that the spare wheel is always ready to use.
Temporary spare wheel
A warning label displayed on the rim of the temporary spare wheel indicates that
your vehicle is equipped with a temporary spare wheel.
Please observe the following notes when driving with a temporary spare wheel:
• After fitting on the wheel, the warning sticker must not be concealed (e.g. by the
wheel trim).
• Do not drive with this spare wheel at more than 80 km/h - risk of accident. Avoid
accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering.
• The inflation pressure for this spare wheel is identical to the inflation pressure
of the standard tyres. The temporary spare wheel R 18 must have an inflation pres-
sure of 420 kPa (4.2 bar)!
• Use this spare wheel only to reach the nearest specialist garage as it is not
intended for continuous use.
• No other summer or winter tyres must be mounted on the rim of the spare
wheel R 18.
Changing a wheel
Preliminary work
The following steps should be carried out before actually changing the
wheel.
– If it is necessary to change a wheel, park the vehicle as far away as
possible from the traffic flow. The place you choose should be level.
–Have all the occupants get out. While changing a wheel, the occu-
pants of the vehicle should not stand on the road (e.g. behind a crash
barrier).
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
–Engage 1st gear or if your vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox,
position the selector lever into position P.
– If a trailer is coupled, uncouple it.
– Take the vehicle tool kit ⇒ page 230 and the spare wheel
⇒ page 231 out of the luggage compartment.
WARNING
• If you find yourself in flowing traffic switch on the hazard warning lights
system and place the warning triangle on the side of the road at the
prescribed distance from your vehicle while observing all national legal
provisions. In this way you are protecting not only yourself but also other
road users.
Fig. 201 Luggage compart-
ment: Spare wheel
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
231
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Breakdown assistance232
• Never start the engine with the vehicle sitting on the raised jack - danger
of suffering injury!
Caution
If you have to change a wheel on a slope first block the opposite wheel with a stone
or similar object in order to secure the vehicle from unexpectedly rolling away.
Note
Comply with the national legal regulations.
Changing a wheel
Always change a wheel on a level surface as far as possible.
– Take off the full wheel trim* ⇒ page 233 or the caps ⇒ page 233.
– In the case of light alloy wheels remove the wheel trim cap
⇒ page 234.
– First of all slacken the theft-deterrent wheel bolt*, afterwards the
other wheel bolts ⇒ page 234.
– Jack up the vehicle until the wheel to be changed is clear of the ground
⇒ page 235.
– Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface (cloth,
paper etc.).
– Take off the wheel.
– Fit on the spare wheel and tighten the wheel bolts slightly.
–Lower the car.
– Tighten the wheel bolts firmly, alternately and diagonally using the
wheel wrench (crosswise) and last the theft-deterrent wheel bolt*
⇒ page 234.
– Mount the full wheel trim/wheel trim cap or the caps.
Note
• All bolts must be clean and must turn easily.
• You must never grease or oil the wheel bolts!
• When fitting on unidirectional tyres, ensure that the tyres rotate in the correct
direction ⇒ page 222.
Subsequent steps
After changing the wheel, you must perform the following steps.
– Stow and attach the replaced wheel in the spare wheel well using the
special screw ⇒ page 231, fig. 201.
– Stow the vehicle tool kit in the space provided.
– Check the tyre pressure on the spare wheel just mounted as soon as
possible.
– Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked with a torque
wrench as soon as possible. Steel and light alloy wheels must be tight-
ened to a tightening torque of 120 Nm.
– Have the defective tyre repaired as soon as possible.
WARNING
It is necessary to observe the guidelines given on ⇒ page 224 if the vehicle is
subsequently fitted with tyres which are different to those it was fitted with
at the works.
WARNING (continued)
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
232
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Breakdown assistance 233
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Note
• If you find, when changing the wheel, that the wheel bolts are corroded and
difficult to turn, the bolts must be replaced before checking the tightening torque.
• Drive cautiously and only at a moderate speed to a workshop where the tight-
ening torque can be checked.
Full wheel trim*
Pulling off
– Hook the clamp found in the vehicle tool kit into the reinforced edge
of the full wheel trim.
– Push the wheel key through the clamp, support the wheel key at the
tyre and pull off the wheel trim.
Installing
– First press the full wheel trim onto the wheel at the valve opening
provided. Then press the full wheel trim into the wheel in such a way
that its entire circumference locks correctly in place.
Caution
• Use the pressure of your hand, do not knock on the full wheel trim! Heavy
knocks mainly on the points where the full wheel trim has not been inserted into
the wheel, can result in damage to the guide and centering elements of the full
wheel trim.
• First check for yourself that the theft-deterrent wheel bolt is located
⇒ page 235, “Securing wheels against being stolen*” in the hole in the area of the
valve before fitting the full wheel trim onto a steel wheel which is attached with a
theft-deterrent wheel bolt.
Wheel bolts with caps*
Pulling off
– Push the plastic clip sufficiently far onto the cap until the inner catches
of the clip are positioned at the collar of the cap and detach the cap
⇒ fig. 202.
Installing
– Push the caps fully onto the wheel bolts.
The caps are located in the well of the luggage compartment.
Fig. 202 Removing the cap.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
233
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Breakdown assistance234
Wheel trim caps*
Pulling off
– Carefully remove the wheel trim cap using the removal hook
⇒ fig. 203.
Slackening and tightening wheel bolts
Slacken the wheel bolts before jacking up the vehicle.
Slackening wheel bolts
– Insert the wheel wrench fully onto the wheel bolt
15)
.
– Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt about one turn to the
left ⇒ fig. 204.
Tightening wheel bolts
– Insert the wheel wrench fully onto the wheel bolt
15)
.
– Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt to the right until it is
tight.
WARNING
Slacken the wheel bolts only a little (about one turn) as long as the vehicle
has not yet been jacked up - risk of an accident!.
Note
apply pressure carefully with your foot to the end of the wheel wrench if it proves
difficult to slacken the wheel bolts. Hold tight on the vehicle when doing this and
ensure that you have a steady position.
Fig. 203 Pulling off wheel
trim cap on light alloy wheels
Fig. 204 Changing a wheel:
Slackening wheel bolts
15)
Use the appropriate adapter for slackening and tightening the safety wheel bolts
⇒ page 235.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
234
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Breakdown assistance 235
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Raise vehicle
You have to raise the vehicle with a lifting jack in order to be able to
take off the wheel.
Position the lifting jack by selecting the jacking point which is closest to
the wheel to be removed ⇒ fig. 205. The jacking point is located directly
below the engraving in the lower sill.
– Position the lifting jack below the jacking point and move it up until its
claw is positioned directly below the vertical web of the lower sill.
– Align the car jack so that its claw grasps the web of the lower sill
and the base plate is resting flat on the floor.
– Turn the lifting jack up further until the wheel is just clear of the
ground.
Ground below the lifting jack which is soft and slippery can cause the vehicle to
slip off the jack. It is therefore always necessary to place the lifting jack on a solid
surface or use a wide and stable base. Use a non-slip base (e.g. a rubber foot mat)
if the surface is smooth, such as cobbled stones, a tiled floor, etc.
WARNING
• Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed - risk of injury!
• Take suitable measures to prevent the base of the lifting jack from slip-
ping off - risk of injury!
• Not positioning the lifting jack at the specified points can result in
damage to the vehicle. The jack can also slip off if it does not have sufficient
grip - risk of injury!
• It is important to support the vehicle with suitable supporting blocks if
you wish to work under the lifted vehicle - risk of injury!
Securing wheels against being stolen*
You need a special adapter for slackening the safety wheel bolts.
– Pull off the full wheel trim/cap from the wheel hub or cap from the
safety wheel bolt.
– Insert the adapter with its toothed side fully into the inner toothing
of the safety wheel bolt right down in such a way that only the
outer hexagon is jutting out ⇒ fig. 206.
– Insert the wheel wrench fully onto the adapter .
– Slacken the wheel bolt, or tighten it firmly ⇒ page 234.
Fig. 205 Changing a wheel:
Points for positioning car jack
A
A
A
B
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 206 Safety wheel bolt
with adapter
A
B
A
A
A
B
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
235
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Breakdown assistance236
– Reinstall the full wheel trim/wheel cap after removing the adapter or
place the cap onto the safety wheel bolt.
– Have the tightening torque checked with a torque wrench as soon as
possible. Steel and light alloy wheels must be tightened to a tightening
torque of 120 Nm.
The safety wheel bolts on vehicles fitted with them (one safety wheel bolt per
wheel) can only be loosened or tighten up by using the adapter provided.
It is meaningful to note the code number hammered into the rear side of the
adapter or the rear side of the safety wheel bolts. You can obtain a replacement
adapter from a Škoda Service Partner, if necessary, by quoting this number.
We recommend that you always carry the adapter for the wheel bolts with you in
the vehicle. It should be stowed in the vehicle tool kit.
Caution
Damage can occur to the adapter and safety wheel bolt if the safety wheel bolt is
tightened up too much.
Note
The set of safety wheel bolts can be obtained from a Škoda Service Partner.
Jump-starting
Initial steps
You can use the battery of another vehicle for jump-starting yours if the engine
does not start because the battery on your vehicle is flat. You will require jump-start
cables for this purpose.
Both batteries must have a rated voltage of 12 V. The capacity (Ah) of the battery
supplying the power must not be significantly less than the capacity of the
discharged battery in your vehicle.
Jump-start cables
Only use jump-start cables which have an adequately large cross-section and insu-
lated terminal clamps. Please pay attention to the manufacturer's instructions.
Positive cable - colour coding in the majority of cases red.
Negative cable - colour coding in the majority of cases black.
WARNING
• A discharged battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0°C.
In case of frozen battery carry out no jump-starting - risk of explosion!
• Please pay attention to the warning instructions relating to working in
the engine compartment ⇒ page 209, “Working in the engine compart-
ment”.
Note
• There must not be any contact between the two vehicles otherwise current may
flow as soon as the negative terminals are connected.
• The discharged battery must be properly connected to the system of the
vehicle.
• Switch off any mobile phone, pay attention to the instructions for use of the
mobile phone in such a situation.
• We recommend purchasing jump-start cables from Škoda Service Partners as a
Škoda original accessory or from retailers who sell branded batteries.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
236
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Breakdown assistance 237
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Start engine
It is important to connect the jump-start cables in the correct order.
Connecting positive terminals
– Attach one end to the positive terminal ⇒ page 237, fig. 207 of the
discharged battery .
– Attach the other end to the positive terminal of the battery
supplying the power .
Connecting negative terminal and engine block
– Attach one end to the negative terminal of the battery supplying
the power .
– Attach the other end to a solid metal part which is connected
firmly to the engine block, or to the engine block itself.
Starting engine
– Start the engine of the vehicle providing current and run the engine at
idling speed.
– Now start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
– Interrupt the attempt at starting an engine after 10 seconds if it does
not start right away and wait for about 30 seconds before repeating
the attempt.
– Disconnect the cables on the engine in exactly the reverse order they
were connected up.
WARNING
• The non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never make contact
with each other. Furthermore, the cable connected to the positive terminal
of the battery must not come into contact with electrically conducting parts
of the vehicle - risk of a short circuit!
• Do not affix the jump starting cables to the negative terminal of the
discharged battery. There is the risk of detonating gas seeping out the
battery being ignited by the strong spark which results from the engine
being started.
• Run the jump-start cables so that they cannot be caught by any rotating
parts in the engine compartment.
• Do not bend over the batteries - risk of caustic burns!
• The vent screws of the battery cells must be tightened firmly.
• Keep any sources of ignition (naked flame, smouldering cigarettes etc.)
away from the battery - risk of an explosion!
Tow-starting and towing vehicle
General
Please pay attention to the following instructions if you are going to use a
tow rope:
Driver of the towing vehicle
– Do not drive off until the tow rope is taught.
Fig. 207 Jump-starting using
the battery from another
vehicle: A - flat vehicle
battery, B - battery providing
current
A
1
A
A
A
2
A
B
A
3
A
B
A
4
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
237
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Breakdown assistance238
– Release the clutch particularly gently when starting off or depress the
accelerator particularly gently if your vehicle is fitted with an auto-
matic gearbox.
Driver of the towed vehicle
– Switch the ignition on so that the steering wheel is not blocked and
you can also operate the turn signal lights, the headlight flasher, the
windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system.
– Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N
if your vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox.
– Note that the brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the
engine is running. You will require significantly greater physical force
to depress the brake pedal and to steer the vehicle if the engine is not
running.
– Ensure that the tow rope is always kept taught.
Tow rope or tow bar
A tow bar is safest way of towing a vehicle and also minimizes any shocks. You can
use a tow rope only if a suitable tow bar is not available.
The tow rope must be elastic to protect the vehicle. Thus one should only use
plastic fibre rope or a rope made out of a similarly elastic material.
Only attach the tow rope to the towing eyes provided for this purpose ⇒ page 238
and ⇒ page 239.
Driving style
Towing another vehicle requires a certain amount of practice. Both drivers should
be familiar with the particular points about towing a vehicle. Unskilled drivers
should not attempt to tow in another vehicle or to be towed in.
One should be constantly vigilant not to allow impermissibly high towing forces or
jerky loadings. There is always a risk of excessive stresses and damage resulting at
the points to which you attach the tow rope or tow bar when you attempt to tow a
vehicle which is not standing on a paved road.
Caution
If the gearbox of your vehicle no longer contains any oil because of a defect, your
vehicle must only be towed in with the driven wheels raised clear of the ground, or
on a special vehicle transporter or trailer.
Note
• Please comply with any legal requirements particularly regarding the switched
on signal systems, when towing in or tow-starting another vehicle.
• The tow rope must not be twisted as it may in certain circumstances result in the
front towing eye being unscrewed out of your vehicle.
Front towing eye
The towing eye is stored in the box for the vehicle tool kit.
Fig. 208 Front bumper:
Protective grille
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
238
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Breakdown assistance 239
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– Take the cover out of the front bumper ⇒ fig. 208.
– Screw in the towing eye anticlockwise down to the stop ⇒ fig. 209 and
tighten up using the wheel wrench (push the wheel wrench through
eye).
– Put the cover in place after screwing out the towing eye again and
press into place. The cover must engage firmly.
Rear towing eye
– Press onto the bottom part of the cap in the rear bumper ⇒ fig. 210
and take it out.
– Screw in the towing eye anticlockwise down to the stop ⇒ fig. 211 and
tighten up using the wheel wrench (push the wheel wrench through
eye).
– Put the cover in place after screwing out the towing eye again and
press into place. The cover must engage firmly.
Tow-starting a vehicle
If the engine does not start, we generally do not recommend to tow-start
your vehicle. One should attempt to start the engine using jump start
cables ⇒ page 236 or call on the services of the SERVICE mobile.
If your vehicle has to be towed
– Engage 2nd or 3rd gear with the vehicle stationary.
– Depress the clutch pedal fully and keep it depressed.
– Switch on the ignition.
– Wait until both vehicles are moving then release the clutch pedal
slowly.
Fig. 209 Front bumper:
Installing the towing eye
Fig. 210 Rear bumper:
Removing cover
Fig. 211 Rear bumper:
Installing the towing eye
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
239
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Breakdown assistance240
– Depress the clutch pedal fully when the engine fires and take the
vehicle out of gear.
For technical reasons it is not possible to tow-start a car fitted with an automatic
gearbox.
WARNING
There is high risk of having an accident when tow-starting a vehicle, when
for example the towed vehicle runs into the towing vehicle.
Caution
Vehicles which are fitted with a catalytic converter should not be tow-started over
a distance of more than 50 metres. Unburnt fuel may get into the catalytic converter
and damage it.
Towing in a vehicle fitted with a manual gearbox
Please refer to the notes ⇒ page 237.
The car can be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope or with the front or rear wheels
raised. The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h.
Towing of a vehicle with an automatic gearbox
Please refer to the notes ⇒ page 237.
The car can be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope. Refer at the same time to the
following guidelines.
• Move selector lever into N.
• The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h.
• The maximum permissible towing distance is 50 km. The gear oil pump does
not operate when the engine is not running; the gearbox would not be adequately
lubricated at higher speeds and over longer towing distance.
Caution
If the vehicle is towed in by a recovery vehicle, it should only be towed in with the
front wheels raised. If the vehicle is raised at rear, the automatic gearbox is
damaged! (Does not apply to the automatic gearbox DSG).
Note
The vehicle must be transported on a special vehicle or trailer if it is not possible to
tow in the vehicle in the way described or if the towing distance is greater than
50 km.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
240
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Fuses and light bulbs 241
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Fuses and light bulbs
Electric fuses
Replacing fuses
Defect fuses must be replaced.
Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. The fuses are located
on the left side of the dash panel behind the safety cover and under the
cover in the engine compartment on the left.
– Switch the ignition off and also the electrical component affected.
– Use a screwdriver to take off the fuse cover on the side of the dash
panel ⇒ fig. 212 or the fuse cover in the engine compartment
⇒ page 242, fig. 213.
– Find out which fuse belongs to the relevant component ⇒ page 245,
“Fuse assignment in the dash panel”, ⇒ page 242, “Fuse assignment
in engine compartment - version 1” or ⇒ page 244, “Fuse assignment
in engine compartment - version 2”.
– Take the plastic clip out of its fixture in the fuse cover, insert it onto the
respective fuse and pull out this fuse.
– Defect fuses can be detected by their melted metal strips. Replace the
defect fuse by a new fuse of the same ampere number.
– Fit on the fuse cover again.
We recommend that you carry the box of replacement fuses with you which was
delivered in your vehicle. You can obtain replacement fuses
16)
from a Škoda
Service Partner.
Colour coding of fuses
Caution
• Never attempt to “repair” fuses and also do not replace them with a fuse of a
higher amperage - risk of fire! This may also cause damage at another part of the
electrical system.
• Have the electrical system checked as quickly as possible by a specialist garage
if a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time.
Fig. 212 Fuse cover: left side
of the dash panel
16)
Replacement fuses are, on the other hand, part of the basic equipping of the vehicle in some
countries.
Colour Maximum amperage
light brown 5
brown 7,5
red 10
blue 15
yellow 20
white 25
green 30
orange 40
red 50
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
241
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Fuses and light bulbs242
Fuse cover in engine compartment
The fuse box in the engine compartment exists in two different
versions. You can determine which version your vehicle is fitted with
after removing the fuse cover at the location of the fuses.
For particular model versions, the battery must be removed before
removing the fuse cover ⇒ page 216.
Removing fuse cover
– Move the circlips ⇒ fig. 213 as far as the stop, the symbol
appears behind the circlip and remove the cover.
Installing fuse cover
– Position the fuse cover on the fuse box and push the circlips as far
as the stop - the symbol
is visible behind the circlip.
Caution
• When unlocking and locking the fuse cover, it must be pressed on the sides to
the box, otherwise damage can occur to the locking mechanism.
• Carefully position the fuse cover in the engine compartment. If the cover was
not correctly positioned, water can get into the fuses and this results in a damage
to the vehicle!
Fuse assignment in engine compartment - version 1
Certain electrical components are only standard on certain vehicle model versions
or only suppliable as optional equipment for certain models.
Fig. 213 Fuse cover in engine
compartment
A
A
A
A
No. Power consumer Amperes
F1 Front right main headlight, right rear light unit 30
F2 Valves for ABS 20
F3 Not assigned
F4 Not assigned
F5 Horn 15
F6 Power supply for terminal 15 (ignition on) 40
F7 Not assigned
F8 Not assigned
F9 Valves 10
F10 Not assigned
F11 Lambda probe 10
Fig. 214 Schematic repre-
sentation of fuse box in
engine compartment -
version 1
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
242
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Fuses and light bulbs 243
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
F12 Lambda probe 10
F13 Control unit for automatic gearbox 15
F14 Not assigned
F15 Water pump 10
F16 Not assigned
F17 Instrument cluster, windshield wiper lever and turn sig-
nal light lever
5
F18 Audio amplifier (sound system) 30
F19 Radio 15
F20 Phone 5
F21 Not assigned
F22 Not assigned
F23 Engine control unit 10
F24 Control unit for CAN databus 5
F25 Not assigned
F26 Not assigned
F27 Valve for fuel dosing 15
F28 Engine control unit 15
F29 Main relay 5
F30 Control unit for auxiliary heating 20
F31 Front window wiper 30
F32 Not assigned
F33 Not assigned
F34 Not assigned
F35 Not assigned
No. Power consumer Amperes
F36 Not assigned
F37 Not assigned
F38 Radiator fan, valves 10
F39 Not assigned
F40 Not assigned
F41 Not assigned
F42 Not assigned
F43 Ignition 30
F44 Not assigned
F45 Not assigned
F46 Not assigned
F47 Front left main headlight, left rear light unit 30
F48 Pump for ABS 40
F49 Not assigned
F50 Not assigned
F51 Not assigned
F52
Power supply relay - terminal
a)
40
F53 Accessory equipment 50
F54 Not assigned
a)
In order not to drain the battery unnecessarily when starting the engine, the electrical com-
ponents of this terminal are automatically switched off.
No. Power consumer Amperes
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
243
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Fuses and light bulbs244
Fuse assignment in engine compartment - version 2
Certain electrical components are only standard on certain vehicle model versions
or only suppliable as optional equipment for certain models.
No. Power consumer Amperes
F1 Not assigned
F2 Control unit for automatic gearbox DQ200 30
F3 Measuring circuit 5
F4 Valves for ABS 30/20
F5 Control unit for automatic gearbox DQ250 15
F6 Instrument cluster, windshield wiper lever and turn sig-
nal light lever
5
F7 Power supply for terminal 15 (ignition on) 40
F8 Radio 15
F9 Phone 5
F10 Engine control unit, Main relay 5/10
Fig. 215 Schematic repre-
sentation of fuse box in
engine compartment -
version 2
F11 Control unit for auxiliary heating 20
F12 Control unit for CAN databus 5
F13 Engine control unit 15/30
F14 Ignition 20
F15 Lambda probe - Petrol
Glow plug system relay and fuel pump - Diesel
10
5
F16 Front right main headlight, right rear light unit 30
F17 Horn 15
F18 Audio amplifier (sound system) 30
F19 Front window wiper 30
F20 Valve for fuel dosing
water pump
20
10
F21 Lambda probe 10/15
F22 Not assigned
F23 Main relay
Valves
High pressure pump
5
10
15
F24 Fan 10
F25 Pump for ABS 30/40
F26 Left main headlight 30
F27 Control unit for glow plug system 50
F28 Not assigned
F29 Accessory equipment 50
F30
Power supply relay - terminal X
a)
50
a)
In order not to drain the battery unnecessarily when starting the engine, the electrical com-
ponents of this terminal are automatically switched off.
No. Power consumer Amperes
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
244
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Fuses and light bulbs 245
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Fuse assignment in the dash panel
Certain electrical components are only standard on certain vehicle model versions
or only suppliable as optional equipment for certain models.
No. Power consumer Amperes
1
Diagnostic socket, engine control unit, relay EKP, control
unit for EKP
7,5
2
Control unit for ABS, ESP, switch for tyre inflation pres-
sure-control system, brake sensor
5
3 Switch and control unit for airbag 5
4
WIV, parking light, dimming rear mirror, pressure sensor,
telephone preinstallation
5
5
Control unit for headlamp beam adjustment and head-
light swivel, control unit for parking aid
5
6
Instrument cluster, control unit for electromechanical
power steering, Haldex
5
7 Valve heating, air mass meter 10
Fig. 216 Schematic repre-
sentation of the fuse carrier
in the dash panel
8 Control unit for trailer detection 5
9 Relay for auxiliary heating 5
10 Adaptive left main headlight 10
11 Adaptive right main headlight 10
12 Central locking system of the front doors 10
13 Diagnostic socket, light switch, rain sensor, clock 7,5
14 Central locking system and bonnet lid 15
15 Central control unit - interior lights 7,5
16 The air conditioning system 7,5
17 Central locking system of the rear doors 10
18 Not assigned
19 Not assigned
20 ABS, ESP, Uphill-Start off-Assist 5
21 Not assigned
22 Air blower for Climatronic 40
23 Front power window 30
24 Selector lever lock 5
25
Rear window heater
relay for auxiliary heating and ventilation
25
30
26 Power socket in the luggage compartment 25
27
Fuel pump relay,
Fuel pump relay, control unit for fuel pump, injection
valves
15
20
28 Not assigned
29 Not assigned
30 Not assigned
No. Power consumer Amperes
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
245
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Fuses and light bulbs246
Electrically adjustable seats are protected by automatic circuit breakers, which
switch on again automatically after a few seconds after the overload has been
eliminated.
Bulbs
Changing bulbs
The relevant lamp must always be switched off before a light bulb is replaced.
Defect light bulbs should only be replaced with light bulbs of the same type. The
designation is located on the light socket or the glass bulb.
Changing certain bulbs is not something which you can do yourself, but requires to
be done by a specialist. Other parts of the vehicle must be removed in order to
change the light bulbs. This applies, in particular, to bulbs which can only be
reached from the engine compartment.
We therefore recommend that you have any bulbs changed by a Škoda Service
Partner or, in exceptional cases, by calling on other professional assistance.
Please note that the engine compartment is a hazardous area ⇒ page 209,
“Working in the engine compartment”.
We recommend that you carry the set of light bulbs with you which was delivered
in your vehicle. Replacement light bulbs
17)
are available at specialist garages.
The set of light bulbs can be stowed in the locable box in the spare wheel.
Fitted with a xenon headlight
Change of light bulbs on Xenon lights (low beam lights, parking lights and main
beam lights) should be undertaken by a specialist garage.
Overview of bulbs
31 Not assigned
32 Rear power window 30
33 Electric sliding/tilting roof 25
34 Alarm, spare horn 5
35 front and rear lighter 25
36 Headlight cleaning system 20
37 Front seat heating 20
38 Heated rear seats 20
39 Not assigned
40
Fan air-conditioning system, relay for auxiliary heating
and ventilation
40
41 Not assigned
42 Light switch 5
43 Towing device 15
44 Towing device 20
45 Towing device 15
46
Heated windscreen washer nozzles, relay for auxiliary
heating and ventilation, switch for seat heating
5
47 Not assigned
48 Not assigned
49 Not assigned
No. Power consumer Amperes
17)
Replacement light bulbs are, on the other hand, part of the basic equipping of the vehicle in
some countries.
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
246
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Fuses and light bulbs 247
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
• Bulbs H7 and H3 are pressurised and may burst when changing the bulb
- risk of injury!
• It is recommended to wear gloves and eye protection when changing a
light bulb.
• Gas discharge bulbs* (xenon bulbs) operate with a high voltage, profes-
sional knowledge is required - danger to life!
Caution
Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers (even the smallest amount of
dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb). Use a clean cloth, serviette or some-
thing similar.
Note
This Owner's Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is assumed
that no major complications will arise. Other light bulbs should be changed by your
specialist garage.
Front headlight
Positions of the light bulbs in the front headlight ⇒ fig. 217.
Front headlight Halogen headlight Xenon headlight
Low beam H7 D1S
Main beam H3 D1S, H3
Parking lights W5W
Turn signals PY 24W
Fog lights H8
Rear light unit Bulb
Reversing light W16W
Turn signals PY21W
Light bulb for the brake lights and tail
lights
W16W
Parking lights W5W
Fog lights P21W
Others Bulb
Licence plate light C5W
front interior lighting W5W
3. Brake light LED
Rear interior lighting W5W
Storage compartment light - front pas-
senger side
C3W
Footwell light W5W
Luggage compartment light W5W
Door warning light W5W
Lighting for vanity mirror C5W
Entry light W5W
Fig. 217 Front headlight:
Installing the light bulbs
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
247
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Fuses and light bulbs248
- parking lights and main beam lights
- low beam lights
- Turn signal light (at the front)
Parking lights and main beam lights
Removing the light bulb for the parking light
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Open the bonnet.
– Remove the protective cap ⇒ page 247, fig. 217.
– Remove the socket ⇒ fig. 218.
– Take the faulty bulb out of the fixture and insert a new one.
Removing the light bulb for the main beam light
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Open the bonnet.
– Remove the protective cap ⇒ page 247, fig. 217.
– Press the sprung wire clamps ⇒ fig. 218 together and hang them
to the side.
– Remove the socket ⇒ fig. 218.
– Take the faulty bulb out of the fixture and insert a new one
Installation takes place in the reverse order.
Note
We recommend that you have the headlight setting checked by a Skoda Service
Partner after replacing the light bulb.
Low beam light
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Open the bonnet.
– Remove the protective cap ⇒ page 247, fig. 217.
– Turn the connector with the light bulb up to the stop towards the left
and remove ⇒ fig. 219.
A
A
A
B
A
C
B3T-0034H
Fig. 218 Removing the light
bulb for the parking and
main beam light
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
A
C
Fig. 219 Removing the light
bulb for the low beam light
A
B
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
248
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Fuses and light bulbs 249
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– Replace the lamp, insert the connector with the new lamp and turn to
the right up to the stop.
– Insert the protective cover.
Note
We recommend that you have the headlight setting checked by a Skoda Service
Partner after replacing the light bulb.
Fog lights
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Grasp the grille at the point marked with the arrow and take it out
⇒ fig. 220.
– Guide your hand into the opening in which the grille was located and
press the spring bolt ⇒ fig. 221.
– Take out the fog light.
– Turn the connector with the light bulb up to the stop towards the left
and remove.
– Replace the lamp, insert the connector with the new lamp and turn to
the right up to the stop.
– To re-insert the fog light, first of all place the fog light with the bolt on
the side opposite the marking.
– Press into place the headlight onto the side facing the marking.
– FIrst of all put the grille in place on the side opposite the marking.
– Press into place the protective grille onto the side facing the
marking.
Rear light unit
Fig. 220 Front bumper:
Protective grille
Fig. 221 Remove front fog
light
Fig. 222 Remove the outer
part of the rear light unit
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
249
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Fuses and light bulbs250
Remove and install the outer part of the rear light unit
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Open the boot lid/luggage compartment door.
– Take out the plug ⇒ page 249, fig. 222 and unscrew the rear light unit
using a torx wrench
18)
.
– Carefully remove the rear light unit. Do not pull the grommet with the
cables out of the body.
– To re-insert the rear light unit, first of all guide it with the support
⇒ fig. 224 towards the front onto a bolt on the bodywork.
– Carefully press the rear light unit into the bodywork.
– Screw the rear light unit tight and press in the plugs ⇒ page 249,
fig. 222.
Remove and install the inner part of the rear light unit
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Open the boot lid/luggage compartment door.
– Take off the cover of the rear light unit on the inner side of the bonnet
lid ⇒ fig. 223.
–Press the spring bolt ⇒ fig. 223 and take the lamp holder out of the
housing of the rear light unit.
– To re-insert the lamp holder, guide it into the housing of the rear light
unit.
– Press onto the spring bolt until it locks in place.
– Guide the cover of the rear light unit into the inner side of the bonnet
lid.
Caution
When removing and installing the rear light unit make sure not to damage the
paintwork of the vehicle and the rear light unit.
Changing light bulbs in the rear light unit
18)
The torx wrench is located in a vehicle toolkit box on the spare wheel.
Fig. 223 Remove the inner
part of the rear light unit
A
A
Fig. 224 Outer part of the
rear light unit: Lamps
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
250
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Fuses and light bulbs 251
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Change bulbs in the outer part of the rear light unit
– To change a bulb, turn its fixture to the left up to the top and take it out.
– Now change the bulb, insert again the fixture with the bulb into the
housing and turn it to the right up to the stop.
Change bulbs in the inner part of the rear light unit
– To change a bulb of the rear light ⇒ fig. 225, pull the defective bulb
out of the fixture and insert a new one.
– To change the bulb of the rear fog light ⇒ fig. 225, turn the defec-
tive bulb to the left up to the stop and take it out.
– Press a new bulb into the fixture and turn the bulb to the right as far as
the stop.
Fitting position of the bulbs in the outer rear light unit ⇒ page 250, fig. 224.
1 - Turn signal light
2 - Parking lights / Brake light
3 - Parking lights
Fitting position of the bulbs in the inner rear light unit ⇒ fig. 225.
1 - Reversing lights
2 - Rear fog light
Licence plate light
– Unscrew the glass cover of the light ⇒ fig. 226.
– Take the faulty bulb out of the fixture and insert a new one.
– Replace the the glass cover of the light and press it down to the stop -
ensure that the glass cover is correctly installed.
– Screw the glass cover tight.
Fig. 225 Inner part of the
rear light unit: Lamps
A
1
A
2
Fig. 226 Rear bumper:
Licence plate light
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
251
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Fuses and light bulbs252
Luggage compartment light
– Open the boot lid/luggage compartment door.
– Insert a narrow screwdriver into the slot ⇒ fig. 227 and carefully take
out the light.
– Take the faulty bulb out of the fixture and insert a new one.
– Insert the light first of all on the side opposite the arrow and carefully
press it in stepwise until it locks in place.
Lighting for vanity mirror
Change the bulb in the lighting for the vanity mirror on the front
passenger side
– Insert a narrow screwdriver into the slot ⇒ fig. 228 and carefully take
out the light.
– Take the faulty bulb out of the fixture and insert a new one.
– Insert the light first of all on the side opposite the arrow and carefully
press it in stepwise until it locks in place.
Change the bulb in the lighting for the vanity mirror on the driver
side
– Insert a narrow screwdriver into the slot on the left side of the light and
carefully pull out the light.
– Take the faulty bulb out of the fixture and insert a new one.
– Insert the light first of all on the right side and carefully press it in step-
wise until it locks in place.
Interior lights at the rear
– Insert a narrow screwdriver into the slot ⇒ fig. 229 and carefully take
out the cover.
Fig. 227 Remove the luggage
compartment light
Fig. 228 Lighting for vanity
mirror
Fig. 229 Roof liner light at
the rear
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
252
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Fuses and light bulbs 253
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– Take the faulty bulb out of the fixture and insert a new one.
– Insert the light first of all on the side opposite the arrows ⇒ page 252,
fig. 229 and press it in carefully until it locks in place.
Warning light in the doors and entry light
– Fold out the light in direction of arrow ⇒ fig. 230.
– Take the faulty bulb out of and insert a new one.
– First of all insert the light at the bottom and press in the upper part.
Fig. 230 Front door: Warning
light
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
253
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Fuses and light bulbs254
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
254
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Technical Data 255
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Technical Data
Technical Data
General information
The details given in the official vehicle registration documents always take prece-
dence over the details in the Owner's Manual. Please refer to the official vehicle
registration documents or consult your Škoda Service Partner concerning the
engine with which your vehicle is equipped.
Used abbreviations
Performances
The listed performance values were determined without performance-reducing
equipment, e.g. air conditioning system.
Weight
The loading capacity is reduced in line with the range of the special equipment. The
unloaden weight contains a fuel tank topped up to 90%.
Identification details
Abbreviation Importance
kW Kilowatt, measuring unit for the engine output
rpm Engine revolutions per minute
Nm Newton meter, measuring unit for the engine torque
CO
2
in g/km
discharged quantity of carbon dioxide in grams per driven kilom-
eter
RON
Research octane number, measuring unit for the knocking resist-
ance of petrol
TSI Fuel Stratified Injection
DPF Diesel particle filter
M5 5-speed manual gearbox
M6 6-speed manual gearbox
DQ6 6-speed automatic gearbox DSG
DQ7 7-speed automatic gearbox DSG
Fig. 231 Vehicle data sticker
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
255
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Technical Data256
Vehicle data sticker
The vehicle data sticker ⇒ page 255, fig. 231 is located on the floor of the luggage
compartment and is also stated in the Service schedule.
The vehicle data sticker contains the following data:
Vehicle identification number (VIN).
Vehicle type.
Gearbox code, paint number, interior equipment number, engine output,
engine code.
Partial description of the vehicle.
7GG - vehicles with DPF ⇒ page 186.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number - VIN (vehicle body number) is stamped into the
engine compartment on the right hand shock absorber dome. This number is also
located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the windscreen (together with
a VIN bar code).
Engine number
The engine number is stamped into the engine block.
Type plate (production plate)
Is located on the left middle pillar of the bodywork.
Homologation sign
The homologation sign is located on the lock carrier. Vehicles for certain countries
do not have an homologation sign.
Sticker on inside of fuel filler flap
The sticker is affixed to the inside of the fuel filler flap. The sticker contains the
following data:
• The prescribed types of fuel,
• Tyre size,
• Tyre pressure.
Fuel consumption according to the regulations
(99/100/EU)
Depending on the range of the special equipment, style of driving, traffic situation,
weather influences and vehicle condition, the consumption values which in prac-
tice result when using the vehicle can deviate from the indicated values.
Urban traffic
The consumption measurement in urban traffic begins with starting of the cold
engine. Afterwards the normal urban traffic is simulated.
Non-urban traffic
For the consumption measurement in non-urban traffic the vehicle, as in daily
motoring, is accelerated and braked several times in all gears. The vehicle speed
changes within the range from 0 to 120 km/h.
Combined traffic
The consumption value in the combined traffic consists of 37% from the value for
the urban traffic and of 63% from the value for the non-urban traffic.
Note
• Please note that the information stated in the official vehicle registration
documents always takes priority.
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
256
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Technical Data 257
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Dimensions
Dimensions (mm)
Length 4838
Width 1817
Width including exterior mirror 2009
Height
1462/1482
a)
/1447
b)
a)
The value is valid for vehicles with rough road package.
b)
The value corresponds to the status with sport chassis.
Wheel base 2761
Track gauge front / rear 1545/1518
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
257
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Technical Data258
1.8 ltr./118 kW TSI - EU 4
Engine
Performances
Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO
2
emission (in g/km)
M6
Power output kW per rpm 118/5000 - 6200
Maximum torque Nm per rpm 250/1500 - 4200
Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm
3
)
4/1798
Fuel - unleaded petrol min. RON 95
M6
Maximum speed km/h 220
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h s 8,6
M6
Urban 10,4
Non-urban 6,0
Combination 7,6
CO
2
emission - combination
180
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
258
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Technical Data 259
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Capacities (in liter)
Weight (in kg)
Fuel tank capacity/of which spare 60/9
Reservoir for windscreen washer system/ with headlight cleaning system 3/5,5
Engine oil
a)
a)
Oil capacity with oil filter change. Inspect oil level when filling; do not fill up too much. The oil level must be between the markings ⇒ page 211, “Check engine oil level”.
3,0
Cooling system of the vehicle 5,5
M6
Permissible gross weight 2074
Unloaden weight ready for work 1454
Loading capacity 620
Loading capacity when using the TLC 545
Permissible front axle load 1200
Permissible rear axle load 1250
Permissible trailer load, trailer braked/unbraked
1500
a)
1700
b)
a)
Uphills up to 12 %
b)
Uphills up to 8%
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
259
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Technical Data260
1.9 ltr./77 kW TDI PD - EU 4
Engine
Performances
Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO
2
emission (in g/km)
Power output kW per rpm 77/4000
Maximum torque Nm per rpm 250/1900
Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm
3
)
4/1896
Fuel Diesel
M5
Maximum speed km/h 190
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h s 12,5
M5
Urban 7,3
Non-urban 4,8
Combination 5,7
CO
2
emission - combination
151
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
260
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Technical Data 261
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Capacities (in liter)
Weight (in kg)
Fuel tank capacity/of which spare 60/9
Reservoir for windscreen washer system/ with headlight cleaning system 3/5,5
Engine oil
a)
a)
Oil capacity with oil filter change. Inspect oil level when filling; do not fill up too much. The oil level must be between the markings ⇒ page 211, “Check engine oil level”.
3,8
Cooling system of the vehicle 5,5
M5
Permissible gross weight 2076
Unloaden weight ready for work 1456
Loading capacity 620
Loading capacity when using the TLC 545
Permissible front axle load 1200
Permissible rear axle load 1250
Permissible trailer load, trailer braked/unbraked
1500
a)
1700
b)
a)
Uphills up to 12 %
b)
Uphills up to 8%
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
261
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Technical Data262
2.0 ltr./103 kW TDI PD - EU 4
Engine
Performances
Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO
2
emission (in g/km)
Power output kW per rpm 103/4000
Maximum torque Nm per rpm 320/1800-2500
Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm
3
)
4/1968
Fuel Diesel
M6 DQ6
Maximum speed km/h 207 205
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h s 10,2 10,2
M6 DQ6
Urban 7,5 8,9
Non-urban 5,0 5,5
Combination 5,9 6,8
CO
2
emission - combination
155 177
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
262
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Technical Data 263
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Capacities (in liter)
Weight (in kg)
Fuel tank capacity/of which spare 60/9
Reservoir for windscreen washer system/ with headlight cleaning system 3/5,5
Engine oil
a)
a)
Oil capacity with oil filter change. Inspect oil level when filling; do not fill up too much. The oil level must be between the markings ⇒ page 211, “Check engine oil level”.
3,8
Cooling system of the vehicle 5,5
M6 DQ6
Permissible gross weight 2110 2132
Unloaden weight ready for work 1490 1512
Loading capacity 620 620
Loading capacity when using the TLC 545 545
Permissible front axle load 1200 1200
Permissible rear axle load 1250 1250
Permissible trailer load, trailer braked/unbraked 1800 1800
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
263
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Technical Data264
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
264
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Index 265
Index
A
Abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Adjusting seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 150
electrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Adjusting the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
AHL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Recirculated air mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Head airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Side airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Alternator
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Antilock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Antilock brake system (ABS)
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Auto Check Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Auto Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Automatic gearbox
Emergency programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Automatic gearbox DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Selector lever-emergency unlocking . . . . . . . 128
Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Automatic light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Automatic seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Automatic vehicle wash systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Automatic wiper/washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Avoiding damage to your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 216
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Inspecting the electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Operation in winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Belt
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 138
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Boot lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 42
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Brake
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Brake pads
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Button on the driver's door
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Buttons for the central locking system . . . . . . . . . . 39
C
Car jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230, 235
Car state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
CD changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
265
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Index266
Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Changing the engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Changing wheels around . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Check engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Side airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Child safety lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Child safety seat
on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Classification into groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Use of child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Children and safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Climatic
Air outlet vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Climatronic
Air outlet vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Defrosting windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Recirculated air mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Climatronic (automatic air conditioning) . . . . . . 100
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Clothes hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Cockpit
General view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Convenience operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Converting/masking over headlights . . . . . . . . . . 192
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
replenishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Coolant level
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Coolant quantity
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Coolant temperature/coolant level
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Correct seated position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Counter for distance driven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Cup holder
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
D
Daylight driving lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Deactivating
an airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Deactivating an airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Defrosting rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
De-icing the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Detachable towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Diesel engines
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Diesel particle filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Direction indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Distance driven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Door
Child safety lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Driver-steering recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Driving economically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
E
EDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Electric power-operated window
Operational faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Electric sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Electrically adjustable exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Electronic Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Electronic stability programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Electronic stability programme (ESP)
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Engine
starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Engine compartment
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
266
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Index 267
Engine electronics
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
replenishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Engine oil level
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Engine revolutions counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 192
ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Exhaust gas
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Exhaust gas inspection
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Exterior mirror heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
F
First-aid box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Fixing net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 249
Indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Fog lights with the function Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Front armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Front headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Diesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Saving energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Fuel reserve
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Full wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
G
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Gearbox
mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
General view
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Glass roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
GSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 137
H
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Hazard warning light system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Head airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Headlamp range adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Headlight cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Headlights
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Headlight cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Heated windscreen washer nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Heating
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating) . . . . . . . . 106
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
I
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Interior light
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Interior lighting
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Interior monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Intermittent wiping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
J
Jacking points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 237
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
267
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Index268
K
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
L
Lashing eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Leather care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Light
automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Light bulbs
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Lighting of the interior of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Lights
converting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Range adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Liquid in reservoir for windscreen washer system
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Locking and unlocking from inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Low beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Low beam light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Lugagge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 42
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 42, 78
Folding hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Lashing eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Luggage rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
M
Main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 60
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Manual shifting of gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Memory for the on-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 145
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 137
Motoring abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Multi-functional indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
N
Navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Note holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
O
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Onboard computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Open door
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Opening a single door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Opening for skis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Operation in winter
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
De-icing windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Overview of the engine compartment . . . . . . . . . 210
P
Paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Paint damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Parking aid
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
parking aid
Front and rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Parking light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Parking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Passive Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Petrol engines
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Power window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
268
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Index 269
Power windows
Button in front passenger door and in rear doors
48
Button on the driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
R
Radiator fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Rear armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 91
Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Rear window
heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Rear window heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Rear-view mirror
Exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Recharge battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Roof aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
S
Safe securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Safety information
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Safety wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Saving electrical energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Seat belt height adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 158
Belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
taking off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Seat heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Selector lever lock
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Selector lever-emergency unlocking (DSG) . . . . . 128
Service Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Service Interval Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Setting the clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Side airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Stability system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
after fuel tank has run empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Diesel engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Steering
Driver-steering recommendation . . . . . . . . . 181
Steering force assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Storage compartment
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Storage facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Stowage compartment
Umbrella . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Sun screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Switching lights on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
T
Tailgate
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Taking care of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 137
Temperature
outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
The roof luggage rack system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Thickness of brake pads
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Tiptronic
automatic gearbox DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
269
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Index270
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Towing protection monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
towing vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Tow-starting and towing vehicle
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Traction control system (TCS)
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Twindoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Two-way radio systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Tyre inflation pressure
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Tyres
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
U
Underbody protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Uphill-Start off-Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Ventilation
Auxiliary ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
W
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Warning symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
with a high-pressure cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Washing vehicle by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Wax treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Wheel
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222, 233
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Windows
de-icing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Windscreen washer nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Windshield washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Windshield washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Windshield wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Wiper blades
Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
X
Xenon headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
270
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
Škoda Auto pursues a policy of constant product and model development. We trust
that you will understand that changes to models in terms of shape, equipment and
engineering, may be introduced at any time. It is therefore not possible for legal
claims to be made based on the data, illustrations and descriptions contained in
this Owner's Manual.
Reprinting, reproduction or translation, either in whole or in part, is not permitted
without the written consent of Škoda Auto.
Škoda Auto expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws.
We reserve the right to make changes to this document.
Issued by: ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
© ŠKODA AUTO a.s. 2008
NKO
B6
20
.
book
Page
272
Wednesday
,
March
26
,
2008
3:15
PM
SIMPLY CLEVER
ŠkodaService
ŠkodaGenuine Parts
ŠkodaGenuine Accessories
NKO B6.indd 2NKO B6.indd 2 21.4.2008 9:03:0021.4.2008 9:03:00
SIMPLY CLEVER
ŠkodaSuperb
OWNER'S MANUAL
How you can contribute to a cleaner environment
The fuel consumption of your Škoda - and thus the level of pollutants contained
in the exhaust - is also determined by how you drive.
The noise level and wear and tear are also influenced by how you personally
handle your vehicle. This Owner ´s Manual tells you how to drive your Škoda to
achieve the minimum impact on the environment, and how to save money at
the same time. Look up „Environment“ in the Index to find out more.
Please also refer to all the texts identified with a C
in this Owner ´s Manual.
Make your contribution - for the sake of the environment.
www.skoda-auto.com
Návod k obsluze
Superb anglicky 03.08
3T0 012 003 C
Superb anglicky 03.08
NKO B6.indd 1NKO B6.indd 1 21.4.2008 9:02:3821.4.2008 9:02:38
… 229 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Skoda Superb - 2008 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Skoda Superb - 2008 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 19,12 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Skoda Superb - 2008

Skoda Superb - 2008 Aanvulling / aanpassing - Nederlands - 24 pagina's

Skoda Superb - 2008 Snelstart handleiding - Nederlands - 2 pagina's

Skoda Superb - 2008 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 280 pagina's

Skoda Superb - 2008 Snelstart handleiding - Deutsch - 2 pagina's

Skoda Superb - 2008 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 280 pagina's

Skoda Superb - 2008 Aanvulling / aanpassing - Deutsch - 23 pagina's

Skoda Superb - 2008 Snelstart handleiding - English - 2 pagina's

Skoda Superb - 2008 Aanvulling / aanpassing - English - 23 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info